T.  I.  B^nltze, 


'£WY0R« 


Apparatus  unexcelled  by  any  in  th^  market. 
“Star”extra  brilliant  DresdenAlbumen  Paper. 
Phenix  Dry  Plates.  ' 

Ebonite  Papier  Mache  Trays.  / 
Rectiscope  Lenses.  !W 

^ T.  L.  S.  Lenses.  - 

Superior  Portrait  and  Gem  LenseSi 
Sing-le  View  Lense^ 

T.  L.  S.  View  Finde'r^^'f 
Par  Excellence  Ruby  limps. 
Schultzo’s  pure  and  unrivaled  Pyrogallic 
Acid. 

Hydrochinon,  best  and  cheapest  in  market. 
Par  Excellence  Dry  Plato  Developer,  p- 
Par  Excellence  IXMing'  Solution.  ^ ^ 
The  “Best”  Varnishes  and  Collodions. 

' . Polished  Rubber  Trays. 

• Acme  Burnishers. 

Bryant’s  Backgrounds  and  Accessories.  ^ 
Collins'  Card  Stock, 

Etc.»  Etc. 


^^NO  DEI-KYS.H^ 


We  fill  all  orders  the  Very  day  vve  receive  them,  if  at  all  possi- 
ble, and  pride  ourselves  on  our  promptness.  Our  system  of 
filling-  and  dispatching  orders  is  perfect,  and  we  have  every 
facility  for  making  QUICK  SHIPMENTS — a large  stock,  plenty  of  floor 
room,  competent  Cinployees,  etc.  We  are  in  close  proximity  to 
all  railroad  depots  and  steamship  lines,  to  which  we  deliver  all 
parcels  FREE  O?  CHARGE.  Copies  of  bills  of  lading  are  sent 
at  once  to  consignees. 


Do  flot  Cat  Up  This  liist. 


Tn  ordering  be  as  explicit  as  possible,  giving  name  and  number  of 
articles  wanted;  if  any  doubt  exists  in  your  mind,  give  page  of  Catalogue, 
hut  never  cut  up  the  List.  Be  sure  you  give  size  wanted  when  ordering 
Plates,  Frames  or  Mats. 

In  making  out  your  order,  write  only  one  item  on  a line.  If  you  have 
any  remarks  to  make,  do  so  on  the  other  side  of  order  blank. 

Always  give  your  A'amc,  Town,  County  and  State. 

Specify  if  goods  are  to  be  sent  by  Freight  or  Express.  If  you  have  any] 
preference,  please  name  Exj/ie.  s or  Railroad  to  be  sent  by. 

Gun  Cotton,  Dry  Platt  s or  liquids  are  not  mailable.  Goods  sent  by  mail 
are  at  risk  of  purchaser.  Always  include  postage  in  your  remittance.  ^ ' 

Parties  ordering  goods  by  freight  should  send  full  amount  with  order  ; 
or,  if  desired,  goods  can  be  sent  consigned  to  Bank  or  Express  Company — 
in  which  case  one-half  the  amount  of  bill  must  accompany  the  order. 

Goods' packed  with  the  utmost  care  ; if  lost  or  damaged  in  transportation, 
Express  or  Railroad  Company  are  responsible. 


XER7V^:s,  ETC. 


Customers  ordering  goods  sent  C.  O.  D.,  should  send  cash  enough  to  pay 
Express  charges  both  ways,  as  a guarantee  that  goods  will  be  taken,  the 
amount  sent  being  credited  on  the  bill. 

DISCOUNT.  — Two  per  cent,  will  be  allowed  for  cash  on  all  goods 
named  in  this  Catalogue. 

Make  your  remittance  by  Draft,  Post-Office  or  Express  Money  Orders. 

Do  not  send  personal  che  cks  or  drafts  on  country  banks. 

When  in  want  of  any  goods,  look  for  our  Order  Blanks,  and  use  no  other. 

Our  great  reputation  for  superiority  in  quality  of  goods,  as  well  as 
promptness  and  accuracy  in  filling  orders,  will  be  strictly  maintained,  and 
no  pains  spared  to  st^ure  your  entire  satisfaction. 


1 ¥ Ae  invite  a careful  and  critical  examination  of  this  our  Annual 
Catalogue  of  Photographic  Materials  which  we  have  the 
pleasure  to  offer. 

One  of  the  long  standing  rules  of  our  Catalogue  Department  has 
been  to  condense  when  possible  without  curtailing  our  usefulness,  as  we 
fail  to  see  the  wisdom  of  consolidating  into  a catalogue  for  the  use  of 
Photographers  (Amateur  and  Professional)  hundreds  of  articles  which 
the  photographer  never  uses  or  buys,  simply  to  make  the  boast  “ we 
issue  the  largest  catalogue  in  the  trade.” 

t’' 

We  are  confident  of  our  ability  to  cater  to  the  wants  of  the  Photo- 
graphic Trade.  Our  facilities  are  unsurpassed,  and,  having  a large  jobbing 
trade,  we  are  warranted  in  manufacturing  and  importing  in  large  quan- 
tities, thus  enabling  us  to  turn  our  goods  quickly  and  at  a small  margin 
of  profit. 

We  serve  all  alike,  very  courteously;  our  goods  are  guaranteed  in 
every  particular  exactly  as  represented,  and  our  prices  will  always  be 
found  as  low  as  is  consistent  with  first  quality  goods. 

As  the  values  of  certain  goods  fiuctuate  frequently,  the  prices  in  this 
catalogue  are  subject  to  change  without  notice. 

New  catalogues,  circulars,  etc.,  will  be  mailed  to  anyone  whose 
address  is  handed  or  sent  us  with  the  request  for  copies. 


New  York,  1889. 


Yours  very  truly, 

SCHULTZE  PHOTO  EQUIP.  CO. 


5et?ultz<^  pi7oto  C0/5 

glljLE  Hdjll^OMATId  LEj^Eg.^ 


'^TYHESE  lenses  are  so  constructed  as  to  give  pictures  of  great 
brilliancy  and  sharpness,  with  moderate  angle,  and  are  excellent 
for  the  purpose  of  reproducing  scenes  of  still  life,  such  as  landscapes. 
They  work  with  quite  large  stops,  and  answer  very  well  also  for  groups 
in  the  open  air.  They  are  securely  and  neatly  mounted,  as  shown  in 
the  following  illustrations. 


STYLE  “ A.” 

Mounted  in  finely  finished  brass, 
with  sliding  movement  for  fine  ad- 
justment ; also,  a set  of  stops  and 
leather  caps. 


No, 

Size. 

Diameter 
of  Lens. 

Focus. 

Price. 

41^x63^ 

or 

4x5 

13^  inch. 

5|  inch. 

8.60 

2 

6>^x8K 

or 

5x8 

IM  “ 

4.60 

3 

8x10 

2i  “ 

i 7.36 

J4aue  you  eu^r  tried  a I^^etisqope  Ceps  ? If  pot,  let  us 
sepd  you  ope  op  trial. 

3 


i 


i 


S'CHi/L.TZEi  ^^OTO"  EQUi P^IE/^T  Co.  NEiW  Y^RK 


STYLE  ‘‘  B.” 

Mounted  in  finely  finished  brass,  with* 
sliding  movement  for  fine  adjustment  in 
focusing;  also,  a set  of  stops  and  brass 
cap. 


No. 

Siz'^. 

Diameter 
of  Lens. 

Focus. 

Price. 

1 

6>^x8M 

or 

5x8 

1^  inch. 

734  inch. 

4.50 

2 

8x10 

21  ** 

9|  “ 

7.35 

8 

10x12 

2H  “ 

05 

9.60 

STYLE  ‘‘  C.** 

Mounted  in  finely  finished  brass,  with  inv^ 
proved  rotary  stops  and  leather  cap. 


No. 

Size. 

Diameter 
of  Lens. 

Focus. 

Price, 

""  

- 

. . . 

1 

' 41^x634 

or  . _ 

: 4x5 

1}4  inch. 

5|  inch. 

5.75- 

2 

i 6Kx8>^.. 

' or 

5x8 

• “ 

' 

! • • 

7.50 

8 ' 

8x10 

2^  “ ‘ 

' 9|  “ 

9.50 

4 

i 10x12 

' ^Vz  “ 

|l3^  “ 

13.50 

Cepsi^s  we  offer  are  peat^ri^.appi^araijiee 
a9d  sdperior  i9  quality  to  ai^y  09  tl?^  marK^t. 


4 


^ j^S^!:<J^^TZf  f^QroyEp^uriP^El^T  JIG*  YORK-^; 


STYLE  “ D.*; 

Mounted  in  brass,  with  sliding  move- 
ment, stationary  stop  and  brass  cap. 


■ No. 

Size. 

Diameter 
of  Lens. 

Focus. 

Price. 

1 

4x5 

1%  inch. 

5|  inch. 

3.00 

s 

6x8 

1%  “ - 

‘‘ 

4.00 

STYLE  “ E.” 

Mounted  in  brass,  with  sliding  movement,  set  of 
stops  and  leather  cap. 


No. 

Size 

Diameter 
of  Lens. 

Focus. 

Price. 

0 

0 

4x5 

1 inch. 

53^  inch. 

2.75 

STYLE  “ F.” 

Nickel  mounting,  set  of  stops  and 
leather  cap. 


1 

No. 

Size. 

Diameter 
of  Lens. 

Focus. 

Price. 

0 

4x5 

inch. 

5 inch. 

3.00 

T‘  3r(^  fi9(^,  ai^d  pri^i^s  (^x^eedii^^ly 

lou/.  Jl^ey  ar(^  a big  stieQ(^s^. 


5 


STYLE  “G.*' 

Nickel  mounting  rotary  stops,  and 
leather  cap. 


No. 

Size. 

Diameter 
of  Lens. 

Focus. 

Price. 

€ 

61^x8^ 

or 

5x8 

inch. 

71^  inch 

4.50 

E consider  the  above  the  largest  assortment  of  first-class  singla^ 
achromatic  lenses  offered  by  any  house  in  the  trade.  Every 
lens  warranted  in  every  respect. 

Purchasers  will  please  specify  distinctly  when  ordering,  the  Style 
and  No.  desired.  This  will  avoid  a great  deal  of  annoyance  and  vexa- 
tious delays. 


T.  L S.  Sapid  SECTiumAS  Imms. 


SHESE  LENSES  possess  many  valuable  properties  peculiar  to  them- 
selves. They  are  perfectly  rectilinear,  and  work  well  with  the 
largest  diaphragms  for  groups  and  instantaneous  views.  Their  great 
compactness  and  lightness  are  a boon  to  the  outdoor  artist,  while  their 
rapidity,  flatness  of  field,  and  penetrating  power — in  which,  .’rom  care- 
fully made  tests,  they  are  equal  to  any  of  the  noted  lenses  in  the  mar- 
ket— render  them  very  valuable  for  landscapes  and  copying. 

To  those  to  whom  the  price  of  the  Rectiscope  Rapid  Rectilinear 
would  be  an  obstacle,  the  T.  L.  S.  Lenses  will  be  found  especially  sat- 
isfactory. 


F’RIOES.  t'^' 


No. 

Size  of  Plate. 

Back  Focus. 

Diameter 
of  Lens. 

Price. 

1 

4x5 

43^  inch. 

ly^^  inch. 

11.00 

2 

5x8 

8 

1^  “ 

15.00 

3 

6Kx8K 

0 

tH 

\%  “ 

24.00 

4 

8x10 

UK  “ 

2i  “ 

30.00 

5 

10x12 

16 

2K  “ 

36.00 

6 

12x16 

CO 

Hj- 

cA 

50.00 

7 

17x20 

24K  “ 

CO 

75.00 

8 

20x24 

00 

100.00 

SHE  size  of  plates  given  in  this  table  are  to  be  understood  using 
medium  or  large  stops.  When  using  the  smallest  stops  they  will 
cover  a plate  fully  as  large  as  the  next  larger  size  lens,  with  a medium 
or  large  stop. 

We  will  send  any  size  on  trial  for  ten  days,  provided  the  price  of 
same  is  deposited  with  us.  If  not  satisfactory,  they  may  be  returned 
to  us,  and  if  in  as  good  condition  as  when  sent  out,  the  money  will  be 
refunded. 

The  No.  1 we  can  furnish  in  matched  pairs  for  stereoscopic  work. 


Superior  Gem  Tubes. 

^ size,  3 inch  back  focus each,  $2.25 

T “ 4 “ “ “ “ 3.75 

Bi^ass  Plates  fot»  same. 

For  four  ^ on  a ^ plate $1.00 

“ nine  ^ on  a 5x7  “ 1.80 

“ four  on  a 5x7  “ 1.30 


T.  L.  S.  View  Finder. 


Is  the  best  in  the  market,  and  preferred  by  all  who  have  seen  it  to 
any  and  all  others. 

Price, 


$2.50. 


r/)p  scHuLTZE  CO.  Nay/  fyofij^t. 


The  “ Rectiscope  ’’  Rapid  Rectilinear  Lens. 


f^OMPARED  critically  with  the  best  productions  of  the  most  famo.us 
makers,  the  Rectiscope  lenses  have  in  every  case  been  acknowl- 
edged at  least  equal,  and  in  most  cases  superior,  to  all  competitors. 

In  their  manufacture  no  expense  has  been  spared  to  make  them 
the  best  that  could  be  produced.  Every  lens  has  both  the  guarantee  of 
the  maker  and  ourselves.  They  are  absolutely  aplanatic,  and  can  be 
focused  sharp  at  the  extreme  edge  of  the  field,  being  entirely  free  from 
astigmatism.  They  are  extremely  rapid  in  action,  and  combine  all  the 
valuable  qualities  desirable  in  a Portrait  or  Landscape  Lens. 

Being  made  of  a quality  of  glass  which  is  extremely  free  from  color, 
they  therefore  allow  more  actinic  light  to  pass  through  them  than  is 
usual  with  even  the  best  lenses  of  other  makers. 

They  give  pictures  of  unrivaled  sharpness  and  brilliancy,  because 
they  are  more  perfectly  polished  than  any  similar  lens. 

For  out-door  architecture  their  depth  of  focus,  fiatness  of  field,  and 
perfect  rectilinear  qualities,  enable  them  to  produce  pictures  at  once 
absolutely  free  from  distortion  and  perfectly  harmonious  in  perspec-  ^ 
tive.  The  same  qualities,  added  to  their  quickness  of  working,  renders  j 
them  invaluable  in  photographing  interiors,  especially  those  which  i 
are  only  moderately  lighted.  ^ 

It  will  readily  be  seen  that  all  these  advantages  are  the  direct  or 
indirect  results  of  the  perfection  of  the  formulae  upon  which  the  curves 
of  the  lenses  are  computed,  aided  by  the  perfect  mechanical  skill  which 
has  so  thoroughly  carried  into  practice  the  results  giver  by  the  theo- 
retical calculations  of  these  curves. 

We  have,  therefore,  no  hesitation  in  claiming  that  they  are  the 
most  perfect  lenses  for  general  work  yet  offered  to  the  photographic 
fraternity. 


8 


srcHuLTZE:  f^HQro" EO{f[Pz\wr  CO.  /v£:v/  york- 


RRICeS. 


No. 

Size  of  Plate 
with 

medium  stop. 

Size  of  Plate 
with 

small  stop. 

Back  Focus. 

Equiv. 

Focus. 

Diameter 

of  Lens. 

Price. 

1 

4x5 

5x7 

4^ 

in. 

5 in. 

in. 

18.00 

2 

5x8 

6Kx8^ 

(6 

8 

iC 

27.50 

3 

6^x8^ 

8x10 

lOM 

(i 

11 

a 

37.50 

4 

8x10 

10x12 

iC 

15%  “ 

n 

48.00 

5 

10x12 

12x15 

16f 

a 

18|  “ 

a 

60.00 

6 

12x15 

16x18 

01  1 1 

a 

23^  “ 

3t\ 

c< 

75.00 

T 

17x20 

20x24 

25 

a 

273^  “ 

3^ 

it 

95.00 

8 

20x24 

22x28 

29 

n 

321^  “ 

a 

125.00 

No.  1 furnished  in  matched  pairs  to  use  stereoscopically. 

We  want  no  one  to  buy  a “ Rectiscope  ” lens  until  perf  ectly  satis- 
'hed  af  their  good  qualities.  We  will  send  any  size  on  trial  fcj-ten  days,- 
provided  the  price  of  same  is  deposited  with  us.  If  not  satisfactory 
they  may  be  returned,  and  if  in  as  good  condition  as  wheiii  sent  out, 
money  will  be  refunded. 


Scbult3e’9  donbeneings'lLenees. 


Plano-convex,  made  of  White  Crown  Glass,  are  short  focus,  and 
perfectly  polished.  We  can  safely  recommend  them  as  the  best  lenses 
ever  mad^for  solar  work  and  enlarging  on  Bromide  paper. 


4 inch  diameter,  each. . 

..$  1 50 

8 

inch  diameter,  each. . . . 

.$10  00 

434  “ 

tt 

ii 

..  3 00 

9 

6i  ' 

“ . . . 

. 15  00 

5 “ 

a 

..  3 75 

10 

< ( ii 

a 

. 20  00 

6 ' “ 

ii 

a 

..  5 00 

11 

ii 

a 

. 25  00 

7 

iC 

ti 

..  7 00 

12 

ii  a 

ii 

. 35  00 

Scbultje’s  IRetoucbing  ^laseee. 


2 

inch  lens, 

each. . . 

.$0  fO 

2K 

ii 

ii  ' 

3 

ii 

(( 

3^ 

(.C 

<( 

1 75 

4 

€i 

„ 2 25 

4>^ 

ii 

i( 

5 

if 

(( 

. 4 25 

534 

ii 

(( 

. 5 00 

6 

ii 

(( 

,.  6 00 

6K 

ii 

(< 

,.  7 00 

7 

if 

ii 

. 7 50 

ii 

ii 

. 8 50 

8 

ii 

(( 

T.  L.  S.  Wide  Angle  Rectilinear  Lenses. 


For  taking  views  of  buildings,  interiors,  etc.,  in  confined  situations' 
where  lenses  of  longer  focus  cannot  be  used,  and  where  absolute  recti- 
tude of  lines  is  absolute.  These  lenses  embrace  an  angle  of  from  90  to 
100  degrees. 

*^1-  I=RI03S.  t4* 


No. 

Size  of  Plate. 

Back  Focus. 

Diameter 
of  Lens. 

Price. 

1 

4x5 

3 inch. 

inch. 

15.00 

2 

5x8 

5 “ 

(( 

20.00 

8 

6^x8^ 

6 “ 

6i 

26.50 

4 

10x12 

8 “ 

42.00' 

5 

12x16 

11  “ 

a 

55.00 

6 

17x20 

15  “ 

(4 

80,00 

7 

20x24 

20  “ 

ti 

115.00 

The  size  of  plates  given  in  above  table  are  with  medium  stop ; with 
a small  stop  they  will  cover  much  larger  plates. 

No.  1 furnished  in  matched  pairs  for  stereoscopic  use.  Willh  ©ent 
on  trial  on  same  terms  as  the  T.  L.  S.  Rapid  Rectilinear 


fyoii  eappot  afford  a I^eetiscope  ^et  a “J.  1.  5*'' 


10 


"Rectiscope”  Wide  Angle  Lenses. 


fN  presenting  this  Objective  to  the  consideration  of  the  photographic 
public,  we  do  so  confident  that  it  is  the  best  and  most  rapid  wide- 
angle  Photographic  Objective  in  the  market.  It  is  absolutely  rectilinear, 
and  possesses,  in  so  far  as  any  wide-angle  lens  can,  the  qualities  that 
have  won  so  much  favor  for  the  Rectiscope  Rapid  Rectilinear. 

For  work  requiring  great  width  of  angle,  with  exact  rectilinear  re- 
sults, these  lenses  are  especially  well  adapted.  They  work  with  large 
stops,  giving  brilliant  images  over  an  angle  of  ninety  to  one  hundred 
degrees,  and  have  a remarkable  depth  of  focus. 

In  confined  landscape  situations,  where  a lens  of  ordinary  angle 
would  not  include  the  view  ; in  architectural  work,  where  lofty  build- 
ings have  to  be  taken  from  the  street  or  at  a short  range  ; in  copying 
large  drawings  in  rooms  of  moderate  length,  and  in  all  other  work 
where  great  width  of  angle,  combined  with  exactness  of  lines,  is  de- 
sired, no  lens  will  be  found  more  satisfactory. 

Compared  with  other  wide-angle  lenses,  these  are  distinguished  by 
the  comparatively  large  stops  with  which  they  give  sharp  images,  a 
result  which  is  largely  due  to  the  great  perfection  of  their  polish. 

The  No.  1 size  being  especially  valuable  as  stereoscopic  lenses, 
their  fine  perspective  effects,  enabling  the  artist  to  exercise  a great 
choice  of  foreground,  together  with  their  brilliancy  of  images,  render 
he  n particularly  satisfactory  for  this  class  of  work. 


7 F{eetiseope  i5  tl7(^  b(^5t  U/ide  C(^9S  ip  tpe  U/orld, 
apd  pric;(?  is  pot  (^xorbitapt  (^itljer. 


ij 


^ s^chul^tze:  new  york* 


i=Rioes.  i4* — 


0) 

a 

m 

3 

oi 

3 

No. 

Diameter 

of  Lens. 

Size  of  Pli 

with 

Medium  Si 

Size  of  Pit 

with 

Small  Stc 

o 

o 

a 

o 

c3 

PQ 

> 

3 

O* 

Price 

1 

4x5 

5x7 

2^ 

3^  in. 

$18.00 

2 

5x8 

63^x8^ 

4f 

“ 

25.00 

3 

6i^x8K 

8x10 

30.00 

4 

21^ 

10x12 

11x14 

n 

8|  “ 

48.00 

5 

12x15 

16x18 

lOK 

111  “ 

65.00 

6 

17x20 

20x24 

14 

15 

100.00 

7 

20x24 

22x28 

17 

18K  “ 

150.00 

We  will  send  any  size  on  trial  on  same  terms  as  the  “ Rectiscope  ” 
Rapid  Rectilinear^ 

Schultze’§  Compound  Focussers. 


STYLE  A.  STYLE  B. 


fT  is  always  difficult,  especially  when  working  with  a small  stop,  to 
decide  just  when  an  object  is  in  the  best  focus  with  the  eye  alone. 
For  this  cause  the  focusing  glass  is  almost  as  necessary  as  a camera,  if 
fine,  sharp  work  is  to  be  done.  , 

It  is  adjustable  either  by  screw  or  slip-tube,  and  should  be 
placed  against  the  back  of  the  ground  glass  plate  before  attempting  to 
focus  a view,  and  adjusted  so  as  to  show  the  ground  glass  surface 
sharply  while  still  pressed  against  the  back  of  the  plate.  Then  set  it 
rigidly  at  this  f -cus  by  clamping  it,  or  otherwise,  and  when  using  it 
on  the  view  afterward,  simply  bring  the  objects  to  a sharp  focus  in 
the  focusing  glass  by  moving  the  camera  lens  or  body  in  or  out. 
without  deranging  the  adjustment  of  the  examining  lens.  ^ 

Style  A each,  |2.00 

Style  B “ 2.50 


: 12 


Superior  Portrait  Lenses. 


WHESE  LENSES  give  fine  relief  and 
ejfe  roundness  in  their  images,  and  will 
be  found  very  satisfactory,  being  superior 
to  the  productions  of  some  of  the  most 
famous  manufacturers. 

Their  property  of  working  well  with  large 
stops  has  two  important  results.  It  causes 
a much  larger  number  of  rays  from  eacbr 
point  of  the  object  to  be  utilized  in  forming 
the  image  than  is  usually  the  case,  and  thus 
greatly  shortens  the  exposure.  Thus  it  oc- 
curs that  these  lenses  are  all  exceedingly 
rapid  compared  with  other  lenses  giving  tho 
same  field. 

The  roundness  or  statuesqueness  of  image  in  a photograph  is  duo 
partly  to  a proper  method  of  lighting  the  subject,  but  mainly  to  tho 
fact  that  the  front  lens  of  the  portrait  combination  admits  rays  from 
a very  large  part  of  the  front  half  of  the  subject.  The  larger  the  front 
lens  the  greater  will  be  the  ratio  of  this  part  to  the  whole  front  of  the 
object,  and  the  greater  the  resulting  solidity  of  image.  In  this  respect 
these  lenses  are  very  effective.  Their  greater  diameter  gives  a muclt 
larger  proportion  of  the  front  surface  of  the  object  than  most  other 
lenses  do,  and  joined  with  their  depth  of  focus,  produces  a very  perfect 
result. 

They  are  very  highly  polished  on  their  interior  or  balsam  surfaces 
(where  so  many  lenses  are  defective),  as  well  as  on  their  outer  faces. 
They  thus  have  an  almost  perfect  transparency  and  produce  images 
of  extraordinary  brilliancy. 

v-'  In  introducing  them  to  the  American  market  we  have  no  doubt  of 
their  favorable  reception  by  our  photographers,  or  of  their  sustaining 
with  ease  any  comparative  test  with  the  older  and  more  expensive 
lenses. 

r F»Rioes.  * 


No. 

Diameter. 

Focus. 

Size. 

Price. 

1 

4 

4x5 

$10.00 

2 

4ix6K 

20.00 

3 

2K 

5x8 

24.00 

4 

6>^x8>^  - 

48.00  ■' 

5 

4| 

n% 

10x12  - 

100.00 

U/(^  reeom(n(^9d  oiir  lipe  of  C(^9se$  equal  to  tl^ose  of  tl;^^ 
mo$t  farnous  raa^ers,  <^itl7(^rfor(^i(J9  or  do/nestie : but  if 
you  desire,  u/e  vuill  furpisl?  a9y  Ceps  op  tlpe  n\arKet. 


13 


r/)g  r go.;  /y£\^  YORK  * 


SCHULTE’S 

liqeriean  Favorite”  Ouls, 

ALL  ARTICLES  OF  WHICH  ARE  WARRANTED  IN  EVERY  RESPECT. 


Ttiese  Outfits  lighter,  more  compact,  far  handsomer 
■■  and  more  accurate  than  any  which  are 

offered  at  same  price,  many  professional  photo- 
graphers HAVE  BOUGHT  THEM  AND  USE  THEM  CONSTANTLY, 


|i  tflch  OHtft  t!!8  Dens  iliiie  is  Qiorth  the  price  of  the  oihole  Outfit, 


YtYHESE  cameras  are  made  of  Kiln  dried  Mahogany,  and  for 
durability  cannot  be  excelled.  (Most  other  Cameras  at  same 
prices  are  made  of  soft  wood,  which  warps  and  cracks  with 
every  change  in  the  weather,  and  soon  makes  them  worthless.) 
They  are  nicely  finished  with  fine  brass  trimmings,  have  rubber 
bellows,  folding  bed  with  new  central  latcli,  for  making 
bed  rigid  instantaneously,  sing^le  Swing  movement  and 
vertical  sliifling  front.  The  ground  glass  folds  upwards, 
avoiding  all  possibility  of  breakage,  and  making  camera  more 
compact.  The  Outfits  consist  of 


I Camera  as  described  above. 

I Schultze  Light  Weight  Double  Dry  Plate  Holder. 

I Improved  Folding  Tripod. 

I Schultze  Single  View  Lens,  “ Style  A,"  “ze/ZM  a set  of  stops. 
I Carrying  Case.  


S 

4 X 5,  complete 

“ 

5 x8,  “ 

5 x8,  with  Stereo  Lenses,  etc. . . . 

6ix8i,  “ 

8 xlO,  “ 


$10.00 
. 12.00 
. 12.00 
. 18.50 
. 14.00 
. 26.00 


Jl?e  “/^merieai^  pauorite”  is  tl7e  best  lou/-pric(?d  Outfit 
(?v;er  offered. 


14 


Thg  scHuL^rzE. 


all  ^a/i\era5  apd  /ipparatu^  /manufactured  by  tl?^  3el?ultz<5 
pi^oto  Equip/i\<^nt  ^o. — I 


Tm  "WLfW’ 

are  destined  to  become  exceedingly  popular.  They  are  made 
in  the  same  excellent  manner  that  characterizes  all  our 
'work  ; we  have  spared  no  pains  to  make  them  one  of  the  most  desira- 
ble cameras  in  market ; they  are  indeed  strictly  first-class  in  all  their 
appointments. 

They  are  made  of  Honduras  mahogany,  highly  polished,  with  nickel 
trimmings,  have  rubber  bellows,  folding  platform  with  improved 
central  catch  for  making  bed  rigid  instantaneously,  single  swing,  and 
vertical  sliding  front.  


“ELilTE"  OUTFITS  consist  of 

1 Single  Swing  Camera,  as  described  above. 

1 Schultze  Light-Weight  Double  Dry  Plate  Holder. 

1 Improved  Folding  Tripod. 

1 Schultze  Single  View  Lens,  Style  “A,”  with  a set  of  Stops. 
1 Carrying  Case.  _ 


4 X 

5 X 
5 X 


5 complete 
61 
8“ 

8 

8i 

10 


►»I=FJIOI3SK- 


with  Stereo  Lenses,  etc. 


,$11.50 
. 14.00 
. 15.00 
. 21.50 
. 18.50 
. 28.00 


f/ev/er  buy  39  Outfit  ur^til  you  ?et  our  prices. 


15 


The  “BROOKLYN  ” Outfit. 


Placed  on  the 
market  in  com- 
petition with  all 
other  makes  at 
the  same  prices. 


Acknowledged 
by  impartial 
and  competent 
judges  to  take 
the  lead  for  su- 
periority in  every 
respect. 


Consisting  of  a well  made  mahogany  camera,  highly  polished 
and  nickel  trimmed,  with  rubber  bellows,  folding  platform,  improved 
central  latch  for  making  the  bed  rigid  instantaneously  (the  best 
and  most  practical  device  of  its  kind  ever  put  on  a camera),  single 


swing,  vertical  shifting  front,  and  the  ground  glass  so  arranged  as 
to  allow  the  plate  holder  to  be  slid  in  front  of  it  as  shown  in  cut. 

ALSO 

I Schultze  Light  Weight  Double  Dry  Plate  Holder. 

1 Schultze  Single  View  Lens,  Style  A,  ivith  a set  of  stops, 

1 Wooden  Carrying  Case. 

I Improved  English  Folding  Tripod. 


SIZES  PCND  ERIOES. 


4x5 $12  00 

4ix5i 14  00 

X 15  00 

5x7 16  00 

5x8 16  50 

5x8,  with  Stereo,  Lenses,  etc. 23  00 

X 81 20  00 

8 X 10. 33  50 


Se|7Ultze’5  /imateur  Outfits  (jai^’t  be  b^at. 


r/)Q  srcH(ji^rz£^Horo-£Qir(p/^Er^r  co.  /v£v/  york* 


The  Only  Pocket  Camera  that  can  be  Actually 
Carried  in  the  Pocket. 

Figure  1 shows  the  Camera  complete  for  carrying  in  the  pocket. 
Figure  2 is  Black  Walnut  Case,  43^  inches  each  way  for  carrying  the 
Camera  by  hand,  and  also  alJ owing  it  to  be  operated  as  readily  as  when 
out  of  the  case. 


FIGURE  1.  FIGURE  2. 


SIZE  OF  FIGURE  1,  in.  square  on  hack.  2%  in.  deep  in  focal  length. 


WEIGHT.,  7%  ounces. 


SIZE  OF  PICTURE.,  2^4  inches  square. 


<?a/r\era  is  perfectly  made,  nickel  plated,  handsomely  finished, 
and  justly  deserves  the  encomium,  *'Multum  in  parvo.”  It  is  fur- 
nished with  a very  light  plate  holder,  (a  dozen  of  which  may  be 
easily  carried  in  a pocket).  A circular  diaphragm  is  provided  for 
inserting  in  the  back  of  the  Camera  when  round  pictures  are  desired. 
The  shutter  is  adapted  for  both  instantaneous  and  time  work  ; the  speed 
is  regulated  by  the  Screw  “D”  shown  in  cut.  Full  instructions  for  operat- 
ing, which  are  simple,  are  furnished  with  each  Camera. 

It  must  not  be  imagined  that  because  the  Camera  is  small  that  it  is 
not  good.  It  takes  a picture  23^  inches  square,  perfect  in  every  respect, 
and  easily  developed  and  printed  in  the  usual  manner.  The  Cameras  are 
provided  wi'h  Periscope  Lenses,  and  are  in  practical  use  by  Journalists, 
Artists,  Scientists,  Photographers,  Amateurs,  etc.,  for  making  Views, 
Portraits,  Magic  Lantern  Slides,  Interiors,  etc. 

F^RIOE  007W^I=I-ETE,  $10,00, 


Sensitive  Plates  per  dozen,  30c. 


Extra  Plate  Holders,  75c.  each. 


— Deuelopip?  Outfit,  $2.00. 


Comprising:  1 Ruby  Lantern,  2 Trays,  1 Pkg.  Developer,  2 oz.  Graduate, 
1 lb.  Hypo.,  1 doz.  Plates. 


17 


s'chjjl.tze:  photo- EQLfip/\El^r  co.  /v£w/  york* 


IS  THE 

WONDER  OFTHE  DAY. 


People  Marvel  as  to  How  We  do  It. 

IT  IS  A FACT  ! ! 

We  supply  a Handsome  Sole  Leather 


DETECTIME  CKTV^ERK 


With  6 Patent  Double  Holders,  Non-actinic  Lamp  and  108  First  Quality 
Dry  Plates  2 1*2  inches  square. 


Kor  ^25.00. 


A FEW  REASONS  WHY  YOU  SHOULD  BUY  THE  LILLIPUT : 


Because  of  its  Compactness  and  Beauty. 

Its  unlikeness  in  appearance  to  a Camera,  yet  being  one  with  which 
}^ou  can  photograph  anything  that  could  be  done  with  any  other  Camera. 

That  you  can  make  pictures  with  it  unequalled  by  any  other  method  ; 
also,  you  can  finish  at  any  time  one  or  more  negatives  and  see  pre- 
cisely what  results  you  are  obtaining. 

The  plates  are  inexpensive,  easily  handled  and  manipulated  by  any- 
one. 

It  can  be  used  for  either  Instantaneous  or  Time  exposures. 

Illustrated  Book  of  Instructions  with  each. 


18 


Thg  s'cki/L.rzE.  C^^y^ 


THE  HAWK-EYE 

DETECTIVE  AND  COMBINATION  CAMEEA. 

Price,  $15. 

Size  of  Pictures  4x5  inches. 


AS  A DETECTIVE  CAMERA. 

The  Hawk-Eye  has  the  quickest  adjustment  of  speed  and 
for  instantaneous  pictures  of  moving*  objects  under  varying 
conditions. 

AS  A VIEW  CAMERA. 

The  Hawk-Eye  may  he  set  up  on  a tripod  for  time  ex- 
posures. It  is  provided  with  interior  ground  glass,  detachable 
cover  to  back,  and  screw  pinion  movement  controlling  the 
bellows.  No  focusing  cloth  required. 

AS  A MAGAZINE  CAMERA. 

The  Hawk-Eye  will  be  supplied  with  an  attachment  con- 
taining a coil  of  sensitized  film  sufficient  for  100  exposures 
without  reloading,  for  $13  extra  or  $28 ; placing  Photography 
within  the  reach  of  all,  it  being  only  necessary  to  wind  a 
fresh  portion  of  the  film  into  position  for  each  picture,  pressing 
a catch  making  the  exposure.  The  coil  attachment  may  be 
mailed  to  us  to  have  the  pictures  developed  and  printed,  or  the 
finishing  may  be  done  by  the  amateur,  as  desired.  The 
portion  of  the  coil  of  film  which  has  been  exposed  may  be  at 
any  time  removed,  without  taking  apart  the  camera  proper. 
Plate  holders  or  coil  attachment,  glass  plates  or  films  may 
be  used  in  the  same  camera.  Send  for  illustrated  pamphlet 
with  sample  photograph. 


19 


TTHE 


Silver  Medal  at  Minneapolis  Convention  P.  A.  of  A. 
for  most  important  invention  of  the  year. 


KODHK 

* CAMERA.  * 


ANYBODY  CAN  USE  IT. 

Size  of  Camera,  334  ^ ^ 

Weight,  1 lb.  10  oz. 

Size  of  Picture,  2^^  in.  diameter. 


PHOTOGRAPHY  REDUCED  TO  THREE  MOTIONS. 


Price,  - 


$25.00. 


Uncapping  for  Time  Exposures. 


3.  Turn  the  Key. 

And  so  on  for  100  Pictures. 


3.  Press  the  Button. 


Price  includes  hand- sewed  sole 
leather  Carrying  Case,  with  shoulder 
strap  and  film  for  100  exposures. 

Amateurs  can  fini  sh  their  own  nega- 
tives or  send  the  roll  of  exposed  films 
to  us  by  mail  to  have  them  developed 
and  printed. 

Price  for  developing,  printing 
and  mounting  100  Pictures, 
including  spool  100  films  for 
reloading  Camera,  - - $10  00 

Spool  for  reloading  only,  - 2 00 

^^Send  for  Descriptive  Circulars. 


20 


r fhg  'SrcHui:mzk  M£W  yorT^ 


leovill  ieteetive  Cameras. 

(PATENTED.) 


SWING  BACK. — In  answer  to  the  popular  demand,  a swing  back  has 
been  devised  for  the  SCOVILL  DETECTIVE  CAMERAS,  which  is 
simple  and  effective.  It  is  readily  adjusted  from  the  bottom  of  the 
case,  where  all  of  the  outward  mechanism  of  this  instrument  is  placed. 

PATENTED  ADAPTER  FOR  TWO  EENSES.-This  device 
enables  one  to  use  interchangeably  at  pleasure,  by  simply  moving  the 
focusing  lever  a wide  angle,  and  also  a group  lens  of  quite  dissimilar 
focus.  This  does  away  with  the  necessity  of  unscrewing  the  flange 
of  one  lens  in  order  to  put  on  the  flange  belonging  to  the  other  lens. 


Scovill’s  Detective  Camera,  for  3(4'  x 4i^pictures 
with  Morrison  Lens  and  three  double  Dry- 

plate  Holders 

Scovill’s  Detective  Camera,  for  4x5  pictures, 
with  Morrison  Lens ’and  three  double  Dry- 

plate  Holders 

434  X 634  Detective  Camera,  with  Ross  Lens 

three  double  Dry-plate  Holders 

494  X 63^  Detective  Camera,  with  Ross  Lens  and 

three  double  Dry-plate  Holders 

5x7  Detective  Camera,  with  Ross.  Lens  and 
three  double  Dry-plate  Holders 


With  Swing 
Back. 


With  Swing 
back : also 
with  ad’pt’r 
& Morrison 
wide  angle 
J ens. 


$50 

00 

$55 

00 

$90 

to 

60 

1 

00 

65 

00 

100 

00 

1 

90 

1 

00 

95 

00 

130 

00 

95 

[ 

00 

100 

00 

135 

00 

100 

00 

105 

00 

140 

00 

DHTHCTIVH  CROIHI^AS. 

It  followed  naturally  upon  the  introduction  of  the  Roll  Holder  that 
should  be  applied  to  the  SCOVILL  DETECTIVE  CAMERA,  and  this  has 
been  done  in  a manner  that  displays  the  greatest  ingenuity. 


Attached  to  e~ch  is  the  Patent  Automatic  Tally,  to  record  the  number  of 
exposures  made.  No  Roll-Holder  Camera  is  complete  without  this. 

Scovill’s  Roll-Holder  Detective  Camera,  for 
334  x4*-^  Pictures,  with  the  marvelous 
Optimus  Lens,  Roll-Holder  with  Automat- 
ic Tally,  and  one  double  Dry-plate  Holder.$65  00  105  00 

Scovill’s  Roll-Holder  Detective  Camera,  for  4x5 
Pictures,  with  the  marvelous  Optimus 
Lens,  Holder  Roll,  with  Automatic  Tally, 
and  one  Double  Dry  plate  Holder 75  00  115  00 


21 


^ Tf)g  'S'CHuUrZE  PHOTO ^EQ{fiPZ\^l^X  Co.  /V£:\a/  YORK- 


PATENT  SATCHEL  DETECTIVE  CAMERA. 


In  outward  appearance,  and 
to  the  ordinary  observer,  this 
latest  moditication  of  the  Detec- 
tive Camera  looks  exactly  like  an 
alligator  hand-satchel  that  is 
carried  by  a shoulder-strap  at  the 
side  of  a pedestrian.  Upon  closer 
observation,  one  sees  that  it  con- 
sists of  an  artfully-concealed  De- 
tective Camera,  in  which  all  the 
various  movements  to  secure  a 
[picture  are  situated  upon  the 
I under  side.  For  use,  the  camera 
is  held  so  that  'the  base  of  the 
satchel  rests  against  the  body  of 
the  operator.  By  means  of  a 
brass  pull  at  the  side  the  shutter  is 
_____  set.  A plate  in  the  regular  holder 

1.  AnthSS^atchel  Covered  Camera,  is  placed  in  position  atthe  back  of 

the  camera,  and  the  slide  is  drawn 
ready  for  exposure.  The  release  of  a short  catch  exposes  the  front  of  the 
shutter  re  idy  for  action,  and  by  raising  a small  leather-covered  lid  the  little 
camera  obscura  called  th  3 finder  on  the  (now)  upper  side  of  the  camera  shows 
the  position  that  the  object  will  occupy  on  the  plate.  The  slightest  touch 
on  a small  brass  button  releases  the  shutter,  and  the  exposure  is  made. 
Replacing  the  slide  in  the  plate  holder,  reversing  the  holder,  and  shutting 
the  shutter  again,  leaves  the  apparatus  in  readiness  for  another  shot, 
when  the  plate-holder  elide  is  withdrawn  as  before. 

By  releasing  a spring  bolt  on  the  under  side  of  the  case  the  camera 
proper  can  be  removed  from  its  cover,  and  a tripod  screw  serves  to  attach 
the  camera  to  a tripod  for  ordinary  use. 


This  last  form  of  the  Detective  Camera  allows  the  operator  to  carry 
with  him  twelve  plates  in  the  interior  of  the  apparatus,  and  so  carefully 
packed  away  that  no  light  can  strike  them.  It  is  also  furnished  with  an 
ingenious  attachment  by  which  the  speed  of  the  shutter  can  be  regulated 
to  suit  the  speed  of  the  object,  moving  with  greater  or  less  elocity  ; while 
by  simply  releasing  a catch,  time  exposures  can  be  made  at  the  will  of  the 
operator.  In  fact  the  whole  affair  is  the  latest  achievement  in  ingenious 
and  compact  light  photographic  apparatus. 


23 


ThQ  S‘CHi/krZ£  CO.  nE^  YORK- 


t.- 


Satet^el  Deteetiue  Camera. 


Camera  in  action. 


FOR  PLATE.  SIZE  4x5  INCHES. 


Fitted  with  In- 
stantaneous Land 
scape  lens. 

In  Imitation  Alligator  or  Grained  Leather,  with 

one  Patent  Double  Plate  Holder N.$35  00. 

In  Genuine  Alligator,  with  one  Patent  Double  Dry- 

Plate  Holder R.  40  00. 

In  Imitation  Alligator  or  Grained  Leather,  with 
removable  rear  compartment  containing  five 
extra  Patent  Double  Dry  Plate  Holders  (six 
in  all) U.  50  00. 

In  Genuine  Alligator,  with  removable  rear  com- 

Birtment  containing  five  extra  Patent  Double 
ry  Plate  Holders  (six  in  all) X.  55  00. 


Fitted  with 
Rapid  Hemis- 
pherical lens 
(re  lilinear). 

Fitted  with 
Dallmej’er 
Rapid  Rectiiin? 
ear  lens. 

...S.  56  00... 

,...T.  78  00 

...V.  66  00.. 

2H 


dm 


SCHULTZE,  f^Horro^Eou-iP^wr  dp.  /v£:vs/  yopk* 


Climax  Detective  Camera. 


Patented  Nov.  11, 1884.  Sept.  14, 1886.  March  22,  1887.  March  29,  1887. 


The  above  cut  shows  the  latest  improvement  in  detective  cameras,  the 
result  of  our  long  experience  in  their  manufacture,  we  having  been  the 
first  to  introduce  this  class  of  cameras  in  this  country.  All  of  the  work- 
ing parts  of  this  camera  are  on  the  left  hand  side  and  the  shutter  may  be 
set  and  released,  and  its  speed  regulated,  from  the  outside  without  open- 
ing the  camera,  which  can  if  desired,  be  inserted  in  our  patent  satchel, 
thus  transforming  it  into  a satchel  camera.  By  a convenient  arrange- 
ment the  door  C may  be  opened  and  diaphragms  changed  without  remov- 
ing the  shutter.  Lenses  of  different  focal  length  may  be  used  (within 
reasonable  limits)  in  this  camera  without  altering  the  camera  itself.  A 
removable  rear  compartment  containing  five  extra  plate-holders  may  be 
attached  to  this  camera,  the  rear  compartment  serving  also  in  place  of 
focusing  cloth,  after  removing  the  plate-holders  and  the  partition  at  the 
back  of  the  camera  immediately  in  front  of  the  rear  compartment,  in 
case  the  camera  is  desired  to  be  used  for  time  exposures,  an  advantage 
not  possessed  by  any  other  style  of  detective  camera.  This  camera  is 
made  in  only  one  size,  namely  4x5. 


PRICE. 

Climax  Detective  Mahogany  Camera,  with  4x5 

Instanta- 

neous 

Landscape 

Lens. 

R.  R. 
Hemis- 
pherical 
Lens. 

Dall- 
meyer 
H.  R« 
Lens. 

Dry  Plate  Holder  Complete 

Or,  if  covered  with  Black  Grained  Leather  and 

$25  00 

$41  00 

$63  00 

with  Metal  Work  Oxidized  Black 

29  00 

45  00 

67  i)0 

With  Removable  Rear  Compartment  of  Ma- 

hogany, containing  5 extra  Double  Dry 
Plate  Holders 

40  00 

6C  00 

78  00 

Or,  covered  with  leather  as  above 

45  00 

61  00 

83  00 

Satchel  Climax  Detective  Cameras  will  cost,  in  addition  to  above  ! 


In  Genuine  Alligator Extra,  $15  00 

In  Imitation  Alligator  Grained  Leather “ 10  00 

Do  pot  mutilate  t\)\s  (^atalo^ue,  but  pres^rv/e  it  as  a 
refere9c^  Bool(. 


24 


Cameras. 


<?or)e<^al<^<d  ^a/T\<^ra5  are  designed  for  the 
use  of  those  who  wish  to  photograph,  without 
attracting  the  attention  of  any  one,  the  interesting 
sights  met  in  every-day  life,  such  as  picturesque 
groups,  quaint  figures,  and  striking  facial  expres- 
sion, where  opportunity  to  sketch  or  to  set  up  an 
ordinary  camera  and  tripod,  arrange  the  focus, 
draw  slides,  and  such  manipulation  are  out  of  the 
question.  The  beautiful  results 
obtained  with  this  Camera,  and  the  ease  with  which 
they  are  secured,  make  it  of  great  value  to  artists 
and  detectives. 

ffeu;  (f/o.  2)  (;oi?G(^a^d  Qa/qera  was 
planned  to  make  pictures  of  the  size  suitable  for 
lantern  slides.  A handsome  velvet-lined  leather  case 
is  provided  with  it,  in  which  the  Camera  is  carried  or 
used  when  it  is  not  worn  underneath  the  vest. 


Qopeeal^d  Cameras. 


No.  1,  in  Sliding  Cover  Box $15  00 

Keystone  Plates 1 20 

Film  Carriers 60 

American  Films,  in  two-dozen  packages 2 10 

Skins,  in  two  dozen  packages 45 

No.  2,  for  Lantern  slides,  in  Velvet-Lined  Leather  Case 25  00 

Keystone  Plates 1 65^ 

Film  Carriers 90 

American  Films,  in  two-dozen  packages 3 10> 

Skins,  in  two-dozen  packages 


Sample  Photogitaplis  fut^nisHed  on  applieation. 


Jry  t\)e  UY)\\jqrsa\  Deu<?loper. 


. Thf?  srcMuurzE,  ^-Moro--£^(/rp>^r/vr  oo,  'Tork* 


Schultze’s  Bicycle  Kquipment. 


SCHULTZE’S  BICYCLE  PHOTOGRAPHIC  OUTFIT. 

The  advantages  of  this  outfit  are  its  lightness,  compactness,  and  the 
ease  with  which  it  can  be  set  up.  There  nre  no  loose  pieces.  The  illus- 
tration shows  the  method  of  attaching  it  to  the  bicycle.  A brass  rod, 
with  a crutch  at  the  upper  end  and  made  telescopic  to  suit  every  size  of 
bicycle,  is  placed  under  the  hub,  as  shown,  the  whole  bicycle  being 
slightly  inclined  toward  the  rod  for  steadiness. 

The  outfit  comprises  a 

334x434^  inch  Mahogany  Camera,  with  rising  and  falling  front,  folding 
bed  and  hinged  ground  glass;  1 Double  Dry  Plate  Holder,  1 Single 
Achromatic  Lens,  1 Canvas  Carrying  Case,  with  Shoulder  Strap. 


Bicycle  Photographic  Outfit,  complete $10  00 

Extra  Double  Dry  Plate  Holders,  each 2 00 

Telescopic  Y Shaped  Bicycle  Supports,  each 1 60 


Odjr  pri(:es,  as  /napy  i/T)porta9t  e!7a9$e5  l^av/e 
beeQ  /T^ade. 


26 


scHuLj-ZE.  f^nQ'ro'-EO{f[P/^tHr  go-  /vevv^  yoRK- 


Centennial  * Outfits. 

(Introduced  in  1889.) 


Centennial  Outfit,  No.  I.  Price,  $18.00. 

CONSISTS  OF 

A Mahogany  Polished  Camera  for  taking  pictures  4x5  inches^ 
with  Folding  Bellows  Body,  single  swing,  hinged  bed,  and  brass  guides. 
It  has  a shifting  front  for  adjusting  the  sk7  and  foreground,  with 
1 English  Double  Dry  Plate  Holder. 

1 Canvas  Carrying  Case. 

1 No.  1 Extension  Tripod. 

Centennial  Outfit,  No.  2.  Price,  $21.00. 

For  pictures  41^4  x 63^  inches. 


Centennial  Outfit,  No.  3.  Price*  $25.00. 

CONSISTS  OF 


A Folding  Mahogany  Camera.  It  is 
adapted  for  taking  5x8  inch  pictures, 
and  also  for  stereoscopic  views — 
together  with 

1 English  Double  Dry  Plate  Holder. 

1 Canvas  Carrying  Case. 

1 No.  2 Extension  Tripod. 


Centennial  Outfit,  No.  4.  Price,  $35.00. 

CONSISTS  OF 


A Folding  Mahogany  Camera  of  finest  style  and  finish  for  taking 


634  X %%  inch  pictures,  with 
1 English  Dry  Plate  Holder ; also 
1 Canvas  Carrying  Case. 

1 Extension  Tripod,  No.  3. 

We  recommend  the  purchase  and  use  with  the  above  Outfits  of  a Lens 
•mr  Lenses  selected  from  the  list  on  pages  3-4-5-6-8*l  0-1 1. 


27 


siCHuurzE  J^^Q'f‘o-EOLnp^Et^T  ycrk* 


THE  1889  iSTANTANEOnS  OUTFIT 


is  of  the  very  highest  class  made  by  the  Schultze  Photo 
Equipment  Co.  It  is  very  compact  and  light,  and  is 
offered  25  per  cent,  below  what  the  separate  parts 
cost. 

It  consists  of  a Mahogany  Polished  Camera  for 
taking  pictures  4x5  inches,  with  Folding  Bellows  Body^ 
single  swing,  hinged  platform,  and  brass  guides.  It 
has  also  a shifting  front  for  adjusting  the  sky  and 
foreground.  P'itted  with 

One  English  Double  Dry^Plate  Holder. 

One  Canvas  Carrying  Case. 

One  No.  i Extension  Tripod. 

One  Rectiscope  Lens,  price  $18.00;  and 
One  Low  Shutter,  with  Pneumatic,  Time  and  In- 
stantaneous Attachments,  price,  $6.00.  Total  $42.00. 

1889  Instantaneous  Outfit,  when  sold  complete,  $32.00. 

U/e  eai)  supply  you  \jj\t\)  apy  parts  of  Ce95es  or  Camera 
Box(?5  at  sl?ort  potiee. 


28 


r/)>'  S'CH(JtTZE,^PH^C^f  EaiJ^P^J^T  <^  YORK- 


PHOTOGRAPH?  FOR  ALL. 


AMUSEMENT,  PEOFIT,  INSTEUCTION, 


|I5  Tbe  Climax  Complete  Photo  Ontllt  ||5 

FOR  MAKING  4x5  PICTURES. 

THE  WONDER  OF  THE  AGE. 

Tlie  Neatest  and  most  Complete  Pliotograpfiic  Outfit  ever  ofiTeredL 

to  the  Public, 

AOr  A WORTHLESS  TOY,  BUT  AN  tNS^UMENT  WITH  WHICH  EXCELLENT 
PHOTOS  CAN  BE  MADE. 

A Child  Ten  Years  Old  can  make  a Picture..^ 

This  Outfit  contains  all  that  is  necessary  to  make  and  finish  a 
picture,  and  consists  of  i 4x5  Climax  Camera  with  Rubber  Bellows 
and  Folding  Body,  i Focusing  Screen,  i Perfect  Dry  Plate 
Holder.  i Imported  Single  Achromatic  Center  Focus  Lens. 

1 Detachable  Folding  Tripod.  i Package  Climax  Dry  Plate. 

2 Japanned  Trays,  i Bottle  Climax  Developing  Solution,  i 
Bottle  Climax  Toning  Solution.’  i Package  Fixing  Crystals. 
I Printing  Frame,  i Package  Climax  Sensitized  Albumen  Paper. 
I Package  4x5  Card  Mounts.  i Ruby  Lantern.  i Measuring 
Glass.  Full  directions  for  making  photographs,  i Carrying  Case. 

With  this  Camera  a Picture  can  be  made  in  Three  Seconds, 


/Tlal^e  yodr  boy  trappy  by  bdiyir^^  l7im  a Qlimax  Oatjlt 


29 


. r/)g  S'C HuXxZ £ y PHOTO -EQuiP/^Ef^'n  CO. \/s/£v/  YORK‘ 


THE 


This  Equipment  consists  of  a beautifully  finished  camera  containing 
every  improvement,  single  swing,  front  focus,  double  rack  and  pinion 
movement,  folding  bed,  patent  spring,  actuated  ground  glass — in  fact, 
everything  that  goes  to  make  a model  camera  of  its  class. 

The  equipment  includes,  besides  the  above,  a patent  “Eclipse” 
Double  Holder,  a fine  Single  Achromatic  Lens,  Triplex  Tripod,  and 
Canvas  Carrying  Case,  which  contains  all  the  above-named  articles 
except  the  Tripod  Legs. 


Size  of  View.  | 

Price 

Size  of  View. 

Price. 

4x5 

$16.00 

5x8 

$20.00 

4i  X 6| 

17.00 

64  X 84 

24.00 

5x7 

18  00 

8 X 10 

31.50 

CooK  ou(^r  list  earefdlly  $ee  if  you  do  pot  peed 
som^  article  to  malc(?  yodr  uiorl^  easier. 


30 


T/)g  -TC <?•  • 


EXTRA  QEAEIXY 

I EiA£  ■ CH7VVE  RKS 




The  Matchless  Cone  Yiew  Camera. 

(PATENTED.) 


This  Cone  View  Camera  has  no  equal  in  beauty  of  design,  fine  finish 
or  lightness.  The  growing  use  of  dry  plates  and  the  desire  for  rapid  ex- 
posures led  to  its  introduction,  and  because  it  adds  to  the  grace  and 
celeriiy  of  view-taking  it  has  become  vastly  popular.  The  patent  de- 
tachable • arriage  at  the  back  may  he  reversed  for  either  an  8 x 10  upright 
or  horizontal  picture — without  changing  the  dry -plate  holder  in  the 
carriage.  whi<  h is  made  to  receive  a Daisy  dry-plate  holder  with  patent 
registering  slides.  The  Matchless  Camera  has  the  front  focus,  rack  and 
pinion  adjustment,  and  patent  latch  for  making  the  platform  rigid  in- 
stantaneously. 


£ach  with  Canvas  Carrying 


No. 

101  Cone 

102  “ 

103  “ 

104  “ 

105  “ 

106  “ 

107  “ 

108  “ 

109  “ 


Case. 

Single  Double 
Swing-back.  Swing-back. 


For  view. 

View  Camera,  4‘4'x534.  reversible $ 31  00  $ 36  00 

‘ “ 5x7  “ 33  00  38  00 

‘ “ 634  x8>^  “ 39  00  44  00 

‘ “ 8x10  “ 43  00  48  00 

‘ 10x12  “ 59  00  64  00 

‘ “ 11x14  “ 63  00  68  00 

‘ “ 14x17  “ 71  00  76  00 

‘ “ 18x22rev.,8ingleroUeyUde- I 95  ,9999, 

‘ “ 20x24  “ “ “ “ ’ 110  00  120  00 


The  Venus  Reversible  Back  View  Camera. 


It  has  the  American  Optical  Company’s  Cone  Bellows  Reversible  Back 
View  Camera,  double  swing-back,  with  the  addition  of  a stereo  attach- 
ment and  a 5 X 8 kit.  Its  capacity  is  1-4,  1-2,  4-5,  5x8  and  8x10  pictures, 
reversible,  with  one  tube,  and  stereos  on  5 x 8 plate,  with  two  tubes. 
Reversible  Back  Venus  Camera $45  00  $50  00- 


Tl?e  par  Exe(^ll(^9e^  To9>99  Solution  is  tl?e  b^5t. 

f- 


31 


rj)\.  .^CH{^LXZE.  ^PHOro  - £Q c/f  r Co.  /y£W  yo'rk-’ 


ST.  LOUIS 

R EV/EI^5I  BCE  B/ic.K 

(PATENTED.) 


In  addition  to  the  desirable  features  which  the  Back  Focus  Reversible 
Camera  possesses  (see  description  below)  the  St.  Louis  Reversible-Back 
Cameras  have  the  rack  and  pinion  movement,  patent  latch  for  making 
the  bed  rigid  instantaneously,  and  the  ground-glass  so  arranged  that  the 
holder  may  be  slid  in  front  of  it,  as  shown  in  ihe  illustration. 

Each  Camera  is  supplied  with  one  Daisy  Holder  witli  patent  Register- 
ing Slides  and  canvas  case. 


The  growing  use  of  dry  plates,  and  the  desire  for  rapid  exposures, 
led  to  the  introduction  of  the  American  Optical  Patented  Reversible- 
Back  Cameras,  and  because  they  add  to  the  grace  and  celerity  of  view- 
taking they  have  become  vastly  popular.  A novel  arrangement  of  a de- 
tachable carriage  at  the  back  combines  such  a multiplicity  of  adjustments 
in  itself  that  a dry-plate  holder  may  he  reversed  or  he  set  for  either  an 
8x10  upright  or  horizontal  picture — all  of  these  movements,  without  once 
changing  the  dry-plate  holder  in  the  carriage. 

3/BI^T  COUIS 

Fitted  with  Eastman- Walker  Roll  Holder* 
New  Model  with  Automatic  Tally. 


For  View. 

Single 

Swing-back. 

Double 

Swing-back. 

Single 

Swing-back. 

Double 

Swing-back. 

4 x5  . . , 

. ...  $25  00 

$29  00 

. . . . 

414x51^... 

...  26  00 

30  00 

. . . . 

41^x6^... 

...  30  00 

34  00 

5 X 7 

...  32  00 

35  00 

$52  66 

$55  66 

5 X 8 . , . 

...  34  00 

38  00 

54  00 

58  00 

63^x8^... 

, . . . 36  00 

40  00 

60  00 

64  00 

8 xlO  ... 

...  40  00 

44  00 

70  00 

74  00. 

11  X 14  . . . 

...  60  00 

64  00 

Not  made  above  11  x 14  size. 

Canvas  cases  to  contain  Camera  with  more  than  one  Holder  made 
to  order  at  extra  price.  . - . 


R9. 


F r/)p  jr-CHULTZ^  PHOro-EOLflP/'^^rC^.  /V£w/  YORf^ 


F=L-K  7VV7VIM  N G’S 

4 patent  pevolving-Back  Cameras. 

(PATENTED.) 


Each  Incased  in  a Canvas  Bag,  with  Handle. 


(BACK  FOCUS  PATTERN.) 


“ These  are  the  finest  View  Cameras  ever  constructed,”  so  says  every 
photographer  who  has  examined  any  of  them,  and  this  exclamation  is 
not  merely  a tribute  to  the  beauly  and  grace  of  their  design,  for 
invariably  the  desire  has  at  the  same  time  been  expressed  to  possess  one 
of  these  truly  novel  and  substantial  Cameras. 

Wherein  lies  the  merit  and  attractiveness  of  the  Revolving-Back 
Camera,  that  photographers  want  to  cast  aside  cameras  now  in  use  and 
procure  one  of  this  new  pattern?  Briefly  stated,  it  enables  the  view 
taker  to  secure  either  an  upright  or  a horizontal  picture  without  changing 
the  plate  holder  after  it  has  been  slid  into  the  carriage.  No  other  camera 
can  with  such  wondrous  ease  and  celerity  be  changed  from  the  vertical 
to  the  upright  or  vice  versa.  The  carriage  is  simply  turned  about  in  the 
circle  and  automatically  fastened.  By  this  latter  provision  the  carriage 
may  be  secured  at  either  quarter  of  the  circle.  Ordinarily,  the  slide  will 
be  drawn  out  of  the  holder  to  the  right ; but  in  certain  confined  situations, 
the  ability  to  withdraw  the  slide  to  the  left  enables  the  photographer  to 
obtain  a view  which  he  could  not  get  with  the  usual  provision  in  a 
camera.  The  photographer  of  experience  is  well  a vare  of  the  difficulty, 
when  taking  an  upright  picture  with  a large  camera  without  the  revolving- 
back  feature,  of  reaching  up  to  draw  out  the  slide  at  the  top,  and,  what 
is  more  essential,  of  getting  out  the  slide  without  fogging  the  plate  in  the 
holder. 

Grace  and  strength  are  combined  in  the  Revolving-Back  Camera,  and 
its  highly-desirable  features  are  gained  without  the  sacrifice  of  steadiness 
or  any  other  essential  principle  in  a good  camera.  Indeed,  its  merit  is 
such  that  out-door  photography  has  been  advanced  and  made  more 
attractive  by  its  introduction. 

t\)\s  list  dp  for 


33 


Revolving-back  * Camera. 


(FRONT  FOCUS  PATTERN.) 

REDUCED  PRICE  LIST. 


Revolving-back  Cameras,  each  incased  in  a canvas  bag,  vt'ith  handle^ 
and  above  14  x 17  size,  with  two  handles. 


With 

Reversible 
Single  Double  Back  and 

REVERSIBLE.  Swing.  Swing.  Holder  Extra 


Ho. 

120. 

For  View  4 x 5 in, 

$27  00 

$32  00 

6$ 

121. 

4i^x  5K“ 

29  00 

34  00 

li 

122. 

66 

4i^x  6K  “ 

31  00 

36  00 

H 

123. 

66 

5x7 

33  00 

38  00 

n 

124. 

66 

5x8“ 

35  00 

40  00 

16 

125. 

66 

6Kx  8>i“ 

40  00 

45  00 

ti 

126. 

66 

8 xlO  “ 

45  00 

50  00 

ii 

127. 

66 

10  xl2  “ 

with  60  00 

65  00 

66 

128. 

66 

11  X 14  “ 

detachable  back.  65  00 

70  00 

$ 90  00 

<66 

129. 

66 

14  X 17  “ 

“ “ T5  00 

80  00 

105  00 

66 

130. 

66 

17  x20  “ 

“ “ 85  00 

90  00 

115  00 

131. 

66 

18  x22  “ 

“ “ 95  00 

100  00 

130  00 

66 

132. 

61 

20  x24  “ 

“ “ 115  00 

120  00 

150  00 

These  Cameras  are  fitted  with  Daisy  Dry-pJate  Holders. 
ll^^Please  state,  when  ordering  any  size  below  10  x 12,  whether  front 
or  back  focus  is  desired. 

Revolving-back  Cameras,  front  focus,  not  made  above  8 x 10  size. 
Canvas  cases  to  contain  Camera  with  more  than  one  Holder  made  to 
order  at  extra  price. 


1^0  /^rtiele  r)eed(^d  bdt  u;l7at  yod  u/ill  fli^d  irj  tl^is  Qatalogd^. 


^ALBION  GAMMAS^ 


''T^HE  following-  illustrations  and  description  are  given  to  assist 
1 in  determining  the  choice  of  those  who  want  a camera  that 
is  quite  English,  jmu  know.’’ 


TURN-TKBLE. 


The  Albion  Cameras 
are  provided  with  the 
Scovill  turn-table,  whose 
excellence  is  due,  not 
only  to  the  fact  that  it 
has  an  open  center  into 
which  the  lens  projects, 
thus  doing  awa^^  with 
the  necessity  of  unscrew- 
ing the  lens  every  time 
the  front  board  of  the 
camera  is  turned  down 
m order  to  fold  the  cam- 
era, hut  what  is  of  equal, 
importance,  the  bear- 
ings of  the  turn-table 
are  so  nicely  adjusted. 


ALBION  CAMERA  OUT  OF  CASE  (FOLDED). 


that  they  do  not  become  clogged  at  any  time — a defect  in  all 
imported  cameras.  There  is  also  no  need  of  a regulator  or 
fastener  for  this  turn-table.  In  whatever  direction  the  camera 
is  turned  it  remains  until  moved  by  the  photographer.  The 
extreme  accuracy  and  nicety  of  the  working  of  the  Scovill  turn- 
table can  only  be  fairly  appreciated  when  tried. 

Compactness. — Before  passing  from  the  Scovill  turn-table, 
it  IS  well  to  bear  in  mind  that  serving  as  a tripod  top,  it  does 
away  with  the  necessity  of  any  other,  and  the  bothersome  tripod 
screw.  In  the  highest  degree,  compatible  with  the  requisite 
strength,  the  Albion  Camera  is  compact  and  portable. 

Trau(?li9§  pi^oto^rapl^i^rs  luill  coQStilt  tl7(?ir  omjt)  ipt^rest^ 
by  5e9di9§  tl7(^ir  orders  to  us. 


as 


Th^  XCHUkrZE.  ' f^oro-  EOLTi  CO.  Ar£:v/  VbRK 


CARRYING  CHSE. 


Canvas  Bag  for  Albion  Camera. 


A g-lance  at  the 
fine  carrying-  case 
provided  for  the 
Albion  Camera  is 
sufficient  to  convi  nee 
one  of  its  compact- 
ness. This  case  is 
lined  with  the  best 
canton  flannel,  and 
has  a leather  parti- 
tion to  separate  the 
camera  from  the 
holder. 


Albion  Tripod. 


Albion  Tripod. — While  folding  compactly,  as  here  shown, 
the  Albion  Tripod  is  readily  extended  and  Arm  enough  to  sup- 
port, without  vibration,  a 10x12  view  camera.  The  binding 
straps  are  attached  to  one  of  the  legs,  so  that  they  are  always 
there  when  wanted. 

The  Albion  Camera  has  the  Howe  patent  reversible  back, 
is  arranged  for  double  swing  and  a single  swing  front,  and, 
when  used  with  the  Shifting  Front,  the  extreme  possibility 
of  tilting  is  attained.  The  tallest  towers  must  come  down  to 
the  ground -glass  screen,  which,  in  common  with  all  cameras 
of  the  English  pattern,  is  hinged  so  that  it  may  throw  over  the 
top  of  the  camera  or  behind  the  holder  when  that  is  in  use. 

Our  card  stoeK 's  all  from  \.\)e  factory  of  /T\.  <^ollli?5 

n\f9.  <50. 


36 


/ygw^  yo r k * 


Albion  Camera  Extended. 


The  cut  showing*  the  Albion  Camera  partly  folded,  and  the 
one  showing*  the  great  length  of  platform  when  the  extension 
bed  is  full  / drawn  out,  reall}^  make  extended  comment  unnec- 
essary, but  i";  will  not  do  to  pass  b}^  so  lightly  the  Double 
Plate  Holders  fitted  to  the  Albion  Camera.  All  of  the  im- 
ported English  holders  (double  backs,  ^‘you  know,’^)  warp 
when  subjected  to  the  severe  test  of  our  climate,  and  the  slides 
refuse,  without  provocation,  to  move. 

We  have  not  or  do  not  propose  to  imitate  them,  but  fit  the 
Albion  Cameras  with  double  holders,  which  we  guarantee  not 
to  warp,  and  we  put  in  them  our  patent  Registering  (Record) 
Slides. 

The  marked  superiority  of  the  Albion  Cameras  over  any 
and  all  styles  of  English  make  will  be  more  apparent  on  ex- 
amination, or,  better  still,  through  using  one  of  them. 


a9d  (^le^ai^t  d^sigps  u/ill  shortly  be  i9troddeed  by 
fi,  (1).  Cp\\\\)S  Qo. 


37 


Thp'  SQHUkTZE,  'PHoro-EOjfjP^Wr  CO.  YORK- 


Albion  Camera  and  Tripod. 


PRICE-LIST  OF  ALBION  CAMERAS. 


Each  with  Albion  Tripod  and  Extra  Fine  Canvas  Carrying* 


Case. 


4^x  6^  Siee, 
5x7  “ 

5x8 

8 X 10  “ 


$47  00 

With  1887  Model 
Roll  Holder. 

$61  50 

48  00 

63  50 

49  00 

67  00 

50  00 

68  00 

60  00 

8i  00 

38 


P York* 


f\Qn\(^  I^euersibl^-baeK  l/ieu/  (^ameras 

(patented.) 


These  Cameras  are  supplied  with  Cone  Bellows,  Patent  Reversibl* 
Back,  Vertical  Sliifting  Fronts  and  Folding  Platforms — are  very  compact 
light,  and  portable. 


Single 

Doubl* 

Swing. 

Swing- back 

X 8V4  reversible 

$33  00 

8 

X 10 

it 

34  00 

38  00 

10 

xl3 

40  00 

45  00 

11 

xl4 

it 

50  00 

55  00 

14 

xl7 

“ 

60  00 

65  00 

IT 

x20 

“ 

70  00 

75  00 

The  Landscape  Camera. 


This  new  camera  is  made  of  mahogany,  polished,  and  has  single 
awing-vertical  shifting  front,  cam  for  focusing,  patent  side  latch  for  fold- 
ing platform,  and  side  plate  for  reversing.  It  was  designed  for  profes- 
sional photographers  who  wish  to  carry  about  a very  light,  compact  View 
Camera,  which  is  cheap,  and  yet  in  every  respect  substantial  and  service- 
able. Price,  8 X 10  size,  with  one  Scovill  patent  double  dry  plate-holder, 
^25.00. 


39 


BLAIR’S  IMPROVED  REVERSIBLE  BACK  CAMERAS, 


EXTENDED. 

Although  not  as  expensive  a Camera  as  the  Champion  (a  description' 
of  which  follows),  yet  for  general  work  where  it  is  likely  to  be  carried 
much,  it  is  more  desirable,  as  it  is  much  lighter  and  more  compact.  The 
fact  that  there  are  over  a thousand  in  use,  with  the  demand  increasing 
every  month,  spe  ks  more  for  their  good  qualities  than  would  volumes 
from  us. 

The  focusing  is  achieved  by  the  front  of  Camera  and  Lens  moving 
forward  by  a fine  rack  and  pinion  movement.  The  desirability  of  this 
will  be  apparent  to  every  photographer  of  experience.  The  reversing  of 
the  back  (to  enable  the  operator  to  make  upright  views)  is  accomplished 
by  simply  pressing  a spring,  and  changing  the  holder  from  vertical  to 
horizontal. 

Another  most  unique  part  in  its  construction  is  the  means  of  attach- 
ing the  plate  holder  and  ground  glass.  All  of  which  is  accomplished 
without  the  touching  of  a catch  (as,  indeed  there  is  none)  or  removing  or 
swinging  the  ground  glass  frame. 


METHOD  OF  APPLYING  PLATE  HOLDER. 


Prices  of  “Improved”  Reversible  Back  Cameras. 


Size  of  Plate. 

Capacity  for 
Length  of  Focus. 

Price 

Single  ^wing. 

Price 

Double  Swing. 

4x5 

12  in. 

$23  00 

$25  00 

4i  X 

14.V  in. 

28  00 

30  00 

5x7 

17'  in. 

31  00 

33  00 

5x8 

18  in. 

85  00 

37  00 

X 

18  in. 

35  00 

37  00 

8 X 10 

20  in. 

40  00 

43  00 

40 


Thg  SCHUL^rZ£  ' ^Horo cb.  /V£vv/  YORK* 


\ 

Blair’s  Ghaiplon  ReTersible  Back  Cameras. 


The  improvements  embodied  in  this  Camera  over  the  Camera  known 
as  our  Improved  Reversible  Back  are  as  follows;  The  single  and  double 
swing,  also  the  rising  and  falling  front,  are  operated  by  a fine  rack  and 
pinion,  with  double  thumb  nuts  attached,  one  for  turning  the  pinion,  the 
other  for  fastening  when  in  proper  position. 

The  focusing  is  accomplished  by  means  of  a rod  which  runs  in  the 
bed  of  Camera,  and  by  means  of  a clamp  is  attached  to  the  base  of  movable 
front  at  any  point  desirable.  Attached  to  the  end  of  this  rod,  which 
passes  under  the  rigid  portion  of  the  Camera,  is  a rack  about  five  inches 
in  length,  into  which  the  pinion  operates. 

To  focus  the  Camera,  move  the  front  out  to  about  the  focusing  length 
of  the  Lens  used,  then  clamp  the  adjusting  rod  to  the  base.  By  turning 
the  thumb  nut  to  which  the  rod  and  pinion  is  attached,  a very  fine  focus 
can  be  attained,  while  the  thumb  nut  by  which  the  movement  is  gained 
remains  stationary. 

This  convenience  was  suggested  by  complaint  sometimes  being  made 
that  the  stretch  for  the  arm  in  focusing  with  the  regular  style  was  tire- 
some in  using  sizes  above  6i  x 8^,  especially  so  when  using  the  Extension. 
This  method  of  focusing  enables  us  to  apply  an  improved  form  of  Extension, 
which,  though  folding  in  less  space  than  the  other  form,  is  capable  of 
extending  13  inches  to  the  rear,  thereby  making  it  possible  to  use  any 
ordinarily  long  focused  Lens  without  cutting  off  at  the  edges. 

The  Adjuster  and  Extension  for  “The  Champion,”  and  the  “New 
Reversible  Back”  Camera  are  not  interchangeable.  Please  bear  this 
fact  in  mind  when  ordering. 

Prices  of  Champion  Reversible  Back  Cameras. 


Size  of  Plate. 

Capacity  for 
Length  of  Focus. 

Price 

Single  Swing. 

Price 

Double  Swing. 

5x8 

18  in. 

$42  00 

$47  00 

6i  X Si 

18  in. 

42  00 

47  00 

8 X 10 

20  in. 

45  00 

50  00 

Unless  otherwise  specified,  all  orders  for  these  Cameras  will  be  filled 
fitted  with  English  Holders.  When  Feather  Weight  Holders  are  wanted,, 
please  specify. 


41 


. S’CHUUTZE  moro  - EO  Lr(  p/\Et^T  /v£:v\A'  York  * 


Tie  Blair  CoiBinalion  Cameras. 


They  are  all  provided  with  an  extra  bed  for  supporting  the  Camera 
while  exposing  the  plate  in  a vertical  position;  single  swing  back,  rack 
-and  pinion  for  focusing,  improved  set-screw  and  double  sliding  front,  an 
extra  Lens- board,  with  division  for  stereoscopic  work,  or  two  separate 
views  on  one  plate.  The  5 x 8 (A)  is  smaller  in  outside  dimensions  than 
our  5x8  (B),  and  was  not  originally  designed  to  be  used  as  a combination; 
but  we  have  now  fitted  it  for  a x 8^  Pa  ent  Extension. 

The  5x8  sizes  of  these  cameras  are  intended  more  especially  for 
atereoscopic  work,  with  the  capacity,' by  using  the  extension,  lor  working 
larger  plates.  , 

Prices  of  the  Blair  Coaihiiiation  Cameras. 


Size  of  Plate. 

Capacity  for  length 
of  Focus. 

Price  Single  Swing. 

4x5 

12  in. 

$10  00 

5 X 8 (A) 

13  in. 

15  00 

5x8  (B) 

14^  in. 

lo  Ou 

Only  the  5x8  (B)  will  admit  using  the  Feather  Weight  Holders.  All 
-are  fitted  with  Blair  Patent  Holders. 


j^ll  I(^adi95  bra9d5  of  Dry  piati^s  ip  stoei^. 


r/)p  jrc H(/L TZkr/P^ O'^O  ':  EO C/r T ;<S^6.  /V£'^  YORK- 


CUT  SHOWING  RIGID  EXTENSI  N ATTACHED  TO  BOX- 
By  applying  our  Patent  Extension  we  have  a camera  enabling  th« 
operator  to  use  a size  larger  plate. 

A WORD  ABOUT  EXTENSIONS. 


Blair  Patent  Extension  is  a contrivance  for  placing  the  plate  a suffi- 
cient distance  from  the  back  of  Camera  proper  to  allow  the  rays  to  spread 
to  the  size  of  plate  to  be  used  on  the  extension;  it  will  therefore  be  under- 
stood that  an  extremely  long  or  an  extremely  short  focus  Lens  cannot  be 
used  successfully. 

In  completing  this  valuable  adjunct  to  photographic  apparatus,  it  was 
not  the  idea  of  the  inventor  to  substitute  (for  example)  a 5 x 8 Camera 
proper  with  an  8 x 10  extension,  for  an  8 x 10  Camera,  when  the  operator 
intended  using  8x  10  plates  in  a majority  of  cases,  because  it  would  be  more 
desirable  to  have  an  8 x 10  Camera  proper;  but  the  idea  was  to  furnish  an 
attachment  for  the  operator  who  used  5x8  plates  as  a rule,  and  occasion- 
ally desired  to  use  an  8 x 10,  etc.  The  only  disadvantages  in  a Camera 
formed  with  the  extension  attached  is,  that  a.  very  short  focus  Lens  cannot 
be  used  on  account  cf  the  distance  between  the  ground  glass  and  Camera 
front,  and  the  fact  when  using  a.very  long  focus  Lens,  the  frame  of  Camera 
proper  prevents  the  rays  from  the  Lens  spreading  to  the  edge  of  the  plate. 

To  correct  the  former,  we  make, 
when  desired,  a recess  front.  The  lat- 
ter can  only  be  remedied  by  increasing 
the  depth « f the  Extension. 

The  Bellows  Extension  for  an  8 x 10 
Camera  is  capable  of  extending  13  in. 
to  the  rear. 

Our  “Improved,”  “Perfect,”  and 
“Champion”  Reversible  Back  Cameras, 
also  our  Combination  Cameras,  are  ar- 
ranged to  receive  our  Patent  Extension. 

Extensions  for  Combination  Cameras 
a’-e  fitted  with  B.  P.  Holders ; i hose  for 
“Improved,”  “Perfect”  or  “Cham- 
pion” (R.  B ) rigid  form,  are  fitted  with 
RIGID  EXTENSION.  either  Featherweight  or  B.  P.  Holders; 

the  Bellows  Extension  is  fitted  with  English  Holders.  Changes  from  above 
to  order. 


43 


Showing  14  x 17  Bellows  Extension  attached  to  8 x 10  Box. 

LIST  OF  EXTENSIONS. 


For  Combination  Camera  (rigid  form):  Price^ 

,T  X 7 for  4x5  Camera 85  00‘ 

X 8i  “ 5 X 8 A.  “ 7 00 

8 X 10  “ 5 X 8 B “ 7 00 

For  Reversible  Back  Camera  (rigid  form): 

5 X 8 for  X 5^ $7  00 

X “ 5 X 7 9 00 

8 X 10  “ 5 X 7 9 OO 

8 xlO  “ 5 X 8 900 

8 X 10  “ 6l  X 8i 9 00 

10  X 13  “ 5x8  12  OO 

10  X 13  “ X 12  00 

11  xl4  “ 8 X 10 14  OO 


14  X 17  Bellows  Extension  Folded  with  Plate  Holder. 


8 

Si 


8 

8 


8 


-d 

a 


8 

8 


(1) 

2 

o 


W 

s 


CS 


a. 


• © 


ti- 

• o 

: ft 


: © 

'd 

, "o 
5 (S 


^ I 

CO  -g 


O 6 


2 ® 


44 


r/)p  s'CHuLTZE  PHoro' EQiriP/^Et^T  co.  /v£:w/ 


BLHIR’S  ENGLISH 


0oMP:4CT  Seyebsible  Back  Cameras. 


Folded. 


As  the  title  infers,  compactness  is  the  princi- 
pal feature  of  this  Camera.  While  we  h rve  in  i c all 
the  desirable  facilities  possible,  combining  great 
lightness  with  rigidity,  perfection  of  detail  with 
simplicity  and  ease  of  working,  we  have  in  the 
smallest  space,  and  with  the  least  weight,  every 
convenience  and  facility  possessed  by  any 
Camera,  with  several  new  movements  and  de- 
vices peculiar  to  this  Camera  alone. 

The  Camera,  when  closed,  measures  in  thickness  in  the  5x7,  5x8, 
and  6^x834  size,  334  inches;  in  the  8x10,  4 inches.  The  partial  front 
folded,  shows  the  sunken  tripod  top,  with  clamping  screw  in  centre,  the 
centre  of  which  (the  clamping  screw)  is  bored  to  receive  a regulation 
tripod  screw,  thus  enabling  the  operater  to  use  any  other  form  of  tripod 
than  that  supplied  with  the  Camera. 

These  Cameras  are  arranged  to  use  either  the  Rigid  or  the  Champion 
(bellows)  extension. 

Adjusters  or  rigid  form  extensions  fitted  to  these  Cameras  are  inter- 
changeable with  those  belonging  to  the  Improved  Reversible,  and  Cin- 
cinnati R.  B.,  hut  not  with  the  Champion. 


45 


7^ - £Q c/f  r co.  /v^v/,  yb^RK*’ 


Unless  otherwise  specified,  all  orders  for  these  Cameras  will  be  filled,, 
fitted  with  Feather-Weight  Holders.  When  English  or  Blair  Patent  are 
wanted,  please  specify. 

The  price  includes  one  Double  Plate-Holder,  Compact  Tripod,  and 
Carrying  Case. 

Carrying  Cases  are  made  to  carry  Camera,  four  Double  Feather- 
Weight  H )lders  arranged  at  the  end  of  the  Camera,  with  Tripod  on  top,, 
thus  including  the  entire  outfit  in  the  case. 


Partly  Opened.  Folded. 


They  are  made  of  best  selected  mahogany,  French  polished,  and 
trimmed  wdth  hand-finished  brass  mountings,  in  a manner  Mhich  is 
intended  to  make  them  without  an  equal  in  the  world. 


PRICE  LIST  ENGLISH  COMPACT  K.  B.  CAMERAS. 


Size. 

Size  op  Lens 

Board. 

Capacity  for 

Length  op  Fccus. 

Prick. 

i 

S.  S. 

D.  S. 

5X7  1 

5X^1 
614  X 8^  1 
8 X 10  I 

4^  “ 

41^  “ 

6 

17  in. 

18  “ 

18  “ 

20  “ 

$45  00 
50  00 
50  00 

55  00 

Made  to 
order  only, 
10  per  cent 
additional. 

Sei)d  for  odr  Qard  Qatalo^de. 


46 


glair’s  Cincinnati  geversible  gack  Cameras. 

In  this  Camera  we  have  designed  to  make  one  which  is  in  itself  com- 
plete and  quickly  adjusted  for  work,  and  to  prove  that  we  have  succeeded 
in  our  efforts,  we  will  only  ask  an  examination.  Both  folds  in  the  bed 
are  clamped  without  the  turning  of  a screw.  The  front  section  of  bed 
folds  undevy  or  turned  down,  as  would  be  used  in  photographing  with 
very  wide  angle  lenses. 

The  clamping  of  the  first  fold  in  the  bed  is  accomplished  by  a sliding 
section  in  tne  centre  of  the  bed-frame  In  this  section  tlie  tripod  screw  is 
also  attached,  so  that  the  clamping  of  the  Camera  to  the  tripod  also  clamps 
the  bed.  The  outer  fold  in  the  bed  is  clamped  by  two  stiff  springs,  so  that 
it  is  self-adjustable.  It  is  made  to  receive  our  well-known  Patent-Adjuster 
and  Extension  (rigid  form).  Any  combination  for  different  sizes  of 
Cameras  can  be  made  by  using  adjusters  for  smaller  plate-holders  and 
extensions  f or  larger  plate-holders  than  the  Camera  proper. 

The  focusing  is  attained  by  a fine  rack  and  pinion  movement.  They 
are  made  entirely  of  the  best  selected  mahogany,  seasoned  several 
months,  are  hghly  polished,  and  trimmed  with  hand-finished  brass 
mountings. 


Folded,  Extended. 


Cnless  otherwise  specified,  all  orders  for  these  Cameras  will  be  filled 
fitted  with  Feather-Weight  Holders.  When  English  or  Blair  Patent  are 
wanted,  please  specify.  By  removing  the  Reversible  Back  Adjuster  and 
applying  our  Patent  Extension  (reversible)  we  have  a Camera  enabling  the 
operator  to  use  a size  larger  plate.  The  price  includes  one  Double  Plate- 
Holder  and  Carrying  Case. 


PRICE  LIST  CINCINNATI  R.  B.  CAMERAS. 


Size  of  Plate 

Size  op  Lens 
Board. 

Capacity  for 
Length  of  Focus. 

Price. 

S.  S. 

D.  S. 

4x5 

3|  in  sq. 

9 m. 

$20  00 

$22  00 

4dX  5^ 

3|  “ 

lOi  “ 

22  00 

24  00 

5x7 

4i  “ 

124  “ 

28  00 

30  00 

5x8 

6 

14  “ 

30  00 

32  CO 

H X 8^ 

6 

14  “ 

30  00 

32  00 

8 X 10 

7i  X 6 in. 

17  “ 

35  00 

38  00 

47 


r/)^  s'c Hut^ TZE.  RHoro- £Q iri 'pz\E/^ r CO.  /V£W 


« 


^©ekesteF  ©ptical  ©o.’§  Meal  ©anpepag. 


REVERSIBLE  BACK. 


Open.  Folded. 


The  Ideal  Camera  is  pronounced  by  all  to  be  one  of  the  best  view 
Cameras  ever  placed  on  the  market.  It  is  the  result  of  much  study  and 
many  experiments,  made  with  the  view  of  producing  an  instrument 
combining  all  the  qualities  required  in  a View  Camera  for  the  profes- 
sional or  amateur  photographer. 

It  is  made  from  selected  Honduras  mahogany,  finished  in  the  best 
possible  style,  and  has  all  latest  improvements.  We  have  spared  no 
pains  to  make  every  working  point  as  near  perfect  as  possible.  The 
camera  box  is  square,  the  back  being  reversible,  so  that  when  a view  is 
wanted  either  horizontally  or  vertically  on  plate,  the  change  can  be 
effected  in  five  seconds,  by  simply  reversing  the  back  instead  of  the  entire 
camera  box.  It  has  rack  and  pinion  focusing  movement,  the  front 
moving  forward,  leaving  the  back  always  stationary.  When  the  focus 
has  been  obtained,  the  front  is  clamped  by  simply  turning  an  independent 
milled  head,  placed  inside  the  one  which  turns  the  pinion. 


4x5 
4}^x  61^ 
5x7 
5 X 8 
6^x  8K 

8 X 10  , 

10  X 13  , 

11  X 14  , 


Sinjrle 

Double 

Swing. 

Swing. 

$13 

00 

$20 

00 

20 

00 

23 

00 

23 

00 

24 

00 

25 

00 

27 

00 

28 

00 

30 

00 

33 

00 

36 

00 

36 

00 

40 

00 

43 

00 

48 

00 

btjt  i^eu;  a9d  fresl?  Qoods  ^(^pt  \i) 


48 


Rochester  Optical  Co.’s  Excelsior  Cameras. 


FIGURE  1. 


FIGURE  2. 


The  Excelsior  is  the  most  compact  square  Camera  in  market,  and 
combines  many  new  and  valuable  features.  It  is  provided  with  reversible 
back  similar  to  the  Ideal,  the  ground  glass  frame  being  spring  acting. 

Fig.  1 shows  Camera  with  back  moved  from  the  rigid  frame  and 
swung  forward  at  top  ; Fig.  2 shows  Camera  folded. 

To  use  the  vertical  swing,  both  sides  of  Camera  back  are  moved  from 
the  rigid  frame  by  means  of  a fine  rack  and  pinion  ; the  back  will  then 
swing,  and  can  be  clamped  in  any  position.  To  use  horizontal  swing, 
one  side  only  is  moved,  the  other  remaining  stationary.  Owing  to  its 
peculiar  construction,  it  is  only  made  with  double  swing. 

Price,  including  Canvas  Case  and  one  Perfection  Holder,  but  no 
Lens  or  Tripod  : 


4 X 5 $20  00 

41^  X 61^ 22  00 

5 X 7 25  00 

5 X 27  00 

6^  X 8K « 30  00 

8 X 10  35  00 


TUB 

Bosfoq  ReuBPsible  lack  Camepas. 


Combining  the  ad- 
vantages of  other 
makes  with  latest  im- 
provements.  The 
finest  material  and  fin- 
ish. Light  and  rigid. 
Superior  Swing-back 
Movement. 

PRICE  LIST. 

5x7  Single  Swing,  $28 
5x8  “ “ 30 

6^x8^  “ “ 30 

8x10  “ “ 34 

(Interchangeable 
Backs.) 

Double  Swing  sup- 
plied when  desired  at 
$2  additional. 


49 


PHoro^tp{f{p>\^t^r  co.  new  yor^ 


Anthony's  Patent  Novelette  View  Cameras. 


These  are  made  in  the  best  possible  manner,  and  of  first  quality 
mahogany  in  good  hard  varnish  finish.  They  have  single  and  double 
swing  backs,  cone  bellows  and  folding  beds  ; are  very  light,  compact  and 
strong.  Their  peculiar  construction  admits  of  making  the  pictures  either 
vertically  or  horizontally  with  equal  ease,  the  change  of  position  being 
effected  very  quickly. 

The  rear  part  of  the  camera  is  separated  from  the  bed  by  merely 
pushing  it  from  left  to  right,  the  key -hole  slots  releasing  the  heads  of  the 
screws. 

The  front  end  of  the  bellows  being  arranged  so  as  to  revolve  in  a light 
framework  which  runs  on  the  two  hollow  upright  brass  rods,  when  the 
rear  of  the  camera  is  separated  from  the  bed,  the  entire  bellows  revolves 
at  the  same  time  with  the  rear.  When  this  is  turned  on  its  side  and  re- 
placed on  the  screws,  the  camera  is  reversed.  The  whole  operation  of 
reversing  a 5 x 8 camera  requires  but  two  seconds  by  the  watch. 

They  are  made  with  as  long  a bellows  as  possible,  the  5x8  being 
about  four  inches  longer  than  those  of  the  ordinary  kind.  The  ground 
glass  is  hinged  to  the  camera. 

(Several  new  features  have  been  availed  of  in  the  construction  of  this 
camera,  to  wit : The  bed  may  be  instantly  rendered  rigid,  witlioiit  the  use 
of  screws,  by  means  of  a brace  of  patent  hooks  that  hold  the  two  sections 
of  the  bed  with  great  firmness. 


PRICES. 

Without  Single  Double 

Swing.  Swing.  Swing. 

4 X 5,  including  one  double  dry  plate  holder.  $12  50  $15  50  

41^  X 634,  above 20  00  

5 X 7,  “ 20  00  

5 X 8,  “ 20  00  $23  00 

634  X 834,  “ 25  00  28  00 

s X 10,  30  00  33  00 


With  the  4 x 5 size  the  Detective''  plate  holders  are  used 

50 


liAiPBSfP  nOYELBTTR  (©AMBRA. 


8 X 10,  with  single  swing,  extra  lengthy  for  copying,  eniai  ging,  etc. 


j The  bed  is  composed  of  three  sections.  By  removing  the  rear  section 
|a  regular  8 x 10  Novelette  Camera  is  obtained.  The  extra  section  is  held 
ifirmly  in  position  by  two  dowel  pins  and  hook  clamps,  and  can  be 
i removed  in  less  than  three  seconds.  A movable  support  is  placed  under 
Ithe  bellows  to  hold  it  in  position  and  prevent  sagging.  All  is  packed  in 
an  ordinary  carrying  case. 

Price,  including  one  of  our  new  style  double 

Novelette  Holders  and  Case $40  00 


Anthony's  Duplex  Novelette  Camera. 


8 X 10.  5x8. 


As  shown  by  the  cut,  this  consists  of  a 5 x 8 Novelette  Camera,  single 
VAving,  with  stereo,  attachment,  and  the  body  and  bellows  of  an  8 x 10 
Novelette  Camera.  The  bellows  can  be  instantly  detached  from  front 
and  the  whole  removed,  and  that  of  the  8 x 10  put  in  its  place,  thus  con- 
verting it  into  an  8 x 10  Camera. 

Price  complete,  witli  one  each  5x8  and  8 x 10  patent  dry-plate  holder, 
and  carrying  case  for  each  part $3(5  00 


Thfi  s'CHiJL.rZE  PHdro-EQlflP/^Et^f  Oo.  -^£w^‘yORK* 


Front  Focus  Novelette  Camera. 


The  body  of  the  Camera  is  made  of  same  shape  as  the  holder,  and  is 
reversed  more  easily  and  quickly  than  any  other  in  market.  It  occupies 
only  one-half  the  space  necessary  for  other  reversible  Cameras  for  the 
same  size  plate,  and  is  only  two-thirds  the  weight.  It  it  made  with  the 
back  rigid  and  the  front  moving  forward  or  back,  by  rack  and  pinion 
movement,  for  focusing;  thus  giving  the  operator  access  to  the  ground 
g.tass  without  interference  from  the  bed  of  the  Camera.  It  is  of  best 
quality  mahogany,  highly  polished,  has  double  rack  and  pinion,  entire 
length  of  the  bed,  and  when  a lens  of  short  focus  is  used,  the  front  sec- 
tion of  bed  folds  underneath,  hooking  to  centre  section.  It  has  rising 
front,  single  or  double  swing  back,  and  our  patent  adjustable  ground 
glass  which  is  always  just  where  it  is  wanted.  The  metal  w.*rk  has  the 
straight  line  or  draw  file  finish,  same  as  used  in  the  finest  mathematical 
instruments.  Each  size  admits  the  use  of  lenses  of  longest  and  shortest 
focus  for  the  size  plate  to  which  the  Camera  is  adapted.  There  are  no  loose 
pieces  or  sections ; and  in  this  respect  also  it  differs  from  all  reversible 
Cameras  of  other  makes,  being  complete  in  itself. 

It  is  fitted  with  the  “Eclipse”  double  dry  plate  holder,  which  is  in- 
cluded in  price  of  Camera  quoted  below;  also,  one  of  our  telescopic  brass- 
bound  canvas  carrying  cases. 


&ize. 

Free 

Pliin. 

PR] 

Single  Swing. 

:cE. 

Double  Swing. 

Extra  Double 
Zephyr  Holders, 
each. 

Extra  Double 
Eclipse  Holders 
each. 

4 

X 

5 

$19.00 

$21.00 

$23.50 

$1.00 

$2.00 

4K 

X 

6K 

22  50 

25.00 

1.25 

2.25 

5 

X 

7 

23.00 

25.50 

1.25 

2.25 

5 

X 

8 

24.00 

27.00 

1.35 

2.25 

6K 

X 

8^ 

29.00 

32.00 

1.60 

3.50 

8 

X 

10 

34.50 

37.50 

1.85 

4 50 

10 

X 

12 

45  00 

49.00 

6.00 

11 

X 

14 

56.00 

62.00 

7.50 

14 

X 

17 

72  00 

78.00 

10.00 

.^2 


;;  r/) p s'CHuc.rzs:  m€>ro  ,.0p.,  ;|;yo r k • 


ANTHONT’S  PATENT  HOVEL  VIEW  CAMERAS. 


Representing  the  Camera  while  being  reversed. 


The  Novel  Cameras  are  not  made  smaller  than  10  x 12 ; 8 x 10  Vji) 
smaller  having  been  replaced  by  the  Novelette. 

The  last  and  greatest  improvement  yet  made  is  the  revolving  bellom^ 
the  front  end  of  which  is  fastened  in  the  light  framework  in  such  a wajT 
that  when  the  back  is  removed  from  the  bed  the  whole  bellows  revolves, 
instead  of  requiring  to  be  unbuttoned,  as  heretofore,  making  a great 
saving  of  time. 

Made  of  Mahogany,  with  Varnish  Finish.  In  Carrying  Case,  with 
one  single  Novel  Dry  Plate  Holder. 


lOx  12, 
11  X 14 
14  X 17 
17x  20, 
18  x22, 


Single  Swing.  Double  Swings 


|35 

50 

$40 

50 

41 

75 

46 

75 

55 

00 

60 

00 

64 

50 

72 

00 

71 

50 

79 

00 

Novel  View  Cameras  are  fitted  with  one  of  our  Novel  Holders,  each 
one  of  which  has  two  slides,  working  in  the  end  and  in  the  side  of 
shield  ; therefore  the  slide  can  be  withdrawn  from  the  side  of  the  shield, 
no  matter  in  w’hat  position  the  camera  is  placed.  These  shields  are  made 
single  and  for  d.  y plates  only.  Prices  include  the  carrying  case.  They 
are  made  with  the  ground  glass  of  the  same  focus  as  wet  plate  holders  ; 
if  desired,  wet  plate  holders  can  be  furnished  to  order. 

Extra  Holders  for  the  above  are  supplied  at  the  following  prices  : 


NOVEL  DRY  PLATE  HOLDERS  (PATENTED.) 


10  X 12  (single),  each $ 5 t 

11  X 14  “ “ 6 7^ 

14  X 17  “ “ 10  00 

17  X 20  “ “ 12  00 

18  X 22  “ “ 14  OC 


53 


PHOTO  ’^EQUiP/^trr 


J[nthony’s  iairy  lameras. 

It  has  long  been  our  desire 
to  place  before  the  public  a 
Camera  that  would  at  once 
embrace  these  most  neces- 
sary requirements — port- 
ability, compactness  and 
strength,  combined  with 
beauty  and  accuracy  of 
working. 

Hitherto,  the  nearest 
approach  to  this  has  been 
the  “^ovel”  Camera, 
whicb,  for  a time,  seemed 
to  be  everything  that 
could  be  desired.  But 
urgent  calls  for  something 

5 X 8,  used  horizontally.  still  better  werefrequently 

made,  and  we  therefore 
devised  the  Fairy  Camera,  by  far  the  most  artractive  and  elegant  piece 
of  apparatus  of  its  kind  ever  offered. 

The  small  compass  to  which  they  may  be  reduced  rende.-s  ^heui  in 
this  respect  incomparably  superior  to  any.  They  a^-e  packed  in  canvas- 
covered  wooden  cases,  and  each  double  plate  holder  hj^s  iis  ovui  compart- 
ment. The  cover  of  the  case  telescopes  over  its  body. 


5x8,  used  vertically. 


Several  new  features  have  been  availed  of  in  the  constructiox  /i  thia 
Camera. 

First. — The  bed  may  be  instantly  rendered  rigid,  without  the  use  of 
screws,  by  means  of  a brace  of  hooks  that  hold  the  two  sections  of  the 
bed  with  great  firmness. 

Second. — The  rabbet  commonly  found  on  the  plate  holder  is  dispensed 
with,  and  instead  it  is  placed  on  the  Camera,  thus  saving  the  otherwise 
additional  weight  rendered  necessary  for  twelve  such  rabbets  when  made 
on  the  plate  holders  (two  on  each  side  of  the  six  usually  carried),  and  the 
no  inconsiderable  item  of  three-quarters  of  an  inch  in  bulk. 


54 


Tf}^^  S‘C^{^LrZ^  " ^?*  /vev/^YORK* 


c' 


8 X 10,  front  view. 


The  ground  glass  springs 
backward  in  its  frame,  like 
that  in  the  regular  Novel 
Camera,  and  is  held  tightly 
in  position  by  metallic 
spring  corners.  When 
windy,  this  is  a decided 
advantage. 

The  Fairy  Camera  is  made 
in  finely-finished  mahogany, 
the  metal  work  being  nickel- 
plated,  thus  making  it  the 
most  elegant  and  perfect 
Camera  known. 

At  present  they  may  be 
had  in  four  sizes,  as  follows  ; 


INCLUDING  ONE  DOUBLE  DKY  PLATE  HOLDER. 

S'ngle  Swing  Back. 


4I4  X 03^,  without  stereo,  attachments $40  00 

5 X 8,  “ “ “ 43  00 

5x8,  with^  “ “ ..  43  00 

634  X 81^,  “ “ “ 45  00 

8 X 10,  “ “ 50  00 


INCLUDING  SIX  DOUBLE  DKY  PLATE  HOLDERS. 


Single  Swing  Back. 


43^  X 634>  without  stere.'.  attachments $53  00 

5x8,  “ “ “ 55  00 

5 x 8,  with  “ “ 55  00 

X 8^,  “ , “ “ 65  00 

8 X 10,  “ “ “ 75  00 


FAIRY  PLATE  HOLDERS  ONLY. 


Each. 

4^X  634 $3  00 

5 X 8 3 00 

61^  X 834 5 00 

8 X 10  6 00 


55 


. Th^  s^CHiji^rzk  ^^0^0' £olfi:py^^  co.v/v£^v/ 


ANTHONY’S  PHANTOM  CAMERA. 

To  open  and  assemble  it  for  operating,  unfasten  the  hook  that  holds 
the  bed  to  the  top  of  the  Camera  under  the 
leather  handle,  and  bring  the  bed  at  right  angles 
with  the  body  A.  Then  fasten  set  screw  S (the 
smaller  one  of  the  two),  under  the  body  of 
Camera.  Then  adjust  the  front  in  position  on 
end  of  bed,  by  means  of  the  two  key-hole  slots 
and  screw  heads.  The  inner  section  of  the  bed 
D is  then  placed  to  about  where  it  is  to  be  used, 
and  fastened  in  position  by  set-screw  C.  The 
adjustment  of  focus  is  obtained  by  the  screw  R, 
which  works  the  rack  and  pinion,  moving  tho 

Camera  when  closed.  second  or  middle  section  of  Camera  bed,  E. 
When  this  is  done,  the  bed  is  rigidly  secured  by  set-screw  H in  outer 
section  of  bed  F.  The  Swing  Back  is  operated  by  loosening  the  set- 
screw G. 

For  using  Lenses  of  very  short  focus,  the  inner  section  of  the  bed  D 
is  run  to  the  rear  as  far  as  possible,  and  the  middle  section  of  the  bed,  E, 
racked  to  the  rear,  when  it  will  admit  of  use  of  lenses  of  shorter  foci, 
without  the  least  danger  or  possibility  of  the  bed  being  brought  into 
the  view. 

The  ground  glass  is  held  in  position  by  springs,  which  act  on  pins  in 
the  edge  of  the  frame,  these  pins  running  in  slots  in  plates  on  the  edge  of 
the  body  of  the  Camera.  To  insert  the  holder,  raise  the  ground  glass 
frame  as  high  as  it  will  go,  and  draw  it  to  the  right,  when  the  pins  in  the 
edges  will  rest  upon  the  shoulders  in  the  slots  and  keep  it  in  position.  In- 


Camera  when  fully  drawn  out. 

sert  the  Holder  as  far  as  it  will  go,and  either  push  the  ground  glass  frame- 
at  same  time,  or  afterwards,  releasing  the  pins  in  its  edge  from  the  shoul- 
ders, when  the  springs  will  act  upon  it,  keeping  the  Holder  firmly  in  posi- 
tion. To  withdraw  the  Holder,  raise  it  slightly  to  allow  it  to  pass  the 
metal  light  protecting  edge,  and  it  is  easily  removed.  If  raised  high 
enough  it  will  catch  the  ground  glass  .upon  the  shoulders,  and  hold  it 
there  ready  to  insert  another  Holder.  When  two  or  more  views  of 
same  object  are  desired,  this  will  be  found  of  great  advantage..  This  con- 
struction never  necessitates  removal  of  the  ground  glass,  nor  is  the  latter 
ever  in  the  way. 


66 


YORK- 


The  Camera  is  reversed  in  the  same  way  as  our  Novelette  and  Fairj 

Camera,  by  the  key-hole  slots  and' 
screw  heads.  The  front  is  raised  or 
lowered  on  the  metal  standards,  but 
when  closing  the  Camera,  the  top  of 
the  front  should  be  fastened  on  a 
level  with  the  top  of  the  standards. 
The  Camera  is  always  closed  with 
the  plate  horizontally,  and  hence  is 
always  ready  for  viewing  without  re- 
versing. 

In  issuing  this,  every  care  has 
Camera  arranged  for  short  focus.  been  taken  to  produce  a Camera 
that  would  be  Compact,  Light,  Strong,  and  Easily  assembled.  It  has  na 
complicated  parts  to  get  out  of  order,  and  they  will  be  found  interchange- 
able. The  price  includes  (tne  Patent  Phantom  Double  Holder  and  New 
Style  Telescopic  Case. 

Size.  Longest  Focus.  Price. 

41^  X 634 16  inches $28  00 

5 x7  18  “ 32  00 

5 x8  18  “ 34  00 

634  X 814 “ 00 

8 xlO  23  “ 40  00 


cwmRX  cAmEpfls 

FITTED  WITH  THE 

“BENSTER”  PLATE  HOLDERS. 

These  cameras  are  manufactured  in  the  most  substantial  manner  from 
the  best  of  mahogany,  and  handsomely  finished  with  all  late  improve- 
ments. 


No.  14  B Climax  Cam'ra,  with  Telescopic  Bed  and  Benster  Holder. 
57 


Tf)^  jrCH(ji:rZBr  /V£w^ 


CLIMAX  PORTRAIT  CAMERAS. 

Double  Swing  Back,  Tangent  Screw  Motion  and  Telescopic  Bed. 

No.  13  B.  11x14  and  under.  .$59  00  I No.  17  B.  20  x 24  and  under.  . $97  00 
“ 14  B.  14x17  “ ..  70  00  “ 1 8 B.  22x27'  “ ..118  00 

“ 15  B.  17x20  “ ..  83  00  “ 20  B.  25x30  “ ..  150  00 

“ 16  B.  18x22  “ ..  90  00  | 

All  the  above  are  supplied  with  a lever  attachment,  b}r  which  the 
most  minute  adjustment  of  the  focus  may  be  instantly  obtained. 


No.  19  B.  For  8x10  and  under  and  two  cabinets  on  8x  10  plate,  or 
two  C.  de  V.  on  smallrr  plate.  Fitted  with  “ Benster Holder  and 
carriage  movement  on  our  Patent  Rollers,  and  lever  focusing  attachment. 


Double  swing  back |39  00 

The  same  for  10x12  and  under,  double  swing  back. 55  00 


If  yotJ  vuaQt  a Seauey  Bael^^roii^d  direct  from  l^is  Stijdio, 
u/arrai^ted  (;^erfU\T)<^,  ^eT)d  your  orders. 


58 


^ Thg  s;cM(jL^tZE:  RHQro-EQir-ip/\Ei^T  o NaW  YOk[<.' 


NEW  YORK  IMPERIAL  CAMERA, 

Fitted  with  the  “Benster”  Plate  Holder.' 


A new  combination  camera,  with  carriage  movement,  consisting  of 
an  11  X 14  double  swing  back  camera  with  telescopic  bed,  for  portraiture 
from  Ilxl4to8xl0  and  reversible. 

Also  with  an  8x10  Attachment  (as  illustrated  below)  for  8x  10  to  1-4 
reversible,  as  follows:  Making  two  cabinets  on  an  8x10,  using  one  tube, 
and  two  carte  de  visites  on  434  x634- 

These  will  fiU  all  the  requirements  of  any  studio.  Price,  complete, 

11  X 14 $80  00  1 14  X 17 $95  00 


Attachments  for  Portrait  Cameras, 


Consisting  of  a carr^ge  and  plate  holder  to  be  attached  to  larger  portrait 
cameras,  by  occupying  the  place  of  the  ground  glass  or  shield  of  the  same 


59 


if)  bp.-'  to  RK  • 


for  producing  smaller  pictures,  without  using  the  large  shield  belonging 
to  the  camera.  Two  carte  de  visite  or  cabinet  portraits  can  be  made  with 
one  lens.  These  attachments  can  be  laid  aside  when  large-sized  pictures 
are  to  be  taken,  and  replaced  when  imperial  work  is  to  be  done,  for  which 
they  are  available,  from  the  largest  size  specified  down  to  the  smallest 
imperial  work.  • 

In  ordering  please  state  what  kind  of  camera  is  in  use,  and  give  the 


outside  size  of  the  back,  to  guard  against  error. 

8 X 10  and  cabinet  and  C.  de  V.  attachment  for  11  x 14 $22  00 

8x10  “ “ “ “ 14x  17 25  00 

8x10  “ “ “ “ 17x20 32  5a 


Climax  Cincinnati  Gem  Camera. 


For  negatives  or  ferrotypes  (admitting  of  picture  8 x 10  and  under, 
two  on  8x1 0,  7xl0or5x7  with  one  lens)  with  carriage  movement  on 
our  Patent  Rollers,  lever  focusing  attachment  and  fitted  with  the 
“ Benster”  holder  with  wooden  slide. 


No.  Price. 

43  B.  Without  swing,  $27  00 

43  B.  Single  swing 30  00 

43  B.  Double  swing 34  50 


When  fitted  with  four  1-4  Gem  Tubes  on  plate,  it  will  admit  of  eight 
on  7 X 10,  and  four  on  5 x 7. 

Without  swing,  fitted  with  four  tubes  on  plate $43  00 

Single  “ “ “ “ 46  00 

Double  “ “ “ “ ^0  00 


60 


CLIMAX  ROYAL  CAMERA. 


This  camera  has  the  sliding  back  or  carriage  for  plate  holder,  and 
has  a ground  glass  attached  in  place,  where  it  is  always  at  hand.  When 
the  operator  has  the  plate  holder  ready,  he  places  it  in  the  carriage, 
instead  of  laying  it  on  the  floor  or  some  other  inconvenient  place,  while 
he  gets  his  focus;  this  done,  he  merely  slides  the  holder,  ground  glass 
and  all,  together.  It  is  made  in  the  best  manner,  of  fine  mahogany,  and 
is  fitted  with  the  celebrated  Benster  plate  holder,  working  8 x 10  plates, 
and  smaller;  two  5x8  negatives  on  an  8 x 10  plate;  two  434  ^ ^34  nega- 
tives on  a 634  ^ piate;  two  4x5  negatives  ona  5 x 8 plate,  etc.  Prices: 
8 X 10  size,  complete $43  75  | 11  x 14  size,  complete $70  00 


CLIMAX  CAMLfiAS 

SOL-ID  BEDS. 

These  cameras  are  manufactured  in  the  most  substantial  manner 
from  the  best  of  mahogany,  and  handsomely  finished.  They  are  supplied 


with  Lewis's  Patent  Universal 

Solid  Glass 

Corners.  The  Single  Swing 

Cameras 

are  not  kept  in  stock,  but  made  to  order  only.  Prices,  with  the 

Patent  “ 

Benster”  Plate  Holders  are  also  given  below. 

Double  Swing, 

For  Reversible 

Singfle 

Double 

with  Benster 

Plate. 

Swing. 

. Swing. 

Plate  Holder. 

No.  9 .. 

44  X 534  

$15  00 

“ 10  .. 

634  X 834  ... . 

26  00 

“ 11  .. 

8 X 10  .... 

. ...  $27  00  . 

31  00 

$36  00 

“ 12  .. 

10  X 13  . . . . 

. . . . 32  50  . 

37  50 

42  50 

“ 13  . 

11  X 14  

39  00  . 

44  00 

50  00 

“ 14  .. 

14  X 17  . .. . 

....  48  00  . 

5 1 00 

63  50 

“ 15  .. 

17  X 20  

56  50  . 

62  50 

72  no 

61 

CLIMAX  OR  NEW  YORK  GEM  CAMERA. 


This  camera  has  been  in  great  demand  for  small  ferro.  work  and 
photographs  to  half  size.  Without  With  4 1-9 

Lenses.  Lenses, 

No.  42.  For  4,  8 and  16  on  IT  plate  with  4 ^ lenses,  2 
o.n  ^2  plate,  and  34  fo  i rever-.ible  with  1 
portrait  lens 115  00  $24  00 


CLIMAX  FERROTYPE  CAMERAS. 

Without  With 

Lenses.  Lenses. 


No.  3734-  Camera  and  shield  for  4 on  34  plate  with  » 

4 ^ lenses $6  75  $16  00 

“ 38.  Camera  and  shield  for  6 on  34  plate  with 

6 lenses 8 50  22  25 

“ 39.  Catnera  and  shield  for  9 on  f plate  with 

9 lenses 12  00  32  50 


5 X 7 IMPROVED  VICTORIA  CAMERA. 


P'or  making  5x7,  414x534  and  334x434  pictures,  and  reversible, 
and  4 or  8 on  5 X 7 plates  with  4 Gem  tubes.  It  is  handsomely  finished  in 
mahogany,  has  rabbeted  shield  and  kits.  The  camera  has  several 
improvements  over  anything  heretofore  offered  to  the  trade. 

Price,  without  lenses,  $15  00;  with  4)4  lenses  on  plate,  $31  50. 


G2 


Climax  Portrait  and  Gem  Camera. 


(No.  43  C.) 


The  best  every-day  camera  in  the  market.  With  sliding  liolder  and 
swinging  ground  glass;  improved  focus  screw;  extension  bellows.  With 
rabbeted  kits  for  dry  plate  and  ferrotype  work.  With  a single  4-4  or 
extra  4-4  tube,  it  will  make  all  regular  work,  reversible,  from  1-4  size  to 
8 X 10;  also  two  cabinets  on  8 x 10  plate  or  two  5x7  size  on  two  5x7 
plates.  With  a 1-4  or  1-2  size  tube,  copying  and  enlarging  to  8 x 10;  with 
four  ^ Gem  tubes  set  in  brass  plate,  it  makes  eight  large  bon-tons  or 
card  size  on  7 x 10;  also  four  of  the  same  size  on  5x7,  and  eight  small 
bon-tons  on  5 x 7.  Prices; 


No.  43  C.  All  complete  except  tubes $22  50 

“ 43  C.  As  above,  fitted  with  four  34"  Gem  tubes 37  50 


^oo\{  07(^11  li^t  before  ord(^ri9§. 


• YORK* ' 


SCHULTZES 

■m  -BOJ^  X O N 14 


perrotyp^  <^amera. 


This  is  an  excellent  and  cheap  Camera  for  making 
four  Bon  Tons  on  a 5x7  Ferro  Plate,  with  four  tubes,  or  one 
card  or  cabinet  picture,  on  a 5x7  plate,  with  one  lens. 


Witliout  Ileuses,  - $12.00. 

Fitted  with,  fo^ar  1-4  Fenses,  - $27.00. 


O.  I.  Q.  Poptpait  Gamepas. 


Rubber  bellows,  improved  wooden  guide,  solid  bed,  swinging  ground 
glass  and  reversible  shield,  and  Lewis’s  patent  solid  glass  corners. 


No.  2. 
“ 3. 

4. 


1-2.. . 

4-4. . . 

8 X 10, 


$8  50 
11  50 
17  00 


No.  5.  10  X 12,  focus  rack. . 
“ 6.  11  X 14,  “ 

7.  14x17, 


Focus  Rack,  $3  00  extra. 


$21  00 
30  01) 
40  00 


64 


0. 1.  C.  COPYING  CAMEBAS. 


No.  Price. 


No.  Price. 

28.  With  8^/  foot  bed,  for  8 x 10  to  1-4 $28  75 

29.  “ 4 “ “ 10x12  “ 1-2 36  50 

30.  “ 434  “ “ 11x14  “ 1-2 43  00 

31.  “ 5 “ “ 14  X 17  “ 4-1 55  50 

32.  “ 6 “ “ 17x20  “8x10 6150 


Walnut,  extra  long  rubber  bellows,  cone,  improved  wooden  guide, 
focus  screw,  sliding  front  and  reversible  S.  G.  corner  shield. 


When  ordering,  please  specify  number  and  sizes  of  kits  wanted. 


Size,  634x  834 Price,  $27  00  I Size,  10  x 12 Price,  $45  00 

“ 8 xlO  “ 30  00  I “ 11x14 “ 55  00 

8x10  size  only  kept  in  stock.  Other  sizes  made  to  order. 

The  form  of  construction  of  this  new  camera  is  made  apparent  by 
the  illustration  heie  shown. 

An  important  feature  in  this  camera,  that  is  found  in  no  other,  is, 
the  center-board  with  lens  can  be  used  in  the  end  t f the  camera,  con- 
verting it  at  once  into  an  extra  long  copying  camera.  This  will  be  found 
very  advantageous  in  enlarging  small  pictures  by  one  oj)eration. 


65 


§ 


S'CHUL.rZEi  PHOro-EQLriP/\EI^T  CO.  /V£:vy/  YORK* 


Eastman’s  Daylight  Enlarging 
Cameras. 

Especially  Designed  for  Use  with  our  ENLARGING  EASELS  and 
BROMIDE  PAPER. 


8 X 10  Camera  with  adjustabl  < Carriers  for  8 x 10  Negatives  and 

under,  price  complete |25  OO 

These  Cameras  are  provided  with  fine  quality  cut  rack  and  pinions, 
and  are  adjusted  with  special  reference  to  smooth  working  and  rigidity. 


WINDOW  BO::  foe  ENLAESma. 


This  box  is  the  back  end  and  bellows  of  the  Eastman  Enlarging. 
Camera,  and  it  is  intended  for  use  in  connection  with  another  camera. 
Window  box  complete,  with  ground  glass,  bellows,  and  adjustable 

carrier  for  Negatives  8^^  x 41^  to  8 x 10,  price 50- 


66 


-jrc/f^4rz£:'v24oro#^  co.  /v£:w/  yor^ 


cooper's 

Universal  Enlarging  Lantern. 

CP^TE^STTEi:).) 

Patented:  Cooper  & Lewis,  Oct.  11, 1887,  No.  371,253  ; T.  H.  McAllister, 

April  6,  1886,  No.  339,451. 


The  cuts  give  an  admirably  cbar  idea  of  the  Universal  Lantern,  and 
at  a glance  any  one  acquainted  with  the  mechanism  of  projecting  lan- 
terns will  se^  its  advantages.  With  only  a passing  reference  to  the  cam- 
era and  front,  the  use  of  which  is  obvious,  your 
attention  is  called  to  the  apparatus  for  illumination, 
which  is  by  all  odds  the  most  important  feature  of 
any  enlarging  lantern. 

The  Lamp,  wdiich  is  intended  for  use  with  kero- 
sene, is  provided  with  a double-wick  burner,  both 
flames  emerging  through  a single  aperture  in  the 
dome.  This  ft-ature  increases  the  volume  of  light 
two-fold;  the  burner  is  provided  with  a close  fitting 
chimney,basefiLted  with  an  aperture  covered  with 
non-actinic  glass,  intended  both  for  dark  room  il- 
lumination and  also  for  observing  the  height 

of  the 
flames.  A 
conical 
light  con- 
d u c t o r 
conn  ts 
the  lamp 
with  the 
condens - 
ing  len- 
ses and  is 
made  to 
telescope 
so  as  to 
adjust 
the  light 
accurate- 
ly to  the 
focus  of 

Above  shows  it  as  i a use  with  ar<(/iciai  ligrht.  the  con- 

densers; this  light  conductor  has  an  aperture  at  the  side  covered  with  a 
movable  metallic  disk,  and  is  intended  to  admit. of  the  operator  finding 
the  centering  point  of  his  flame  on  the  condensers ; this  he  will  see  at  a 
glance  by  the  reflector.  The  lamp  is  not  rigid,  but  can  be  revolved  so  as 
to  bring  the  flame  in  any  desired  position.  Some  negatives  require  a 
more  intense  light  than  others,  and  experience  will  show  how  to  arrange 
the  light  for  any  particular  occasion. 

The  form  of  this  lantern  is  such  that  all  heat  passes  upwards  through 
the  chimney,  and  as  there  is  no  boxing  around  the  apparatus  it  is  always 
cool,  and  all  risk  of  breaking  lenses  or  negatives  is  avoided.  The  change 
from  the  use  of  artificial  light  to  daylight  is  better  shown  in  the  cut  than 
described  in  writing.  With  this  lantern  and  a lialf  inch  stop  in  a half- 
size portrait  lens,  life-sized  enlargements  from  cabinet  negatives  may  be 
easily  made  with  Anthony’s  Reliable  Bromide  Paper  in  from  thirty-five 
seconds  to  one  minute,  according  to  density  of  negative. 


67 


I 


Above  shows  it  as  transformed  into  a Daylight  Enlarging  Camera- 

The  design  of  this  lantern  is  the  result  nf  long  practical  experience 
with  various  methods  of  illumination  for  enlarging,  and  we  can  guaran- 
tee its  giving  I'esults  as  porfect  as  the  electric  light,  at  a cost  that  makes 
comparisoti  ridiculous.  This  lantern  is  also  admirably  suited  for  slide 
projection,  and  is  therefore  of  double  value  to  societies  and  colleges. 

Any  double  combination  lens  may  be  used  as  an  objective  with  this 
lantern — a portrait  lens  for  enlarging  portraits  and  landscape  lens  for 
landscap' s. 

I his  lantern  may  be  transformed  into  an  8 x 10  portrait  or  copying 
camera  by  the  addition  of  an  adapter,  double  dry  plate  holder,  and  ground 
glass  at  an  extra  expense  of  $10.00. 

Trice,  without  objective  (fitted  with  two  S^-inch  condensers),  $40  00 
“ “ “ 8 “ “ 60  00 

“ “ “ 9 “ “ 80  00 

“ “ “ 10  “ “ 100  00 


attachment  for  using  Cooper's  Enlarging  ‘Hantern 
as  a Copying  or  portrait  Camera. 

Besides  the  double  use 
for  Artificial  or  Daylight 
work,  this  Camera  may 
be  fitted  with  an  attach- 
ment by  which  it  can 
be  quickly  and  easily 
adapted  to  the  purposes 
of  a Copying  or  Portrait 
Camera.  The  Camera 
being  put  together  as  in 
use  lor  daylight  enlarg- 
ing. the  ground  glass 
and  carrier  are  removed, 
and  in  their  j lace  a reg- 
ular camera  back  is  but- 
toned on.  This  is  pro- 
vided wiHi  a double  dry 
plate  holder.8  x 10,  which 
is  slid  into  position  un- 
der the  ground  glass,  as 
shown  in  the  cut.  For 
ordinary  w^ork  up  to  8 x 10  in  the  gallery,  this  is  as  good  as  any  Camera 
made. 

Price  of  attachment  with  8 x 10  Double  Dry  Plate  Holder,  $10  in  ad- 
dition to  cost  of  Lantern. 


68 


PliATE  HOLiDElf^S. 


IN  ordering  holders,  parties  should  send  their  old  holder  as  sample,  if 
possible,  to  avoid  mistakes  ; otherwise  maker’s  name  should  be  given, 
and  outside  dimensions ; style  cf  camera  f r whi'  h holders  are  intended  ; 
portrait  or  imperial ; whether  reversible  or  non- reversible  ; for  plain  or 
swing  camera  (single  or  double) ; and  specify  if  silver-saving  bottle  is 
wanted  in  the  holder. 

Unless  a camera  is  so  made  as  to  admit  of  it,  a saving  bottle  cannot  be 
attached  to  the  holder,  as  special  depth  of  holder  frame  is  l equired. 

It  is  necessary,  where  it  is  desired  to  put  a dry  plate  holder  on  a 
camera  adapted  previously  for  a wet  plate  holder,  to  send  ( n the  ground 
glass  frame  so  th  A the  focus  may  be  adjusted  for  both  holders.  A net 
plate  holder  in  use  has  more  or  less  of  silver  solution  adhering  to  if,  and 
should  not  he  used  for  dry  plate  ivork,  because  the  silver  is  quite  liable  to 
get  on  the  gelatine  plate  and  to  mar  the  picture. 


Scovill’s  Improved  Patent  Bonanza  Plate  Holder. 

The  Scovill  Mfg.  Co.  being  the  sole  agents  for  the  manufacture  and 
sale  of  the  “ Bonanza”  holder,  t’.icy  hereby  notify  all  concerned  that  such 
holders  made  by  other  parties  are  infringements  of  said  patents,  and  that 
they  will  hold  all  dealers  or  others  having  infringing  goods  in  their  pos- 


session responsible,  in  damages. 


i 4v 

$4 

25 

1 2 

6 

40 

43^x634 

8 

00 

5x7 

8 

50 

4-4 

9 

60 

8x10 

10 

50 

10x12 

16 

00 

11x14 

21 

50 

14x17 

24 

00 

17x20 

27 

50 

20x24 

35 

75 

25x30 

44 

00 

Bonanza  holder  for  Cincinnati  Camera 12  75 

Bonanza  holder  for  Multiplying  Camera 12  75 


Schultze’s  Solid  Glass  Corner  Plate  Holders. 

FOR  WET  PLATES. 


Outside  Holder 


only.  Price. 

For  3^x4>^ $4  00 

“ 4 X 5 4 25 

“ 41^x534 4 50 

“ 414x6^ 4 75 

“ 5 X 7 5 50 

“ 5 X 8 6 00 

“ 6^x83^ ..6  50 


Outside  Holderl 
only. 

For  8x10 

“ 10x12 

“ 11x14.... 
“ 14x17.... 

“ 17x20 

“ 18x22.... 
“ 20x24 


Price. 
$7  50 
10  00 
12  00 
15  00 
17  50 
22  00 
24  00 


-CO.  new  york-  ' 


Schuitze’s  English  Double  Dry  Plate  Holder. 

It  has  the  great  merit  of  being  lighter  and  of  occupying  less  space 
than  any  substantial  holder  ever  devised.  It  opens  like  a book  when 
plates  are  being  put  in  or  taken  out,  and  is  so  arranged  that  light  cannot 
penetrate  from  one  side  to  the  other.  Kits  can  be  used  in  them  as  in  all 
our  holders. 


31^  X 

4 X 5 

434  X 6K 

5 X 7 
5 X 8 

634  X 8^ 

8 xlO 

10  xl2 

11  xl4 
14  xl7 


12  00 
2 25 
2 35 

2 50 
2 60 

3 50 
5 50 
8 00 
9 00 

13  00 


PRICES  OF  DRY  PLATE  HOLDERS  MANUFACTURED 
BY  THE  A.  0.  CO. 


Size. 

Scovill’s  Patent 
Double  Dry 
Plate  Holde  r. 
Kits  Extra. 

Daisy  Double 
Dry  Plate 
Holder. 

> Kits  Extra. 

Flammang-’s 
Single  Dry 
Plate  Holder. 
With  Kits. 

ScoyilTs 
Light  Weight 
Plate  Holder. 
Kits  Extra. 

3^x  4^.... 

$ 1 50 

$ 1 75 

$ 1 50 

1 90 

4 X 5 

1 75 

2 00 

1 75 

1 00 

414  X 5^’.... 

1 85 

2 10 

1 85 

1 10 

4^x  6^2 

1 90 

2 25 

1 90 

1 25 

6 X 7 . . . 

2 10 

2 35 

2 10 

1 30 

5x8  .... 

2 20 

2 50 

2 20 

1 40 

6Kx  8^.... 

8 80 

4 20 

3 80 

1 70 

8 xlO  .... 

5 00 

6 00 

5 00 

2 00 

10  xl2  .... 

7 00 

8 00 

■ 7 00 

3 50 

11  xl4  .... 

8 50 

~ 10  00 

8 50 

5 00 

14  xl7  .... 

10  80 

i2  50 

10  80 

BLAIR’S  ENGLISH  PLATE  HOLDER. 

All  sizes,  up  to  8 x 10,  are  fitted  with  our  blackboard  registering 
slides.  10  X 12  and  upwards  have  w^ooden  slides. 

Made  to  receive  kits,  and  can  be  fitted  to  any  Camera  when  ordered. 


314  X 

4 X 

4^ 

$3  15 

8 X 10 

JR 

5 

2 26 

lOx  12 

fi  00 

5 X 

7 

2 75 

11  X 14.  

Q nu 

5 X 

8 

2 75 

14x  17 

13  00 

6Mx 

SH 

70 


BLAIR’S  DOUBLE  PLATE  HOLDER. 


• 

Size. 

ORIGINAL  STYLE. 

BLAIR’S 

PATENT. 

FEATHER 

WEIGHT 

(Cherry.) 

Cherry. 

Whitew’d 

Cherry. 

Whitew’d 

Each. 

4 X 5 

$2  00 

$1  50 

$1  00 

4!^x  5% 

2 00 

1 50 

1 00 

43^  X 634 

2 50 

2 00 

1 25 

5 X 7 

$2  00 

$1  75 

2 50 

2 00 

1 25 

5 X 8 

2 00 

1 75 

2 50 

2 00 

1 35 

634  X 8^  

3 00 

2 50 

3 00 

2 50 

1 60 

8 X 10  

3 00 

2 75 

3 00 

2 75 

1 85 

10  X 12  

5 50 

5 00 

6 00 

5 50 

3 00 

11  X 14  

6 50 

6 00 

7 50 

7 00 

4 00 

R.  0.  CO.’S  ENGLISH  BOOK  HOLDER. 

This  is  the  regular  English  form  of  holder,  and  it  has  many  advan- 
tages. The  two  sides  are  hinged,  and  open  like  a book  when  placing  or 
displacing  the  plates.  The  septum  for  division  between  the  two  sides  of 
holder  is  also  hinged,  and  no  trouble  to  put  in  place  in  the  dark  room. 


S'f  x4i^ 

$1  60 

634  X 834 

$2  25 

4 X 5 

1 60 

8 

X 10  

3 00 

434  x6K 

1 75 

10 

X 12  

4 50 

5 X 7 

1 85 

11 

X 14  

6 00 

5 X 8 

2 00 

14 

X 17  

7 50 

PHANTOM  DOUBLE  DRY  PLATE  HOLDERS. 


Same  as  Zephyr  Holders,  but  with  hard  rubber  slides. 

43^  X 61^ |1  80  I 5 x8 $2  00 

5 X 7 1 90  6^x83^ 2 60 

8x10 $3  00 

ANTHONY’S  PATENT  DETECTIYE  DOUBLE  DRY  PLATE  HOLDERS. 

The  plates  are  placed  into  and  removed  from  the  holder  at  one  of  the 
ends,  which  is  opened  by  pressing  aside  the  metal  band  that  secures  tlie 
wooden  cover.  These  holders  have  hard  rubber  slides,  and  are  provided 
with  an  ingenious  device  for  holding  slides  in  place,  and  preventing  their 
being  accidentally  drawn  out  when  the  holder  contains  j^lates. 

These  holders  are  used  with  our  “Detective.”  “4x5  Novelette,” 
“ Bicycle,”  and  “ Bijou”  cameras.  They  are  also  supplied  with  our  No.  1 
and  No.  1 B equipments.  Made  in  the  folio  ing  sizes  only: 

314  X 43^ each  $2  00  | 4x5 each  $2  00 

ANTHONY’S  PATENT  ZEPHYR  DOUBLE  DRY  PLATE  HOLDERS. 


Similar  to  the  Detective  Holders,  but  with  paper  slide. 


4 x5 $1  00 

4^x61^ 1 25 

6 X 7 1 25 


5 x8.., 

63^x8^. 
8 X 10. , 


R.  0.  CO.’S  PERFECTION  HOLDER. 


$1  35 
1 60 
1 85 


To  load  the  Perfection  Holder,  the  end  of  the  plate  is  rested  against 
the  spring-bar  at  the  end  of  the  h >lder,  then,  by  simply  pressing  the 
spring-bar  with  the  thumb,  the  plate  falls  into  place. 

On  account  of  its  simi)licity  the  Perfection  Holder  can  be  loaded  'and 
unloaded  with  the  greatest  of  ease,  even  in  absolute  darkness. 

As  the  plate  is  held  in  place  by  the  ends  only,  the  full  width  ot  the 
plate  is  exposed,  and  but  1-16  inch  is  cut  otf  from  each  end. 

3Vx4^ $100  15  x8 $135 

4 x5. 1 00  I 6>.ix83^ 1 60 

4^x634 1 25  1 8 xlO 1 85 

^ x7 1 25  I 10  X 12 3 00 

11x14 $4  50 


71 


7^  <3  V/  R K * 


SCHULTZE’S  LIGHT-WEIGHT  I OUBLE  PLATE-HOLDER. 


' Absolutely  light-tight.  Substantia],  serviceable,  accurate. 

The  object  in  view  in  constructing  this  Holder  was  to  supply  one 
which  would  occupy  the  smal.est  space  consistent  with  strength  and 
safety,  and,  at  the  same  time,  at  a price  which  would  encourage  a 
more  liberal  supply  being  used,  thus  avoiding  the  annoyance  of  having 
so  frequently  to  renew  the  sensitive  plates. 

After  a i eriod  of  four  years  since  the  first  introduction  of  this  holder, 
we  feel  that  the  object  in  view  has  been  fully  attained — the  immense  sale 
attesting  most  forcibly  to  its  great  popularity.  It  is  not  only  the  lightest 
and  most  compact  double  plate  holder  ever  made,  but  it  is  the  most  per- 
fectly light-tight,  while  being  so  readily  filled  and  emptied. 

In  this  Holder  (as  the  thickness  of  plates  vary  so  exceedingly)  we 
have  not  supplied  the  spring  usually  place  » on  the  dividing-board  to  keep 
the  plate  pressed  tightly  to  the  front  of  holder,  on  account  of  the  spa*  e 
the  spring  would  occupy,  even  when  pressed  down,  and  have  allowed  only 
space  sufficient  to  accommodate  the  thickest  plate  likt  ly  to  be  used. 

In  Using  thinner  ones,  slight  bedding  of  soft  paper  may  be  placed  in 
the  holder,  and,  in  pressing  the  plate  down,  it  will  be  found  that  the  pa- 
‘ per,  acting  in  combination  wiih  the  pliable  division-board,  forms  a very 
admirable  spring  or  cushion  for  both  plates. 

These  Holders  are  ranged  to  receive  kits  for  plates  any  size  under 
that  of  the  holder  (leaving,  as  a matter  of  course,  sufficient  difference  in 
the  size  to  make  the  frame  of  kits).  Thus,  with  an  8 x 10  Camera,  ail 
sizes  from  3J4  x 4^^  up  to  8 x 10  can  be  used.  Kits  are  not  included  with 
holders  at  prices  given;  therefor»-,  in  ordering,  please  specify  when  they 
are  desired. 


PRICES. 


SIZE. 

3^x41^ ...$1  00 

4 X 5 1 00 

41^x5^ 1 10 

4i^x6K 1 35 


5x7  $1  30 

5 X 8 1 40 

6^x  8^. 1 70 

8 X 10  2 0(V 


72 


fhp ' s'c  H(/iyzk  VblR  K • 


Schultze’s  Dry  Plate  Kits. 

OUTSIDE  MEASUREMENT.  ANY  OPENING. 


4 X 5 
4^x6^ 

5 X 8 
6Kx8K 

8 X 10 

10  X 12 

11  X 14 
14  X 17 


Kits  or  Inside  Frames  tor  Wet  Plate  Holders, 


To  hold 

Fits  in 
Shield. 

Pat.  Glass 
Corners. 

Rabbeted  for 
Ferrotypes. 

1-9 

Plate 

....  1-4  

$0  50.  . . 

$0  40 

1-6 

ii 

1-2  

60. . . 

50 

1-4 

1 

4 4 

..  ..  1-2  

65. . . 

55 

1-2 

(< 

70... 

65 

1-2 

t i 

4-4  

75... 

70 

4^  x6K 
S X 7 

1 4 

4-4  

75  . . 

70 

44 

4-4  

75. . . 

70 

4K  x6H 

44 

8x10.... 

90... 

75 

5 X 7 

44 

7x10 

90. . . 

75 

5 X 7 

41 

90... 

75 

5 X 8 

%t 

8x10 

90. . . 

75 

xSY 

44 

1 00... 

7 X 10 

4 4 

11 X 14 

1 10. .. 

1 00 

8 X 10 

44 

lOx  12.  ... 

1 10... 

1 10 

8 X 10 

( i 

llx  14.  ... 

1 20. . . 

1 20 

10  X 12 

44 

14x  17 

1 60. .. 

1 50 

11  X 14 

44 

14x  17 

1 60. . . 

14  X 17 

44 

17x  20 

1 80... 

^ , 

17  X 20 

44 

20x  24.... 

2 25. . . 

7I?(?  I^(^etisGope  is  tl7e  b?5t  U/ide  /I99I?  Ceps  ip  1171? 
U/orld,  apd  tl^e  price  is  pot  (jxorbitapt  eitl7er. 


73 


Waterbary  Dry  Plate  Holder 

Manufactured  hj  the  American  Optical  Co. 

THE  FINEST  IN  USE  FOF  STUDIO  UlOUl^. 


(Patent  Applied  For.) 

■^^HE  WATERBURY  HOLDER  may  be  adjusted  to  various  sizes  of 
plates  quicker  and  easier  tlian  any  other  Holder.  No  kits  are  re- 
quired, and  the  plates  used  n ust  he  in  thecenter  ; in  fact, they  can- 
not he  out  of  the  center,  and  may  I e laid  in  the  proper  place  in  the  dark. 

They  require  no  latches  to  secure  the  p ate  firmly  in  place.  The 
mechanism  ii  so  simple  that  it  canm^t  get  out  t-f  order  except  by  destroy- 
ing the  Holder. 

Tiie  adjustments  work  with  entire  freedom,  and  yet  without  vibra- 
tion ors  de  play. 

They  are  so  comple'e  and  pleasant  to  work  with  that  every  dark  room 
operator  must  have  them. 

The  Bonanza  Holder  was  acknowledged  to  be  the  king  of  wet  plate 
holders;  an  I every  candid  man  will  admit  that  the  WATERBURY 
HOLDER  is  the  best  dt  y jdn'e  1 1 older  for  gallery  use. 

All  American  Optical  Company’s  Portrait  Cameras  vn'll  he  fitted  with 
the  WATERBURY  HOLDER,  when  so  ordered,  at  the  regular  catalogue 
prices. 

If  you  want  a new  Holder,  send  us  exact  measurement  of  your  old 
one,  and  sav  what  Box  it  is  loi . 


:ICE  LIST, 


63^  X 8}4 ^8  75 

8 X 10 9 50 

10  X 12 14  40 

11  X 14 13  00 

Add  10  per  cent,  to  a''ov( 


It  X 17  $22  00 

17x20 24  00 

18x22 27  00 

20  X 24 32  00 

list  when  with  curtain  slide. 


f/ew^r  bijy  a secoi^d-l^ard  outfit;  you  are  sure  to 
disappointed. 


Anthony’s  “Benster”  Plate  Holder. 


The  plate  rests  on  pure  silver  wire,  and  there  is  a trough,  with  large 
bottle  beneath,  into  v^hich  all  the  silver  waste  readily  finds  its  way.  As 
the  trough  is  raised,  the  upper  ledge  descends,  so  that  the  center  of  the 
plate  is  at  all  times  in  the  center  of  the  holder,  no  matter  what  size  is 
used.  This  obviates  the  use  of  inside  tits,  ai  d adapts  itself  at  once  to  any 
size  of  plate,  from  the  largest  the  holder  w ill  admit  to  one  not  under 
three  inches  square.  This  is  unquestionably  the  bnst  Gallery  Plate  Hol- 
der made.  By  a recent  improvement,  the  horizontal  bars  may  be  instantly 
fastened  for  plates  of  any  size,  and  there  is  also  an  attachment  for  the 
vertical  adjustment.  For  dry-plate  studio  woik,  it  is  the  holder  par  ex- 
■cellence. 

The  prices  of  Benster  Holders  for  Portrait  Cameras  are  as  follows : 


8 X 10  plate  and  under,  121^  inches  wide,  iSfg  inches  high |10  00 

8x10  “ “ “ rs%  10  00 

10x11  “ “ 15  “ 15^  “ 14  00 

11x14  “ “ 17  “ 11%  “ 18  00 

14x17  “ “ 20%  “ 21  “ 22  00 

17x20  “ “ 2^%  “ 24  “ 23  00 


8 X 10  size  arc  made  with  either  wooden  or  curtain  slide.  Above  8 x 10  with  curtain 

slide  only. 


Anthony’s  Eclipse,  Novelette  and  Fairy 
Double  Dry  Plate  Holders. 


The  Novelette  and  Eclipse  Holders  are  same  dimensions  and  style, 
except  that  the  former  have  pans  in  the  edges  by  which  they  are  held  fast 
to  the  camera  by  hooks,  whereas  the  outfits  No  2 to  8 B,  with  which  the 
Eclipse  Holders  are  used,  have  our  patent  hinged  spring. 


•Outside  Dimensions 
of  Plate  Holder. 

534  X 73^ 

6 x 9 

7K  X 10  

9 X 11^ 

1214  X 1534 


PRICES 

Size  Plate. 

A%x  0% 

.5  X 8 

.634  X 834 

.8  X 10  

11  X 14  


Novelette  or 
Kclipse. 

. .$2  25 

Fairy. 
$3  00 

3 00 

. . 3 50 

5 00 

6 00 

..  8 00 



75 


C^.  • /V£:yv^  yo'rh- 


EISTOII-Iljjltilcji  IIDFRaUED  ROEE-HOEDEIi. 

mODEL;  OF  1887. 


Fr«.  A.  Fig.  B. 

Label  reg-isL  red,  1885.  Patented  May  5,  1885;  other  patent  applied  for. 

This  new  hold  *r  has  the  following  advantages  ov'T  all  previous 
patterns:  A reduction  in  weight,  a reduction  in  size,  a reduction  in 
number  of  parts,  a reduction  in  price. 

The  metal  inside  frame  lias  been  dispensed  with,  and  the  working 
parts  attached  directly  to  the  wood  case,  which  has  been  strengthened  to 
bear  the  strain,  the  result  being  a stronger,  simpler,  and  cheaper  holder, 
less  liable  to  get  out  of  repair. 

Fig.  A shows  the  holder  closed.  Fig.  B shows  the  cover  removed,  ' 
and  the  case  detiched  from  the  shutter-frame. 


Prices  of  Model  of  1887  Roll-Holders. 


SIZE. 

PRICE. 

SIZE. 

PRICK. 

3^4  x4i^ 

8 X 10 

$20  00 

4 X 5 

10  00 

10  X 12 

24  00 

414  x5% 

11  X 14 

30  00 

414  x6^ 

10  00 

14  X 17 

40  00 

4^  x6i^ 

17  X 20 

50  00 

5 X 7 

18  X 22 

60  00 

5 X 8 

12  ro 

20  X 24 

75  00 

61^  x834 

Extra  Reels  for  Model  of  1887  Roll-Holders.  (Fig.  C.) 


SIZE. 

r 

ncs. 

SIZE. 

PRICK. 

For  314 

44.... 

, . . . 50  c 

. nts. 

For  8 

10  .... 

“ 4 

5 

*• 

“ 10 

12 

75  “ 

“ 44 

rd4-... 

....50 

“ 11 

14 

$l  00 

“ 44 

..  .50 

(< 

“ 14 

17 

1 00 

“ 4% 

6V2^.. 

. . .50 

‘ • 

“ 17 

20 

1 25 

“ 5 

7 

“ 

“ 18 

22 

1 50 

“ 5 

8 

..  .50 

“ 20 

24 

2 00 

“ 6>^ 

84.... 

...75 

1 

In  ordering  be  sure 

and  specify  Model  of 

1887. 

All  fitted  with  the  new  Single  Revolution  Audible  Indicator. 


76 


. r/)'^..s'CHuL.TZE.  PHoro^.£Qir('p/-\E/^r  cp.  /y^w  York- 


CAMERA  STANDS  AND  TRIPODS. 

The  Latest  Improved 

GEM  CITY  CAMERA  STAND. 


Handiest,  Strongest,  Most  Complete.  Any  Size  Camera,  from  8 x 10 
to  25  X 30,  Accurately  Counterbalanced. 


Warranted  Satisfactory. 


Above  Cut  represents  Nos.  1 and  2. 


One  of  the  few  Balance  Stands  in  the  market  that  are  a Perfect  Suc- 
cess. 

All  desired  changes  made  with  less  labor  and  in  half  the  time  required 
by  most  stands. 

Three  turns  of  the  (entirely  new  and  superior)  elevating-  crank  will 
raise  or  lower  the  bed  fourteen  inches. 


77 


/V£  wT  ■ YOJR  K-^ 


By  Loosening  the  Handle,  a self-acting  stop,  catching  in  a dial,, 
instantly  holds  the  center  frame  perfectly  rigid  at  any  height  desired  by 
the  operato)’. 

Any  loose  or  rickety  motion  in  the  up-and-down  movement  of  the 
center  frame  is  avoided  by  means  of  improved  friction  rollers  bearing 
reciprocally  against  the  top  and  bottom  of  the  corner  post. 

These  rollers  render  the  raising  and  lowering  of  the  bed  perfectly 
true  and  easy,  and  prevent  all  tendency  to  bind. 

An  improved  arrangement  for  holding  the  plate  holder  has  also  been 
made.  This  can  he  adjushd  to  any  height  at  the  side,  and  keeps  the 
plate  holder  perfectly  safe  while  the  stand  is  being  moved. 

They  are  made  entirely  of  hard  wood,  are  thoroughly  constructed,, 
well  finished,  and  the  best  in  the  market  for  heavy  Cameras. 


This  Cut  represents  No.  ‘J.  Nos.  4 and  5 are  substantially  the  same,  only  larger. 


No.  1,  for  4-4  to  10  X 12  Cameras,  30  inch  bed |22  00 


No.  2, 

“ 11x14 

“ 40  “ “ 

23  00 

No.  3, 

“ 14x17  to  18  X 22 

48  “ “ 

25  00 

No.  4, 

“ 20  X 24 

“ 52  “ “ 

30  00 

No.  5, 

“ 25x30 

“ made  to  order  only 

35  00 

f/ei/er  cOjfT)(^  to  J'/eu;  Yorl^  u/itlpodt  uisitii^^  115;  you  u/ilF 
alu/ays  b(^  vut^leo/ne,  ai^d  lue  u/ill  try  to  mal^e 
it  pl(^a5a9t  for  yod. 


78 


r/) g iT C Hi/L. TZE^  -yPHoro  ' yorT^ 


Especially  designed  for  8 x 10  Cameras  and  smaller.  One  of  the  best 
( 

medium  priced  stands  in  our  list. 


In  polished  ash $15  00 

In  polished  walnut 18  00 


“II/I70  lool^s  i)ot  befor(^,  fiQds  l?i(i)self  U/e 

ea9  /^lu/ays  be  d(^pe9ded  09  for 
9eu;(^st  a9d  be^t  ^oods. 


79 


ThQ  Hi/LxzE.'  "v£Q c/~rp/A£/^ T O o.  ^ i 


THB  MAGIC  CAMBHA  STANDS. 

{Patented  July  29th,  1884,  and  May  5th,  1885.) 

T5e  Mojt  popular  ^tand  ip  the  Marl^et. 


No.  1,  for  8 X 10  and  10  x 12  Cameras $12  00 

They  are  made  of  Ash,  nicely  finished,  and  are  provided  with  the 
wdndlass  and  pulley  system  of  elevation,  which  is  the  Best,  and  with 
automatic  patent  roller  stops.  These  stops  bind  rigidly  the  frame  sup- 
porting the  platform  at  any  height  desired,  and  do  away  with  all  set 
screws.  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4 are  also  provided  with  automatic  coil  springs 
which  bear  the  greater  part  of  the  weight  of  the  cameras,  so  that  the 
elevation  of  the  cameras  is  accomplished  with  the  greatest  ease  without 
using  heavy  weights.  They  are  Lighter,  Stronger,  More  Easily  and 
Rapidly  Operated  tlian  any  other,  and  are  supplied  with  the  Latest  and 
Best  Tilting  Attachments  and  Castors  Made.  In  fact  they  are  the  Best 
and  the  Cheapest  good  stand  made. 


80 


No.  3,  for  14  X 17  Camera $20  00 

No.  4,  for  18  X 22  or  20  x 24  Camera 25  00 


No.  3,  for  14  X 17  Camera $20  00 

No.  4,  for  18  X 22  or  20  x 24  Camera 25  00 


New  Principle,  New  Shape,  Lightest  and  Strongest,  Most 
Durable,  Finelv  Finished,  Easy  Working,  No  Noise, 

No  Iron  Weights,  No  Pet  Screws,  No  Weak 
Parts,  Perf,ectly  Steady,  Always  - 
Reliable,  Readily  Adjusted. 

91 


THE  “ELI^TE”  STUDIO  STAQD. 


(Patent  applied  for.) 

These  are  the  only  Stands  suited  in  workmanship  and  finish,  also  in 
size,  to  the  large  American  Optical  Co.’s  Cameras,  with  their  great  length 
of  bellows  and  extension  platform.  Practical  portraitists  cannot  fail  to 
admire  the  ease  with  which  these  stands  can  be  adjusted  at  any  desirable 
height  or  inclination,  and  the  noiseless  manner  in  which  they  may  be 
moved  from  place  to  place,  their  elegant  appearance  and  accurate  con- 
struction. 

Instead  of  the  clumsy  levers  and  racks,  by  which  accurate  adjust- 
ment of  the  platform  was  obtained  in  the  older  stands;  the  proper  eleva- 
tion and  inclination  are  produced  in  the  “Elite”  stand  by  cog-wheel  and 
snake  screw,  and  the  manipulation  at  one  side  by  a wheel  with  handle, 
and  within  reach  of  the  operator,  so  that  he  may  adjust  the  height  or 
inclination  of  this  camera  without  taking  his  head  from  under  the  focus- 
ing cloth.  By  means  of  the  wheel  work^ed  at  the  rear  end  of  the  plat- 
form, the  horizontal  position  of  the  platform  may  be  inclined  upward  or 
downward  to  a limit  of  15  degrees.  A great  advantage  from  this  move- 
ment, we  observe,  is  that  a true  horizontal  position — so  difficult  to  obtain 
in  the  old  camera  stands — is,  with  these,  an  easy  matter  to  effect.  This; 
is  especially  important  to  those  who  may  use  them  for  reproduction 
work.  In  the  No.  2 size  the  platform  is  fifty-two  inches  long  and  twenty- 
five  inches  wide,  and  its  length  may  be  increased  to  seventy  inches  by  an 
attachment  which  slides  out  forward,  making  it  quite  long  enough  for  sup- 
porting a large  copying  camera.  Then  a semi-circular  cut-out,  to  the  rear 
end  of  the  platform,  is  a convenience  to  the  operator,  who  is  thus  enabled 
not  only  to  stand  closely  up  to  the  ground-glass,  no  matter  how  far  the 
camera  may  have  been  pushed  forward,  b^ut  bending  of  the  body  is 
obviated,  which  is  quite  a necessity  with  all  the  older  stands. 

“ELITE”  STUDIO  STANDS. 

No.  1 Size.  No.  2 Size. 


Price,  with  Rack  for  Plate  Holder $30  00  $36  00 

Highest  point  from  platform  to  fioor 48  48 

Lowest  “ “ “ “ 32  32 

Width  of  platform 22  26 

Length  of  platform  without  attachment. ...  45  52 

“ “ with  “ 70 


82 


YORK- 


Perfect  Camera  Stand. 


No.  5.  The  “Perfect”  Camera  Stand  has  been  manufactured  for 
several  years,  and  is,  as  it  has  been  justly  called,  a “Perfect”  Camera 
Stand,  made  of  finely  polished  black  walnut  and  best  of  metal  castings. 


Price 


$16  00 


[ever  ndjustment  gallery  gland. 

Manufactured  by  the  A.  O.  Co. 

Made  with  brass  mountings  and  patent 
lever  adjustment. 

A stand  suitable  for  large  cameras,  be- 
ing portable,  easily  adjusted  and  of  great 
solidity. 

No.  5.  For  all  sizes  to  8 x 10  inclu- 
sive   $15  00 

“ 6.  For  all  sizes  to  8 x 10  inclu- 
sive, double  lever 16  00 

“ 7.  Combining  in  one  a stand 
for  all  sizes  from  8 x 10 
to  11  X 14 19  00 

CHICAGO  LEVER  STAND. 

Same  style  as  above,  not  so  finely  finished,  we  can  furnish  8 x 10  size 
for  $10  00. 


33 


A/'£:wr.  rbjRK.— 


Heme  Camera  Stan6, 


No.  1.  1-2  and  4-4 $^5  00 

No.  2.  8x10  and  10x12 "2  00 


Exeelsioir 
Cameira  Stand. 


K to  8 X 10 $3  50 


English 

Folding  Tmpod. 


84 


t 


Tlie  New  mi  Iipfed  Bowilsli  Guera  Staal 


The  principles  on  which  the  new  and  improved  Bowdish  Camera 
Stand  is  constructed  are  the  same  as  in  the  older  style,  but  instead  of  a 
weighted  central  pocket  there  are  a number  of  slotted  weights  that  can 
be  instantly  removed  or  replaced,  according  to  the  size  of  the  camera  to 
be  supported.  The  chains  are  also  exchanged  for  strong  sash  cords. 

No.  1.  For  8 X 10  camera $15  00 


“ 2.  “ 11  X 14 


20  00 


The  Knickerbocker  Stand. 


Each  stand  is  packed  in  a separate  box.  The  tops  are  attached  to  the 
upright  with  screws,  jn  metallic  ears,  and  the  legs  are  firmly  fastened 
with  screws  to  the  center  piece,  and  are  removed  when  packed.  The  tops 
of  Nos.  2 and  3 are  elevated  by  means  of  a snake  screw  operating  on  a cog 
wheel,  and  this  in  turn  on  the  metallic  rack  of  the  standard  or  upright. 
This  peculiar  arrangement  greatly  diminishes  the  friction,  and  therefore 
very  little  power  suffices  in  elevating  or  lowering  the  camera.  The  tops 
of  Nos.  0 and  1 are  inclined  by  means  of  a cam  operated  by  a snake  screw. 


No.  0,  for  4-4  camera. 
((  <<  <<  << 


No.  2,  for  8 X 10  camera. . . $9  00 
“ 3,  “ “ “ ...  10  50 


$5  00 
6 25 


85 


rf}p_^£^OLTZE  PHoro'' EOLf]pA,^jvr  oct.  ne^  York* 


E^xtension  "^Pipod. 


This  Tripod  possesses  special  advantages.  It  can  be  set  up,  ready  for 
use,  quicker  than  any  other,  and  with  less  trouble.  When  this  Tripod  is 
placed  on  uneven  ground,  the  Camera  it  supports  may  be  brought  to  the 
proper  level  by  simply  adjusting  the  length  of  the  Tripod  legs.  Another 
commendable  feature  of  this  Extension  Tripod  is  that  it  has  no  detach- 
able parts  to  be  r.iispinced  or  lost.  , 


No.  1.  Tor  1-4  and  4x5  cameras $*00 

“2.  ‘5  X 8 and  6J4  x 83^  cameras  3 50 

“ 3.  “8  X 10  cameras 5 00 


Albion  Tpipod. 

While  folding  compactly,  the  Albion  Tripod  is  readily  extended  and 
firm  enough  to  sqpport,  without  vibration,  a 10  x 12  view  camera.  The 
binding  straps  are  attached  to  one  of  the  legs,  so  that  they  are  always 
there  when  wanted. 

Price $(»  00 


86 


Kc o.  /v£:vv^;nyork- 


JSlair's  Combination  Cripob. 


This  tripod  combines  the  rigidity  of  the  folding  with  the  convenience 
of  the  sliding  Tripod. 


Size  No.  1,  intended  for  63^  x Camera $4  50 

“ 2,  “ “8  X 10  and  11  X 14  Camera. . . 6 00 

“ 3,  “ “ larger  Cameras . V. 7 50 


Hercules  Tpipod. 

.A  large  tripod  with ,un jointed  legs,  and  12  incli  top,  sufficiently  strong 
for  the  heaviest  cameras. 

Price,  . . . . ' $600 


87 


ANTHONY’S  PATENT  TRIPLEX  TRIPOD. 


This  is  perfectly  rigid,  combining  both  the 
folding  and  telescopic,  besides  which  it  occu- 
pies little  space,  and  for  transportation  can  be 
packed  with  clothing  in  a large  grip-sack.  It  is 
made  of  cherry  throughout,  and  has  the  patent 
springs  on  under  side  of  top  by  which  it  is 
impossible  for  the  legs  to  become  unfastened 
accidentally.  When  the  leg  is  fully  extended, 
it  is  held  automatically  by  a spring,  saving 
necessity  of  using  thumb-screw  for  clamping 
same. 

Price $4  00 


THE  DAISY  TRIPOD. 


An  inspection  of  one  of  these  Tripods  will  convince  the  most  skeptical 
that  it  has  no  superior  for  ease  of  adjustment,  lightness  and  compact- 
ness. Finest  yet  introduced.  If  you  are  going  to  travel,  get  one  and  be 


ength,  when  folded,  163^  inches;  weight,  2 pounds. 


Price, 


$5  00 


88 


Th 9 s'c H(JArzX  Eo u-[pyi\E/^r  c 6r^f^  YORK* 


THE  UOW  PORTRIIIT  SHUTTER. 


This  Shutter  is  simple  in  its  con- 
struction, makes  a lon^  or  short 
exposure,  the  bulb  being*  so  ar- 
ranged that  the  Shutter  can  be  left 
open  while  focusing,  for  any  length 
of  time. 

It  is  designed  to  be  attached  to 
front  board  of  camera,  back  of 
lens,  and  every  Shutter  is  war- 
ranted perfect. 

It  is  arranged  to  open  from  the  - 
top,  so  as  to  light  the  foreground  Patent  no.  398,980.  Oa  edMar.  S.  1889.  • 
and  drapery  most.  The  wings  are  of  hard  rubber;  it  works 
very  easily  and  is  built  b^^  the  best  workmen  1:1  the  neatest 
and  best  style. 


Price, 

^$4.  00 


No. 

1. 

14  inch 

. opening, 

07 

6k 

2. 

If 

4 t 

66 

3. 

2 

ti 

4f 

4. 

2i  “ 

6 

66 

5. 

3|  “ 

66 

6. 

3i  “ 

^3 

66 

7. 

4 

n 

9 

THE  liOW  SHUTTER. 


COMBINED  INSTANTAXI^OU'J  AND  TIME. 


The  most  simply  constructed  and  easily 
operated  of  an^^  in  use.  Easily  adjusted  ; 
no  jarring  the  camera  or  f. inning  d st, 
and  for  durability  it  challenges  compari- 
son. 

It  is  operated  by  a ru'  ber  bulb  and 
tube,  and  is  made  to  fit  all  sizes  of  tubes 
up  to  inches  in  diaiiieter;  is  nicely 
finished  in  cherry  and  japan. 

It  balances  open  and  is  easily  focused 
by  removing  pin  in  e..d  cf  bulb. 

By  moving  the  small  lev  r to  one  side,  it  is  instantly 
changed  from  time  to  instantaneo  s. 

The  most  flattering  proof  of  its  superiority  is  the  daily 
increasing  demand  and  the  universal  approval  of  photo- 
graphers who  have  used  it. 

No.  1.  inch  opening, Price,  $6.00 

“ 2.  1%  “ “ ‘ 6.00 

“ 3.  2 “ “ ‘ 6.00 


Patent  No.  393,930.  Dated 
Mar.  9,  l:ia9. 


4.  2K 


6.00 


89 


r/>g  N&w  YORK- 


THE  hUW  COMPOUND  SHUnER. 


Patent  No.  39d,98^.  Dated  Mar.  5,  1889. 


^T/HIS  Shutter  is  desig-ned  for  cameras  having-  small  front 
boards,  and  is  adapted  to  g-allery  and  outdoor  work. 

It  is  placed  inside. of  camera,  and  the  hack  of  it  is  covered 
with  fine,  soft  felt,  which  comes  between  the  shutter  and 
front  board,  thus  preventing  any  sound  when  operating. 


It  is  arranged  to  open  from  the  top,  so  as  to  light  up  the 
foreground  and  drapery  most. 

It  is  operated  by  a rubber  bulb  and  tube,  as  shown  in 
the  engraving,  makes  a long  or  short  exposure,  the  bulb 
being  so  arranged  that  the  Shutter  can  be  left  open  while" 
focusing,  for  any  length  of  time. 


The  opening  in  center  is  larger,  and  the  outside  measure- 
ment is  smaller,  than  in  any  Shutter  bn  the  market. 
Competent  judges  have  pronounced  this  Shutter 'unexcelled 
by  any  other. 


inch 

1^4  “ 

2 “ 

opening,  3 inches 
“ 3^  “ 

“ 4 > “ 

square 

a 

outside. . 

. .$4.00 
..  4.00 

ii 

..  4.50 

2^  “ 

3 

dyi  “ 

4 

5 “ 

“ • 4^,.  “ 

“ 5^  “ 

“ 6M  “ 

“ 734  “ 

“ b4  “ 

« 9 

ii 

a 

..  4.50 

ii 

a 

a 

6( 

it 

..  5.00 
5.50 
. 6.00 
..  6.50 

a 

..  7.00 

s‘c1<uL,rz£  PHoro  ^ eq U( co..  .7V£W;.york 


cnius  PROSGH’S  HEIM  SHUIIERS. 

PROSCH  RAPID,  DUPLEX  STEREOSCOPIC,  DUPLEX  DETECTITE, 
DUPLEX  TRIPLE  IMPROYED. 


The  Prosch  Rapid  is  capable  of  making  exposures  so  rapid  as  to  test 
to  the  utmost  the  skill  of  the  mos^  expert  operators  to  develop.  It  is  only 
for  instantaneous  work,  such  as 
taking  horses  at  most  rapid  gait ; 
athletes  running,  jumping;  di- 
vers, etc., etc.  Although  operating 
between  the  lenses  it  is  entirely 
different  from  the  Duplex.  Made 
in  two  sizes ; No.  1,  1-inch  open- 
ing, price,  $18.00;  No.  2,  134-inch, 

$22.00. 

The  Duplex  Stereoscopic  fills  per- 
fectly the  want  of  a time  and  in- 
stantaneous shutter  for  Stereo- 
scopic work.  It  consists  of  two 
Duplex  Shutters  on  one  frame,  op- 
erated by  one  lever  and  one  release, 
and  consequently  gives  two  ident- 
ical exposures.  Made  in  two  sizes; 

No.  1,  ^-inch  opening,  $18.00;  No. 

2,  ^-inch  opening,  $19.50.  Lenses  are  arranged  at  334  inches  from  cen- 
ters; but  this  will  be  increased,  if  ordered,  up  to  3^  inches  for  $1.00  ad- 
ditional. Rotary  Stops,  $2.00;  Flange  Collars,  when  required,  75  cents. 
Silent  time  attachment,  $1.50;  combined  with  slow  instantaneous,  $2.00. 

The  Duplex  Detective  is  a reliable,  compact  and  efficient ‘Shutter  for 
Detective  Cameras,  which  can  be  used  for  both  time  and  instantaneous 
work.  Release  for  instantaneous  is  by  push  trip  (pneumatic  if  desired). 
Time  exposure  mechanism  is  same  as  silent  self-setting  time  to  regular 
Duplex  Shutters,  by  which  instantaneous  exposures  can  also' be  made  by 
pressure  to  pneumatic  bulb.  Price,  including  fitting  to  Caniera  and 
Rotary  Stops,  $15.00. 

THE  EVER  POPULAR  DUPLEX  SHUTTER  still  retains  its  lead  of 
all  others,  whether  of  home  or  foreign  production.  The  Rotary  Stop  is 
considered  by  an  army  of  users  an  indispensable  adjunct  to  the  shutter, 
likewise  the  silent,  self-acting  time,  and  slow  instantaneous  attachment, 
which  operates  shutter  by  direct  pressure  of  air  through  pneumatic  device. 


Numbers 

DUPLEX  ENLARGED  REVISED  LIST. 

00  0 OA  1 lA 

2 

2A 

Openings,  inch.. 

6 

S 

7 

1 

H 

1 2 

If 

If 

Price 

$11.50 

$12’ 

$12.50 

$13 

$13.50 

$14 

$14.50 

Numbers '. . 

3 

3A 

4 

5 

6 

7 

Openings,  inch.. 

-*^8 

2 

91 

3 

H 

Price 

$16 

$19* 

$20* 

$22* 

$24* 

$27* 

* Including  silent  time  attachment. 


Rotary  Stops  up  to  No.  1,  $1.50:  above  that  $2.00.  We  do  not  make 
Rotary  Stops  for  sizes  larger  than  No.  2A,  exc  ept  by  special  agreement. 
Silent  time  attachment  same  prices  as  Rotary  Stops. 

When  Flange  Collars  are  required,as  on  Ross  and  other  lenses  similarly 
mounted,  50  cents  extra.  Shutters  ^ an  be  furnished  for  most  standard 
lenses,  fitted  ready  for  tise,  but  it  is  to  customer’s  interest  to  forward  his 
lens  tube  with  order,  otherwise  perfect  fit  is  not  guaranteed.  These 
shutters  are  owned  and  manufactured  solely  by  the  Prosch  Manufacturing 
Co.  None  genuine  without  their  stamp. 


91 


VERY  LATEST  AND  VERY  BEST. 

The  “Triplex”  Shutter. 


The  Triplex  Shutter  is  so  named  because  it  has  triple  movements. 
"Will  make  exposures  in  three  ways,  viz,;  Quick  instantaneous  up  to 
of  second ; Slow  instantaneous  from  J to  of  second,  and  rapidity  regu- 
lated at  very  instant  of  making  exposure;  and  Time,  which  is  silent  and 

The  exposing  mechanism  is  the 
same  in  the  Triplex  as  in  the 
Duplex  (the  shutter  which  has  for 
three  years  stood  in  popular  favor 
head  and  shoulders  above  all 
competitors),  viz.:  Two  slides  or 
leaves  oppositely  pivoted  which, 
swing  past  each  other,  stopped 
half  way  for  time  exposures ; but 
a complete  continuous  movement 
for  instantaneous.  By  this  me- 
thod there  is  no  vibration  created, 
and  great  speed  is  obtained,  from 
two  to  four  times  quicker  than  is 
possible  with  shutters  whose  slides  or  leaves  recede  from  center  to  open, 
and  return  to  close. 

The  locking  and  releasing  for  instantaneous  and  method  of  making 
time  exposures  differs  from  the  Duplex.  Ail  the  movements  are  more 
automatic,  and  the  mechanism  is  more  conveniently  arranged,  being  on 
front  of  shutter. 

SIZES  AND  PRICES. 


Numbers 

00 

0 

OA  1 

lA 

2 

Openings,  in 

6 

j 

g 

1 n 

1 2 

Prices 

..  $11.50 

$12.00 

$12.50  $13.00 

$ll50 

$14.00 

Numbers 

3 

3A 

4 

5 

Openings,  in. . , . 

1 6 

2 

n 

Prices 

$16.00 

$18.00 

$20.00 

$22.00 

Ro  ary  Stops  up  to  No.  1,  $1.50;  above  that,  $2.00,  We  do  not  make 
Rotary  Stops  for  sizes  larger  than  No.  2A. 

When  flange  collars  are  required,  as  on  Ross  and  other  lenses  similarly 
mounted,  50  cents  extra.  Shutters  can  be  furnished  for  most  standard 
lenses,  fitted  ready  for  use  ; Imt  it  is  to  customer's  interest  to  forward  his 
lens  tube  with  order,  otherwise  })erfect  fi"  is  not  guaranteed. 

This  Triplex  shutter  is  also  made  for  Stereoscopic  work,  also  for  use 
in  Detective  boxes. 


f SIZE,  NO.  00  SHUTi  ER.  weigrhs  4 ounces. 


U/e  ea9  supply  yotj  luitl?  a9y  mal^e  of  sl^dtter  at 
lou/est  priei^s. 


92 


Schultze’s  Plain  Safety  Shutters. 


A convenient,  handy  and  simple  drop  shutter ; always  ready  for  use. 


and  reliable. 

No.  1,  width  inches $1  20 

No.  2,  “ 31^  “ 1 40 

No.  3,  “ 3K  “ 1 60 


Pneumatic  Release,  $1.50  extra. 


Schultze’s  Stereoscopic  Shutter. 


For  time  exposure  only,  but  can  be  made  very  rapid. 

Price $3  00 

Pneumatic  Release,  $1.50  extra. 


Geo.  F.  Green’s  Bon  Ton  Shutter. 


It  works  with  accuracy  and  precision,  exposing  the  four  Lenses  by 
one  movement. 

It  is  fastened  on  front  of  the  Camera  box. 

It  balances  either  open  or  closed,  P 

It  is  operated  with  a bulb  or  small  mouthpiece. 

PricGj  - ■ ■ - - $G>OOa 


93 


, NEW  YORK*’ 


Green’s  Stereoscopic  Shutters. 


(Manufactured  under  Patent  of  May  35th,  1886.) 


The  new  Stereoscopic  Shutter,  now  ready  for  the  market,  is  made  to 
meet  the  demand  for  an  Instantaneous  as  well  as  a Time  Shutter. 

For  a sha^'p  exposure,  to  ^ of  a second  slide  the  pin.  The  pins  let 
off  movements  are  all  on  the  front  side  of  front  board  horizontal.  The 
Spring  A is  to  hold  the  Shutter  closed.  Lifting  the  Spring  A will  release 
the  Shutter  Wings.  The  Shutter  is  designed  to  screw  or  fasten  on  the 
inside  of  front  board,  as  close  to  the  tubes  as  possible.  A temporary 
front  board  is  furnished  to  show  how  to  attach  the  Shutter  to  the  front 
board  of  Camera  box.  The  Shutter  is  built  for  the  tubes  regular  distances 
apart  from  centers,  3|  in.  and  3 in. 

For  some  exposures,  the  button  B should  remain  as  seen  in  the  en- 
graving. The  Shutter  is  worked  either  with  a small  mouthpiece  or  bulb. 
The  mouthpiece  is  the  most  convenient. 

Price, $6.00. 


Posing  Chkirs. 


SCHLLTZE’S  POSITION  CHAIR. 


No.  Price. 

144.  6 inch,  terry $7  50 

145.  6 “ upholstered 12  00 

146.  6 “ spring  seat 12  50 

147.  8 “ “ 15  00 

148.  10  “ “ 16  50 

149.  8 “ plush  17  50 

150.  10  “ “ 19  00 


These  chairs  are  substantially  made, 
and  give  general  satisfaction.  They 
will  be  found  to  compare  favorably 
with  any,  either  as  to  price  or  qual- 
ity. 


94 


^ ThQ  JfCHULXZe'f  PHO'to- EOir[P/\lJ^T  CO.  nE^  YORK*' 


THE  BABY  CHAIET 

We  now  make  an  extra  cushion  for 
the  Child’s  Chair.  This,  placed  in  a 
semi-circle  under  the  knees,  insures  the 
favorite  'pose  of  babyhood. 


Velveteen,  price $18  00. 

Plush,  “ 22  00. 


The  Centennial  Chair. 

Greatly  facilitates  the  business  of  posing. 

Drab  velveteen,  6-inch  fringe 


$25  00 


ThQ  S'CHULXZE.  PH^ro- ECL{f[PZ\Wr  CO.  nE^  YORK* 


GEM  POSER, 

This  chair  has  a walnut  frame, 
upholstered  in  green  terry  or  im- 
itation raw  silk,  with  five-inch  ball 
fringe  in  seat  and  back.  Cheapest 
posing  chair  made. 

Price $7  50. 


THeBowDisH  Chkir 


The  unprecedented  demand  and  in- 
quiry for  these,  the  most  popular  chairs 
ever  introduced  either  in  Europe  or 
America  for  photographic  use,  and  the 
uniform  satisfaction  they  have  given, 
are  significant  indications  that  they 
have  been  generally  adopted  as  the  po- 
sition chairs  of  the  day. 


Ebonite  papier  /T\a(:l7G  ar(^  — 

mill  pot  cl?ip,  c;rael^,  marp,  rust  or  breal^. 


96 


^ 'y^ YORK- 


The  Booidish  Chair,  leith  jtevoluing  Circular  Brm. 


These  chairs  are  so  pre-eminently  su- 
perior in  all  desirable  qualities,  that  it 
is  only  necessary  that  their  perfection 
of  manufacture  and  ingenious  plan  of 
construction  be  seen  to  be  commended 
by  every  one.  Made  of  solid  walnut, 
secured  by  means  of  a patented  iron 
frame,  they  unite  unusual  strength  with 
graceful  outline  and  richness  of  effect. 
The  quality  of  materials  used,  also,  has 
always  been  of  the  best ; and  the  con- 
stant aim  is  to  make  them  excel  in  each 
and  every  particular.  They  have  no  un- 
certain joints,  no  clumsy  and  unsightly 
proportions,  no  “fixings”  to  become  de- 
tached or  render  the  chair  useless  when 
broken.  They  are  better  adapted  to  the 
varied  requirements  of  a modern  photo- 
graphic gallery — better  suited  to  the  pre- 
vailing styles  of  portraiture,  and  more 
in  consonance  with  modern  studio  ac- 
cessories. 


The  Boodisli  Cl>air>  Sofa  Ittachment. 

In  short,  the  Bowdish  Chair  com- 
bines the  advantages  and  uses  of  all 
the  various  chairs  in  market,  com- 
prising : 

1st.  A chair  with  high  back,  with 
or  without  arms. 

2d.  A chair  with  a revolving  circu- 
lar arm.  This  is  an  advantage  over 
the  ordinary  chair  with  circular  arm, 
which  has  only  the  vertical  move- 
ment. 

3d.  A lounge  attachment,  which  is 
invaluable  for  infants  and  children. 

No.  1,  drab  velvet $30  00.  With  sofa $37  50 

No.  5,  drab  plush* 45  00.  “ 53  00 

Centennial,  with  sofa,  drab  plush* 57  50 

*After  our  present  stock  of  drab  plush  is  exhausted,  we  shall  use  raw 
silk  coverings  for  the  No.  5 and  Centennial  models. 


piu/ays  bi^ar  \i).  tl^at  i/uptire  el7(^micals  ?iue  bad 

results.  ll/(^  ^uaraptee  tl^e  purity  of  all  we  s(^II. 


97 


i 


r/)^  s'c Hi/LTZEi  pro  - eq cr/ p/^f/v r co.  /v£:w/  yor'k-’ 


WHITE’S  * Posing  * Cham. 


This  Posing  Chair  is  without  exception  the  mosi perfect  ^\ece  of  mech- 
anism of  its  kind  to  be  found.  It  is  fitted  in  the  most  ingenious  man- 
ner with  the  Ball  and  Socket  Joint,  which  is  applied  in  such  a variety  of 
ways  as  to  make  an  almost  endless  variety  of  positions  possible. 

The  Adjustable  Extension  Movement  in  Ball  and  Socket  Joints  af- 
fortls  a mechanism  whereby  motion  in  all  directions  is  controlled  by  a sin- 
gle lever,  or  one  point  of  fastening.  When  this  fastening  is  released,  the 


98 


ball-sections  open  around  the  slide-rod,  which  is  then  as  free  to  be  moved 
to  any  place  through  its  entire  range  as  the  human  hand,  while  a touch 
of  the  lever  in  the  opposite  direction  instantly  causes  the  equal  closure  of 
the  space  around  the  slide-rod  without  varying  the  adjustment  in  the 
slightest  degree,  and  there  securely  holds  it  in  the  desired  position. 

Reference  to  the  cut  will  show  a few  of  the  many  changes  which  can 
be  made  in  this  chair  by  simply  loosening  the  set  screw  clamp.  It  may 
be  used  with  any  or  all  the  various  parts,  and  is  offered  to  the  trade  as  the 
only  perfect  posing  chair  in  the  market.  Prices,  boxed : 


Posing  Chair,  complete $42  00 

If  without  head  rest 34  00 

If  without  head  rest  and  arms 26  00 


and  Baby  Holder, . , .18  00 


■THE  NEW  PATENT  NOVEL  CHAIR. 


The  latest  chair  made.  Con- 
tains all  the  latest  improve- 
ments. Supplies  the  long  felt 
want  of  the  photographer  for 
a chair  that  can  be  easily  ad- 
justed and  readily  adapted  to 
any  subject,  whether  young  or 
old,  giving  a firm  support,  and 
securing  ease  of  position.  The 
back  can  be  used  for  an  arm 
rest  in  full-length  portraits,  as 
it  can  be  raised  or  lowered  at 
will,  and  fastened  in  any  posi- 
tion. It  needs  only  to  be  seen 
to  be  appreciated  as  the  only 
chair  combining  these  quali- 
ties. 


No.  1.  Terry,  without  fringe $10  00 

No.  2.  Raw  silk,  with  fringe 12  00 

No.  3.  Velveteen,  without  fringe 15  00 

‘No.  4.  Mohair  plush,  with  fringe  (see  cut) 18  00 


9S 


Baldwins  Baby  Holder. 

Not  a Baby  Chair ^ hut  a Baby  Holder,  that  can  be  placed  in  any  chair,  on 

a table,  etc.,  etc. 


Without  arms,  in  plaiu  or  figured  terry  cover,  japanned  trimmings, 

each $8  50 

’Withoutarms,  in  drab  velveteen  cover,  nickel-plated  trimmings,  each  10  00 
i^rms,  with  attachments,  either  style,  each. 1 00 


The  holder  is  arranged  with  flat  base — no  legs.  A tilting  arrange- 
rnent,  under  the  seat,  allows  the  adjustment  of  the  seat  to  any  angle  de- 
sired. In  the  slot  in  the  back  is  a sprinc:  clamp,  in  which  the  operator 
may  force  a portion  of  the  child’s  dre-s  or  clothing,  thereby  holding  the 
baby  firmly  in  position  without  further  assistance.  Arms  can  be  adjusted 
to  either  or  both  sides  by  an  adjustable  clamp. 


100 


This  cut  represents  the  Plush  or  Velveteen  Cover  and  Large  Adjustable  Arm  for 

general  posing. 


This  cut  represents  the  “ Raw  Silk  ” Cover  and  Adjustable  Back  Rest.- ' ^ 

Tl;ii8  is  one  of  the  latest,  and  a very  usefni  chair,  for  the  operating 
rooiSa,  as  it  comprises  in  one  piece  of  furniture  a very  desirable  chair  for 


r/)p  S'CHUL^TZE:  PHOro- EQLf)iP^Et^T  Co.  /V£W/  YORK- 


posing  for  bust  pictures,  together  with  an  ornamental  arm  rest,  or  back^  li 
of  a new  and  tasteful  design,  for  figure  posing  of  subjects  of  any  size  or  || 
age.  The  back  rest  can  be  moved  instantly,  up  or  down,  forward  or  back- 1 
ward,  or  given  any  desired  angle,  at  will.  The  seat  revolves  on  an  elevat- 
ing screw,  enabling  the  positionist  to  get  any  desired  height  of  seat,  as 
well  as  to  turn  his  subjects  at  will.  The  semi-circular  back  is  new  and 
rich  in  design,  and  the  whole  constitutes  just  what  is  essential  in  every 


well-regulated  operating  room.  : 

In  imitation  raw  silk,  complete,  each $12  50 

In  drab  velveteen,  complete,  each 14  50  j 

In  mohair  plush,  plain  or  embossed,  complete,  each 16  50  , 


If  wanted  for  bust  posing  only,  we  will  deduct  for  the  large  semi-cir-  ; 
cular  arm  : Raw  silk,  $2  50  ; velveteen,  $3  00 ; plush,  $3  50.  | 


CHILDREH’5  SOFAS  AND  MDHGES. 


Sofas,  36  inches,  reps 
“ 36  “ velveteen 

“ 36  “ plush 

Lounges,  30  inches,  reps 

“ 30  “ velveteen 

“ 30  “ plush...., 


We  have  revised  our  list  of 
these,  and  greatly  improved  the 
design  and  construction.  The  sofas 
are  now  made  of  a uniform  size 
(total  length  of  seat,  36  inches),  ! 
and  are  similar  in  everything  to  ■ 
the  lounges,  excepting  that  they  : 
are  six  inches  longer  and  are  alike  j 
at  both  ends,  thus  being  servicea-  J 
ble  for  groups  as  well  as  for  single  | 
portraits  of  children  at  either  end.  | 


$15  00  ■ 

17  50  ; 
25  00 
11  00 
13  50  t 

18  00  I 


I 


\ie\j(^r  bijy  a el^i^ap  ?rad^  of  card  stoel^; 
’ all  ybar  fii?^  u;orI(.  fiirpisb  oijly 


it  may  spoil  I 
tl;<^  i 


102 


ThQ  S-CHULTZE  PHOTO- EQiriPZ\E/^T  CO.  /W£v/  YORK- 


The  Endean  Posing  Chaip. 


The  “ Endean”  Patent  Posing  Chair  claims  the  attention  of  progress- 
ive  photographers  as  the  most  useful  and  necessary  invention  of  recent 
years. 

Its  main  feature  is  the  combination  of  platform,  head  rest  and  chair, 
which  enables  the  operator  to  handle  his  subject  at  will  with  the  greatest 
of  ease  without  having  the  trouble  and  annoyance  of  asking  the  subject 
to  move  after  once  being  seated. 

It  is  mounted  upon  a firm  and  substantial  platform  three  feet  in  di- 
ameter, which  runs  upon  two-wheeled  casters  and  can  be  easily  moved 
from  one  part  of  the  studio  to  another.  The  seat  is  fixed  on  a spindle 
which  fits  into  a hollow  pedestal,  so  arranged  that  when  the  subject  is 
seated,  the  weight  releases  a brake  below  the  platform  which  holds  it  in  a 
given  position  and  prevents  the  possibility  of  its  slipping  while  stepping 
on  or  off. 

The  seat  revolves  easily,  thus  enabling  the  operator  to  place  his  sub- 
ject in  any  desired  position.  Attached  to  the  chair  is  a back  support 
which  can  be  adjusted  to  any  position  or  taken  down  entirely  when  back 
views  are  required . 


On  the  right  of  the  seat  is  an  adjustable  arm  rest  to  be  used  in  sitting 
three-quarter  figures,  or  as  a seat  for  a child  when  taken  with  its  mother. 
It  is  also  used  for  sitting  the  child  alone,  in  connection  with  an  entirely 
new  baby  attachment.  The  head  rest  is  so  arranged  that  it  moves  in  a 
semi-circle  on  the  edge  of  the  platform  and  can  be  fastened  at  any  point. 

The  nickel  finish  given  to  ihe  metal  parts,  the  neat  and  tasty  uphol- 
stering, and  general  appearance,  call  forth  many  expressions  of  admiration. 

The  inventor  of  this  much  needed  combination  of  appliances  has  had 
many  years’  experience  as  a practical  photographer,  and  has  carefully 
considered  all  that  was  required  to  perfect  the  arrangements.  He  has 
spared  neither  time,  study  nor  money  to  accomplish  the  present  results. 
He  now  places  it  on  the  market  knowing  that  it  is  perfect  in  every  respect. 


PRICES. 


Complete,  except  baby  attachment .$50  00 

With  baby  attachment 65  00 

Baby  attachment  alone. : 7 00 


E\je  S.  C.  S.  are  tl^e  OQly.  Finally  §ood  lou; , priced 
09  tl^e  ff\ar\[et  5ry  ‘ 


/ 


104 


Sliding-Baek  Position  Chains 


DRAB  VELVETEEN. 


No.  1.  Upright  movement  only,  5-inch  fancy  fringe,  with  arms. . . .$20  00 
No.  2.  Improved,  with  back  reclining,  as  per  cut,  5-inch  fancy 

fringe,  with  arms 22  50 


The  Centennial 
{^est. 


Parts  of  Success  Head  Rest. 

Base 

$1  00 

Short  Pillar 

1 50 

Tall  Pillar 

1 75 

Rod 

...60  and  70 

Ear  Piece 

1 20 

Cross  Head. . . . 

40 

Sueeess 
Head  tiest, 


Plain  and  neat,  with  no 
chance  for  dust. 

The  prices  are  : 

CENTENNIAL. 

Large $2  50 

Small 2 25 

SUCCESS,  Extra  Finish. 

Large $3  25 

Small 3 00 

With  Back  Support,  T5  cents 
extra. 


106 


fliite’s  Head  Screen  and  Side  Sbade. 


STYLE  No.  1. 


No.  1.  Perfection  Head  Screen  and  Square  Side  Shade. 


The  Base  Standard  has  the  Double  or  Duplex  Joint,  providing  a sepa- 
rate rod  for  the  new  Compound  Clamping  and  Swiveling  Joint. 

In  this  style  the  Head  Screen  is  held  by  a projecting  joint  on  the 
base  support,  having  the  Sectional  Ball  and  Slide  Rod  movement,  which 
extends  its  range  more  than  two  fold  in  the  area  it  will  cover, 
giving  adjustment  from  a height  of  8 feet  to  the  floor,  to  any  position 
within  a circle  of  8 feet,  and  without  other  means  of  adjustment  than  is 
instantly  afforded  by  the  Cam  Lever,  which  latter  is  provided  with  a nut 
to  take  up  any  wear  occasioned  by  use,  as  are  all  the  joints  provided 
against  wear.  None  of  the  parts  have  back-lash  or  loose  and  shaky 
joints.  While  the  Side  Shade  is  used  conjointly  with  the  Head  Screen, 
it  is  evident  that  the  desired  effect  is  best  accomplished  by  this  facility 
for  separate  adjustment,  as  the  placing  of  one  shade  does  not  put  the 
other  out  of  position. 


106 


s 


ThQ  srCHUurZEi  PHOro-EQlflP/^El^T  Co.  new  Y0R\<.‘ 


The  Side  Shade  is  independent  of  the  Head  Screen  in  its  movements, 
while  it  is  supported  on  the  same  base. 

Prices.  Securely  Boxed. 

No.  1.  Head  Screen,  as  illustrated,  with  Square  Side  Shade  and 


ornamental  foot  base $10  00 

No.  1.  Head  Screen,  without  Side  Shade 7 00 


Piute’s  PhotogripMc  Head  Screeii> 


STYLE  No.  2. 


This  style  Head  Screen  is  the  same  as  previously  advertised,  and  of 
which  a large  number  have  been  sold.  It  has  a circular  base  with  the 
elevating  rod  telescoping  into  the  base  standard  without  the  off-set  or 
projecting  Sectional  Ball  Joint.  The  adjustment  of  the  elevating  rod  is 
made  by  a saddle  and  thumb-screw  at  the  top  of  the  base  standard.  In 
ail  other  respects  it  is  like  No.  1,  having  the  same  Slide  Rod  Ball  and 
Socket  Joint  with  binding  lever,  as  shown  in  detail  in  this  cut.  Side 
Shades  can  be  used  with  this  style  of  Head  Screen,  attached  by  the  Im- 
proved Clamping  Joint  to  the  elevating  rod. 

Price.  No.  2,  Head  Screen,  with  oval  side  shade,  including 

box $8  75 


107 


S'CHUL.rZEi  PHOTO --  EO  iriP/-\^IVT  Co.  mew  YORK- 


■^White’s  Photographic  Head  Screen.^*^ 

STILE  No.  3. 


This  is  a new  pattern,  having  ornamental  foot  base.  The  standard  is 
in  one  piece,  1)^  inches  diameter,  6 feet  high,  of  hard  wood.  It  has  the 
New  Compound  Clamping  and  Swiveling  Joint,  which  affords  adjustment 
to  all  positions  in  a secure  and  practical  manner,  by  one  fastening.  By 
slightly  releasing  the  Clamping  Joint,  the  Shade  Rod  is  free  to  slide  or  be 
turned  to  place  the  shade  at  any  angle  around  the  supporting  Standard. 
A greater  release  of  the  Clamping  Joint  permits  adjustment  of  the 
Screens  up  or  down  on  the  Standard. 

PRICES. 

No.  3,  Head  Screen,  as  illustrated,  with  Oval  Side  Shade.  $7  00  ' 


If  with  Square  Side  Shade 7 fio 

No’. '3,  Head  Screen,  without  Side  Shade 4 60 

108 


White’s  Baby  Holder, 


This  has  all  needed  adjustments  for  contraction 
and  enlargement  to  accommodate  infants,  from 
the  smallest  to  those  about  3 years  of  age. 

It  may  be  successfully  employed  in  scenic 
effects,  for  nicely  disposing  infant  among  repre- 
sentations of  nature.  The  Baby  Holder  is  fur- 
nished with  a telescoping  Standard  Support  hav- 
ing an  ornamental  base;  or,  if  preferred,  with  an 
Arm  Bracket  to  connect  it  to  the  arm  of  a chair 
or  other  support;  or  with  Low  Down  Base. 

Price,  with  Telescoping  Standard  Support, 

as  illustrated $12  00 


WHIxe’S 

Photographic  Chair  Rest. 


This  appliance  is  for  attachment  to  any  Studio  Chair  by  means  of  the 
plate,  into  which  the  supporting  rod  slides  ; and.  astshown  by  cut,  has 
the  ear-clips  and  ball  and  socket  adjustment,  and  as  shown  by  dotted 
lines,  may  be  applied  in  almost  any  direction  or  angle.  It  will  be  found 
to  be  a very  valuable  accessory.  Price. $8  00 


OCihite’s  Posing  Support,  Ho-  1* 


No.  2. 


This  Posing  Support  has  the  applied 
principle  of  the  Improved  Combination 
Slide-Rod,  Ball  and  Socket  Joints.  It  is 
adapted  to  the  smallest  or  tallest  person, 
and  for  all  adjustments  or  positions. 

The  ear-clips  of  the  support  have  swivel- 
ing adjustment  as  well  as  lateral  or  spread 
movement  combined  at  one  fastening,  af- 
fording facility  for  either  horizontal  or 
vertical  positions  of  the  carrying  rod, 
placing  the  parts  to  conform  to  the  pose  without  regard  to  instrument 
itself,  or  the  liability  of  portions  thereof  appearing  in  view.  A detach- 
able Back  Rest  is  provided  which  has  all  desirable  facilities  of  adjustment 
easily  and  quickly  handled. 

The  Adjustable  Joints  are  formed  in  the  most  perfect  manner,  especi- 
ally adapted  for  giving  accuracy  and  uniformity  of  movement,  and  the 
Sliding  Rods  are  of  steel  of  accurate  gauge,  and  are  jilated  with  Nickel. 
The  stand  is  nicely  japanned  with  blue  and  gold  line  ornamentation. 

Price,  Complete,  Boxed $30  00 


WHITE’S  POSING  SUPPORT,  No.  2. 

This  cut  shows  another  form  of  the  posing  support  of  somewhat 
lighter  construction,  and  Jacking  the  Ball  and  Socket  Joint  at  top  of  base, 
but  which  is  instead  provided  with  telescopic  movement  and  handle  for 
convenience  in  moving  about  the  studio.  Price,  boxed $14  00 


£'  77)'?  ' JSrcHULTZE  PHOTO  - EO  LTf  Co.  /Vgyv/  YORK^. 


^XTHE  HIGH)  HMD  HBST.K- 


As  its  name  implies,  this  rest  is  believed  to  possess, 
in  an  eminent  degree,  the  quality  of  being  much  more 
rigid,  and  consoquently  much  more  practical  than  any, 
including  that  so  manifestly  copied  from  Mr.  Harrison’s 
patterns.  Its  movements,  also,  are  unusually  diversi- 
fied, and  its  mechanism  exceedingly  simple.  The  price 
is,  nickel-plated,  |14  00. 


THE  AMERICAN  SONGSTER. 


A decided  novelty.  One  of  th« 
best  Baby  Charmers  ever  offered 
to  the  trade.  Made  of  metal,  nick- 
el-plated. 

The  songsters  are  painted  in  a 
variety  of  bright  colors  in  almost 
perfect  imitation  of  life. 

They  sing  as  clear  and  liquid  as 
the  best  living  song  birds.  Are 
substantially  and  handsomely  Rigid, 

made  and  finished,  and  not  liable  to  get  out  of 
order. 

While  the  bird  sings,  it  moves  its  mouth  (or  bill) 
and  tail  in  exact  imitation  of  a living  bird. 

In  addition  to  being  a photographic  novelty,  it  is 
highly  useful  in  teaching  birds  to  sing. 

It  supersedes  the  bird  organ,  and  when  used  near 
a bird  it  will  induce  it  to  start  up  its  best  notes  im- 
mediately. 

No.  150,  Patented. 

Each  songster  packed  in  a neat  box. 

Price 75  cents. 


If  yod  do  9ot  fii^d  u/l^at  yod  u/apt  tl?is  eatalo^de,. 
u/rit^  for  it.  U/e  <:a9  ?^t  it. 


Ill 


PR@PIIjE  H00E33@]^IBg 


Profile  Accessories  are  made  of  canvas,  mounted  on  light  wood 
frames  and  painted  in  water  colors.  They  are  light  and  a nice  Accessorj 
to  use.  All  orders  for  them  should  give  lighting  and  the  shade  desired, 
same  as  an  order  for  Scenic  Background. 


WINDOWS. 


16a  without  Blinds. 


16a  with  Blinds. 


Ko.  16a.  Cottage  Window,  73^  x 5 ft.,  with  blinds $10  00 

“ “ •«  “ without  blinds 8 00 

The  blinds  are  on  hinges  and  can  be  opened  or  closed. 

Lace  Curtain  to  use  with  window 1 00 

Boxing 1 00 


No.  372. 


No.  372.  Cottage  Window,  734 
ft.  high  by  5 ft.  wide,  with 
blinds  made  to  use  open 
or  shut.  The  Cottage  is 
profiled  on  each  edge  so  it 
can  be  used  either  side  of 
any  exterior  background  as 
a set  piece,  representing  the 

corner  of  a house 

Boxing. 


10  00 
1 00 


WINDOW  AND  DOOR. 

No,  20a.  Door  and  Window  Combination,  8 x 5 ft.  The  window 
is  furnished  with  reversible  blinds.  The  door  swings 


on  hinges,  and  the  steps  are  movable 14  00 

Boxing 1 00 


112 


T/)P  s'CH(/LTZE  X2!^hi:i 


No;  "473.  No.  473. 


FOLDING  SCREENS. 

No.  473.  Parlor  Folding  Screen,  6 ft.  2 in.  high,  composed  of  three 

' sections,  each  2 ft.  wide,  painted  both  sides 10  00 

Boxing 50 

No.  392.  Folding  Screen,  composed  of  three  sections  6 ft.  3 in. 

high  by  2 ft.  wide,  frames  are  made  of  Papier  Mache, 

finished  in  bronze  with  painted  scenery  in  center 12  00 

Boxing 50 

COLUMNS. 

No.  390.  Columns,  6ft.  high,  2ft.  6 in.  wide; profile  both  edges.. . 6 00 

Box 50 

PROFILE  CABINETS. 

No.  349.  Cabinet,.  8 ft.  high,  finished  on  both  edges  so  as  to  use 

either  side  of  a ground,  making  two  Accessories  in  one  7 00 

Boxing 75 

No.  18a.  Cabinet  and  Fireplace,  8 ft.  high 6 00 

Boxing 75 

No.  391.  Cabinet,  8 ft.  high  by  3 ft.  9 in.  wide,  edges  also  profiled  8 00 
Boxing 75 

STONE  WALLS  AND  CATES. 

No.  433.  Wall,  Gate  and  Balustrade  combination;  six  changes. . . 15  00 

Boxing 75 


STAIRWAY. 

No.  19a.  Set  Stairway,  8 ft.  high,  with  movable  ornament  on  post 
Boxing 

PORTICO. 

No.  375.  Cottage  Portico,  73^  x 534  ft. , represents  entrance  to 
Cottage;  has  opening  in  portico  for  posing,  finished  in 
profile  on  both  edges  and  is  a good  set  piece  to  use 
either  side  of  any  exterior  background.  A very  pretty 
and  useful  Accessory, 

Boxing, 


6 00 
75 


8 00 
1 00 


113 


No.  373.  Stone  Wall  and  Gate  combination;  height  of  wall,  3 feet  6 W 
Boxing 50 


PIANO. 

No.  17a.  Imitation  Steinway  Upright  Piano 6 00 

Boxing 75 


No.  276.  Boat;  works  well  with  any  exterior  ground,  furnishing 


its  own  banks  and  water.  The  oar  is  movable 5 00 

Special  separate  water  front 1 50 

Boxing 50 


114 


' XCHuL^rz^  ^Horo--EQir{P/^Er^T  CG.  /Ste^  york-^ 


Papier  Maclie  Accessories. 

OILr  PAINTED. 


No.  389.  No.  389. 


The  design,  quality  and  finish  of  all  the  Papier  Mache  Accessories 
are  greatly  improved.  They  are  absolutely  free  from  smell,  also  rat  and 
vermin  proof.  They  are  painted  in  flatted  oil,  which  has  all  the  advan- 
tage of  soft,  dead  finish  and  brilliancy  obtained  in  water  colors,  without 
any  of  its  disagreeable  features.  The  paint  will  not  rub  at  all,  or  soil  the 
most  delicate  fabric.  They  can  be  cleaned  the  same  as  other  furniture, 
and  a leaky  skylight  will  not  spoil  them. 


No.  389.  No.  389. 


No.  389.  Combination.  Though  only  composed  of  seven  separate 
pieces,  embraces  all  the  best  changes  and  positions  ob- 
tained on  215  and  245  combinations,  but  has  no  resem- 
blance to  either  of  them,  but  it  is  a finer  Accessory  and 
much  better  adapted  to  general  gallery  use.  It  forms 

115 


f 


f=^Horo-£Qir(p^E^T  co,  /v£W  YORK- 


No.  389.  No.  389. 


Balustrades,  Stairways,  Balconies,  Bridges,  Gateways, 

Stiles,  etc.,  in  great  variety,  and  is  only  limited  by  the 
skill  of  the  operator.  3h1  Balustrade  and  388  Stairway 
form  parts  of  this  combination.  It  has  a painted  slip, 
profiled  on  both  edges,  representing  front  of  house; 

can  be  used  with  any  exterior  back- 
ground, as  a side  slip  at  either  end  of 
ground.  The  Balcony  is  mounted  on 
casters,  is  thirty-four  inches  square, 
and  ornamented  differently  on  its 
four  sides.  When  not  in  use  all  the 
other  pieces  can  be  placed  on  the 
Balcony  and  pushed  out  of  the  way, 
not  occupying  any  more  space  than 
an  ordinary  Accessory.  The  com- 
bination is  light  and  strong,  the 
changes  simple  and  easily  made.  Pho- 
tographs will  be  furnished  with  each 
combination  sold,  showing  fifty-six 
changes.  The  photographs  occupy 
six  pages  in  sample  book.  The  com- 
bination includes  the  separate  water 
front  but  not  the  Oil  Thread  Mats 
and  Backgrounds  used  in  photograph- 
ing it.  Complete $30  00 

Boxing, , , , 1 50 


No.  389. 


CABINET. 


No.  371  Cabinet,  C>^  ft.  high,  made  in  elegant  style,  and  finished 
in  bronze,  has  two  large  and  two  small  shelves,  is 
capable  of  four  changes.  There  are  furnished  with 
Cabinet,  ten  extra  pieces,  consisting  of  pitcher,  oriental 
vases  and  placques  finished  in  bronze.  Cabinet  com- 


plete  20  00 

Cabinet  alone  without  bric-a-brac 15  00 

Boxing 1 25 


116 


T/)Q-  YORK-^ 


FENCES  AND  GATES. 

No.  224.  Imitation  Iron  Fence  and  Gate,  7 ft.  long,  Posts  38  in. 

high |8  00 

Crate 50 

No.  387.  Iron  Fence  and  Gate;  height  of  Fence,  32  in. ; Post,  43  in. ; 

length,  7 ft.  The  fence  is  reversible,  as  shown  in  photos  10  00 

Box 50 

No.  361.  Rustic  Fence  and  Gate 7 00 

Crate 50 

No.  368.  Stile  and  Baris  to  use  with  361  Fence 4 00 

Crate 25 

No.  361.  Fence  and  Gate,  when  sold  with  368  Stile  and  Bars 11  00 

Boxing 75 

No.  210.  Rustic  Fence  with  Gate  mounted  on  hinges.  The  Gate 

is  easil7  removed  and  replaced  by  Bars 7 00 

Crate 50 

No.  211.  Rustic  Stile,  to  use  with  210  Fence,  has  several  changes. 

When  used  alone  is  excellent  for  groups  and  children. ..  5 00 

Crate 50 

Nos.  210  and  211  when  sold  together 12  00 


ARBOR. 

No.  366.  Rustic  Arbor,  *1%  high,  composed  of  three  main  sec- 
tions, each  two  feet  wide,  which  are  adjustable  to  any 
position  desired.  The  lattice  work  can  be  removed 
\ and  replaced  by  gate  or  window.  Has  two  rustic  seats 
so  constructed  as  to  be  used  on  the  inside  or  outside. 


Is  capable  of  a great  variety  of  changes $18  00 

Crate 75 


SWING. 


No.  364. 


No.  364.  Swing,  adjustable  to  any  pose. 

Crate 


$4  00 
25 


117 


RUSTIC  SEAT  AND  TREES 


No.  395.  Smooth  Bark  Tree,  with  three  adjustable  limbs $8  00 

Crate 75 

No.  394.  Rough  Bark  Tree,  has  three  adjustable  limbs 9 00 

Crate 75 

No.  393.  Circular  Seat,  made  to  use  with  Trees 5 00 

393  Seat,  with  adjustable  back 7 00 

Crate 50 


CHAIRS  AND  SEATS. 


No.  360.  Rustic  Seat,  with  adjustable  arms  and  back 7 00 

With  Painted  Bridge  Slip  at  back  forming  a neat  Rustic 

Bridge 8 00 

Crate 75 


No.  220.  Chair,  represents  solid  carving  and  easily  changed  from 


a carved  to  upholstered  chair,  is  a desirable  accessory.  8 00 

Carved  Chair,  alone 6 00 

Crate,,,,, 75 


No.  386. 


No.  386.  Carved  Stone  Lawn  Seat 
Boxing. . . . 


No.  382. 

.........  $10  00 

75 


No.  360. 


No.  360. 


Thg  -srcH(jL.rz£  f^Horo  - £Qir( pz\E/^T  co.  /w£v/  York- 


1^0.  383.  Carved  Chair,  finished  in  bronze.  Extreme  height  of 


back  from  fioor,  43  inches 8 00 

Box 50 


No.  380. 


No.  380.  Hall  and  Park  Seat 8 00 

Boxing 50 


STAIRWAY. 

No.  388.  Stairway  is  reversible ; the  ornamenting  on  each  side  is 
different ; can  be  used  for  interior  or  exterior  Stair- 


way, with  the  steps  at  back  or  in  front $13  00 

Box 75 


No.  370. 


No.  370.  Stairway,  finished  in  bronze,  37  in.  high  at  pedestal,  has 
four  steps,  and  is  a handsome  accessory.  Suitable  for 

interior  or  exterior  stairway 

With  elegant  gas  jet  ornament 

Boxing 


8 00 
9 50 
75 


Seijd  for  oar  sampl<^  hoo\{^  s\)owiT)(^  pi^otos  of  tl?e  latest 
bael^groapds  a9d  aoeessories. 


119 


, Tht?  -SCHULXZE,'  PHOTO  - EQ  {/(PJ^ENT  Cl'o-  NET/  YORK- 


BALUSTRADES, 


No.  352. 


No.  3o2. 


No.  352.  Child  Balustrade,  31  in.  high  at  pedestal.  The  orna- 
mentation on  one  side  is  entirely  different  from  that 


of  the  other.  Balustrade  alone $8  00 

Vase  and  Artificial  Plant 2 50 

Extra  6-inch  Base 2 00 

Boxing 50 


No.  237,  Square  Side. 


No,  237,  Round  Side. 


120 


ThQ  S'CHULXZE.  PHOTO -EQ  If  [P/^Wr  Co.  nEW  YORK- 


No.  237.  Balustrade,  32  in.  high  and  334  loiig*  The  pedestal  is 
round  on  one  side  and  square  on  the  other.  The  style 
and  ornamenting  is  entirely  different  on  opposite 
sides,  making  two  distinct  Balustrades  in  one.  Will 
work  well  with  subjects  of  any  size,  but  is  especially 
adapted  to  photographing  children,  without  Vase $8  00 


With  12-inch  Vase  and  Bouquet 10  00 

6-inch  Base  separate 2 00 

Boxing 50 


No.  381.  No.  381. 


No.  381.  Short  Balustrade.  37  in.  high  ; loose  ornament,  9 in.  high. 

The  ornamenting  on  each  side  is  different,  rich  and 


very  effective.  It  is  part  of  389  Combination 9 00 

Box 50 


No.  385.  No.  385. 


No.  385.  Round  Post  Balustrade,  4 ft.  7 in.  long,  3 ft.  5 in.  high  at 
pedestal;  has  small  loose  ornament  9 in.  high.  The 


ornamenting  on  each  side  is  different 10  00 

Extra  6-inch  Base 2 00 

Boxing 75 


121 


I 


No.  383. 


1^0.  883.  Circular  Balustrade,  composed  of  open  work.  The  ped- 
estal is  detached  and  can  be  used  at  either  end  of 
Balustrade  or  alone.  It  has  a loose  shell  ornament. . . 12  00 

Box 75 


No.  353.  No.  353. 


No.  353.  Balustrade,  5 ft.  long.  Large  Pedestal,  37  in.  high ; 

small,  31  in.  high.  The  pedestals  are  both  square. 
The  ornamenting  is  different  on  the  two  sides.  It  is 

suitable  for  sitter  of  any  size.  Balustrade  alone 

6-inch  Base  separate 

Large  Vase  and  Plant 


Boxing. 


PEDESTALS. 

No.  378.  Pedestal,  40  inches  high 

Boxing 

No.  379.  Rustic  Flower  Stand,  30  in. 

high 

No.  379.  Rustic  Vase,  15  inches  high... 

Boxing 


No.  379. 


10  00 
2 00 
2 50 
75 


5 00, 
25 


6 00 

1 50 
25 


122 


^ t TS-^ o •.  /y£:  w"  vp^K 


BRIDGES. 

No.  358.  Rustic  Bridge,  6 feet  long ,^7  00 

Crate 50 

No.  243.  Has  11  changes  as  a Bridge  and  all  that  are  shown  in 
photographs  of  Nos.  239,  240,  242,  243,  244,  and  part  of 

245,  making  28  changes.  Part  of  245  Combination 20  00 

Boxing 1 25 


ROCKS, 


8 00 
60 


No.  365.  No.  246. 

No.  377.  Combination  Rock;  three  sections,  forming  rocks  40,  30, 
26,  24,  16,  14  and  10  in.  high,  as  the  different  sections 
are  combined  or  used  alone;  making  14  changes.  The 
two  sides  represent  different  rock  formation.  It  forms 
seats  in  all  the  changes,  is  well  adapted  to  subjects  of 

any  age  and  handy  in  posing  groups 

Crating 


No.  377. 


123 


^S‘CHgu.TZE  f^H0ro-EOU{P/\EI^  CO.  ATfv/  YORK* 


No.  143.  No.  60. 

No.  365.  Rock;  has  two  jogs  for  seats  and  will  pose  well  with  sub- 
jects of  any  size.  Height  36  inches $5  00 

Crate 50 

No.  246.  Rock,  reversible,  45  in.  high  in  one  position,  and  32  in. 

high  in  another.  Has  3 seats  one  way  and  4 the  other  8 00 

Crate 40 

No.  143.  Rock,  45  in.  high  at  highest  point,  two  seats,  one  formed 
by  a jog,  the  other  for  photographing  small  children 
and  babies.  The  seat  is  so  made  that  a baby  cannot 
fall  out,  and  is  well  adapted  for  posing  subjects  of  any 


size  or  age 9 00 

Crate 50 

No.  60.  Rock,  45  inches  high,  has  three  seats 8 00 

Crate 40 

No.  602.  Set  Rock  with  movable  section 4 00 

Boxing 25 

No.  605.  Rock,  reversible,  with  five  seats  in  either  position 8 00 

Boxing 50 


Every  Wxjq  pi7oto$rapl7er  sl^odld  b(?a4Jtify  apd  mal^e  l^is 
Studio  attraetiu(^  u/itl?  artificial  plants,  ete. 


124 


Thp  s'CHuCrzE^^oro- EQiriP^EI^T  co.  /^£\W  yor'k-' 


No.  127. 

No.  127.  Rock,  34  inches  high,  with  three  seats 6 00 

Crate .' 35 

No.  63.  Rock,  16  inches  high 2 50 

Crate 20 


No.  137.  Rock,  36  in.  ]ug>’,  has  two  seats,  especially  adapted  for 
photographing  children  and  babies  from  three  months 
to  fifteen  years  old.  The  seat  is  so  constructed  that  a 
baby  cannot  fail  out.  It  has  a hole  in  back  of  seat  so 
that  a child  can  be  held  from  behind  the  rock  if  de- 


sired  $7  00 

Crate 35 


No.  83.  Rock,  two  feet  high,  with  two  seats 4 00 

Crate 25 


No.  137. 


125 


r/)P  SCHUkTZB.  P/^QTQ  -- £Q  (/f  1 


No.  66,  Small  rocks,  from  3 to  12  inches  in  diameter,  25,  50,  and 


75c.  each,  according  to  size;  per  dozen,  assorted $5  00 

Crate 25 


STUMP  ROCKS. 


No.  354. 


No.  354.  Stump  Rock,  35  in.  high.  Stump  on  one  side  and  rock 


on  opposite.  Rock  has  three  seats,  and  stump  two ...  6 00 

Crate 35 


No.  355.  Stump  Rock,  two  seats,  17  and  25  inches  high.  One  side 
represents  a double  stump,  the  opposite  a rock  with 
two  seats.  It  has  an  extension  20  in.  long,  made  to  fit 
both  seats;  when  used  on  the  upper  jog  it  makes  the 


stump  and  rock  43  in.  high 7 00 

Crate 35 

No.  209.  Rock,  24  inches  high 5 00 

Crate 25 


STUMPS. 


No.  72.  Stump,  16  inches  high ,.3  00 

No.  73.  Log  or  Block,  2 feet  long 2 50 

No.  72.  Stump  and  No.  73  Log  5 00 

Crate 25 

No.  81.  Double  Stump,  40  inches  high,  seat  16  inches  high 7 00 

Crate 35 

No.  367.  Stump,  17  in.  high,  movable  section  28  in.,  making  full 

stump  45  in.  high.  The  stump  has  two  small  trees 

feet  high,  attached  to  root,  with  adjustable  trunks 7 00 

Crate *^5 

No.  139.  Jagged  Stump,  45  in.  high,  with  Rock  at  base  16  in.  high.  7 00 

Crate 35^ 


126 


Thg  srcHt/UTZ^  - PHoro - EQjfjpy^Ef^r  co.  /\iew  York* 


No.  215  COMBINATION. 

No.  215.  Combination  of  a Balcony,  Bridge,  Balustrade,  Interior 
and  Exterior  Stairway,  8x4  House  Side  Slip,  large  and 
small  Vase  filled  with  Grasses  and  Flowers,  capable  of 
making  40  beautiful  changes.  Photographs  furnished 
with  each  accessory  showing  all  the  changes  adver- 


tised  $30  00 

Boxing 2 00 


No.  245  COMBINATION. 

No.  245.  An  Accessory  capable  of  making  60  beautiful  changes, 
including  many  changes  of  Balu«trades,  Balconies, 
Windows,  Stairways,  Gateways,  House  Fronts,  St^ps, 
Bridges,  Archways,  etc.,  in  too  great  a variety  to  de- 
scribe. Will  furnish  photos  showing  60  changes. 


Complete  with  photos 40  00 

Boxing 2 00 


No.  236  COMBINATION. 

No.  236.  Consists  of  a Stone  Wall  and  Rustic  Fence,  with  Gate 
and  Rustic  Stile  to  use  with  either  Fence  or  Wall; 
also  a Rustic  Bridge  to  use  between  the  sections  of 
Fence  or  Stone  Wall,  with  water  front  extending  the 
stream  to  the  front.  The  Bridge  can  be  used  alone  by 
placing  grass  mats  at  the  ends  of  the  Bridge  to  form 
the  banks.  The  combination  is  capable  of  10  beautiful 


changes 15  00 

Boxing 75 

Rustic  Fence,  Gate,  Stile  and  Stone  Wall,  alone 12  00 

Rustic  Bridge  and  Water-front,  alone 5 00 

No.  608  COMBINATION. 

No.  608.  Consists  of  Rustic  Fence  on  one  side  and  Stone  Wall 
on  the  other,  with  Rustic  Bars  and  Stone  Steps  in 
center 20  00 

No.  608.  With  Stone  Steps  left  out 14  00 

Rustic  Fence  and  Bars  alone 8 00 

Stone  F.  nee  and  Bars  alone 8 00 

Boxing 75 

No.  610  COMBINATION. 

No.  610.  Fence  and  Gate  alone 10  00 

Boxing 75 

No.  610.  Combination,  composed  of  Fence,  Gate  and  Archway, 

making  quite  a number  of  beautiful  changes 15  00 

Boxing 1 50 

BALLOON. 

No.  577.  Balloon,  a new,  practical  and  attractive  accessory,  can 

be  used  with  any  exterior  ground 10  00 

Boxing 75 

RUSTIC  WELL. 

No.  609.  Rustic  Well  with  Windlass  and  Bucket 10  00 

Boxing 50 

SET  TREE. 

No.  601.  Set  Tree,  seven  and  one-half  feet  high 6 00 

Boxing 50 


127 


. r/)^  ■s'cHui^rzE  PHoro- EQir{p/\Et^r  co.  /^e^w  york* 


VASES. 

No.  248.  Vase,  12  inches  high $1  00 

No.  351.  Vaee,  11  inches  high * . . . 1 25 

No.  249.  Bouquet  Holder,  hand  painted,  13  inches  high. 1 25 


No.  350.  No.  ;i49.  No. 


No.  350.  Lawn  Vase,  32  inches  high 3 00 

No.  233.  Vase,  19  inches  high 1 25 

No.  247.  Vase,  hand  painted,  13  inches  high 1 75 


NEW  BACKGROUND  EASEL. 

It  has  a gate  balanced  with  weights,  which  raises  and  lowers  to  any 
height,  so  as  to  adjust  any  decorative,  graduated  cloud,  or  any  other  kind 
of  vignette  ground,  to  the  proper  height  of  subject,  sitting  or  standing. 
It  also  has  another  arrangement  for  tipping  the  top  of  the  ground  for- 
ward, so  as  to  make  the  ground  darker  or  lighter  at  will.  It  occupies  but 
28  X 24  inches  of  floor  space  in  a gallery,  and  will  carry  grounds  of  any 
size  from  4x4  to  9x11,  and  even  larger.  To  use  with  this  Easel,  back- 
grounds are  mounted  on  both  sides  of  a frame  without  feet,  which  enables 
them  to  be  stored  closely,  when  not  in  use.  The  Easel  is  mounted  on  the 
best  of  friction  casters,  and  is  moved  about  the  room  with  ease  when 
carrying  a large  ground.  Price  $12.00. 


OIL  THREAD  MAT. 


The  Improved  Oil  Thread  Mat  of  the  very  best  quality  at  the  follow- 
ing reduced  prices  : 


128 


r/)g  scHuL^rzE.  PHoro- EOirip/^EI^T'-co.  ne^  york^ 


Scenic  and  Plain  Backgrounds. 

We  keep  constantly  in  stock  a large  number  of  line  grounds  of 
our  most  saleable  designs,  and  can  make  you  immediate  shipment  on. 
receipt  of  order. 

All  grounds  warranted  first-class,  and  equal  to  samples. 

Grounds  painted  to  order  from  draivings  furnished. 


R I O E S . 


Exterior  Backgrounds 

Interior  Backgrounds 

Side  Slips,  unmounted 

Mounting  and  Profiling 

Backgrounds  Painted  in  Oil 
Oraded  or  Blended  Grounds, 

Clouded  Grounds 

Plain  Grounds 


any  size 15c.  pensquare  foot. 

,64  sq.  ft.  or  more 15c.  “ “ •• 

20c.  “ 

$1.50  to  $2.  Ob' extra. 

20c.  pepsquare  foot. 

......15c.  “ “ “ 

10c.  “ “ “ 

8c.  “ “ 


BARGAIN  GROUNDS. 

Under  this  head  we  often  have  a few  Misfits,  or  grounds  painted 
with  wrong  light  for  order.  To  dispose  of  them  quickly,  we  mark  them 
$4.00,  $5.00,  and  $6.00  each. 

Cannot  Send  Photos  of  these  Cheap  Grounds. 

Sample  Photos  of  regular  grounds  sent  on  application,  to  be  returned 
in  five  days. 


KELT  BACKGROUNDS. 

6x8  feet any  tint $4.00 


GERMAN  VIGNETTE  GROUNDS. 


Our  Own  Importation.  Something  Entirely  New. 


These  Grounds  are  woven  and  not  painted,  giving  beautiful  effects  in 
artistic  shading  and  lighting  hitherto  unknown  in  this  country.  They 
are  shaded  from  light  to  dark,  either  vertically  or  horizontally. 

5 X 5 feet $5  00  | 8 x 8 feet $10  00 

129 


§ 


Thp  r^c o.  a/'£vs/"york* 


studio  Dpapepies. 


We  are  Importers’  Agents  for  the  largest  line  of  Foreign  Draperies, 
and  can  serve  you  with  the  choicest  patterns  from  lirst  hands  at  exceed- 
ingly low  prices,  giving  you  selections  from  the  most  novel  patterns. 

IDo  Not  P*t_ircluase  Before  Sending  to  Bs. 

We  will  send  any  price  drapery  selected,  on  approval;  if  not  your 
choice,  will  exchange  for  other  goods  or  refund  the  cash. 


No. 

471 

$4 

00 

No. 

562 

5 

00 

No. 

653 

00 

No. 

844 

8 

00 

No. 

105 

'....  10 

00 

No. 

126 

12 

00 

No. 

167 

16 

00 

Artificial  Plants  and  plouacrs. 

We  carry  in  stock  a large  line  of  Artilicial  Plants  and  Flowers., 
designed  and  arranged  with  special  reference  to  the  wants  of  photo- 
graphers. These  goods  are  manufactured  in  Paris,  and  are  imported  for 
our  special  use.  They  embrace  a full  line  of  single  Plants  or  Flowers,  or 
an  assorted  lot  arranged  in  Jars,  Jardinieres,  Hanging  Rustic  Baskets,  or 
large  Rustic  Stands.  No  studio  complete  without  a Basket  of  Flowers. 

Prices  within  the  reach  of  all. 


hero\ji-es  GL-\JE. 

Hercules  Glue  is  the  greatest  sticker  of  the  age.  Always  ready  for 
use.  Put  up  in  jars.  A good  brush  with  each  jar. 

Price cents.  | Per  dozen 

130 


12  40* 


THE  BEST  TRAY  EVER  PUT  ON  THE  MARKET  IS  WITHOUT  BODBT 

Ebonite  • Papier ' IQache. 


Is  Indestructible-Will  not  CHIP,  CRACK,  WARP,  RUST  or  BREAK. 


Is  Light,  Easily  Kept  Clean,  Low  in  Price,  and  has  Advantages  Over 
Every  Kind  of  Tray  Known. 

for  our  Jradt^  /T\arl^.  jvio  Jray  Qepuipi^  u/itl?out  it. 


EXCELLENT  FOR  SILVERING  « TONING. 


ALSO  FOR  THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF 

DRY  PLATES  AND  BROMIDE  PAPER. 


No.  1. 

314x414', 

F=  F2  I 0 E r I-  I S T.  l^ 

114  inch  deep 

25 

“ 2. 

44x5K, 

IK  “ 

i i 

ti 

30 

“ 3. 

5x7, 

IK  “ 

i i 

( i 

45 

“ 4. 

54x814, 

IK  “ 

i i 

i ( 

65 

“ 5. 

7vQ 

814^1014, 

IK  ‘‘ 

i( 

70 

“ 6. 

214  “ 

i< 

ii 

1 05 

“ 7. 

104x12^, 

214  “ 

<< 

1 65 

“ 8. 

12x1434, 

14':4xl8i4, 

2K  “ 

a 

i < 

2 10 

“ 9. 

2K  “ 

<< 

2 85 

“ 10. 

16x20, 

2K  “ 

i i 

3 35 

“ llw 

19x24, 

2K  “ 

ti 

t i 

5 75 

“ 12. 

23x27, 

2%  “ 

n 

6 75 

“ 13. 

26x30, 

294  “ 

it 

n 

7 75 

“ 14. 

28x34, 

3 

ii 

a 

8 75 

By  the  above  measurements  it  will  be  seen  tliese  trays  are  deeper 
than  any  on  the  market.  They  are  all  provided  with  lip  for  pouring. 


MHITE  KND  KMBER  GLKSS  TRKYS. 


White,  for  5x  7 plates  or  under 25c 

Amber,  “5x8“  “ 36c 

“8x10  “ 75c 


f^Horo- EQLnp/-\^i^r  co.  /v£:vy/  yo'rk^ 


Hard  Rubber  Trays. 


With  the  aid  of  a patented  process  controlled  by  us,  we  are  enabled 
to  place  upon  the  market  a rubber  tray,  superior  to  any  in  quality,  and 
lower  than  any  in  price. 


ZLiXST*. 


41^  X 5^  deep $ 50 

5^x  7K  “ 60 

5^x  8^  “ 70 

7x9  “ 88 

8K  X 103^  “ 1 15 

10%  X 12%  “ 1 75 


12  X 16  deep 
15  X 19  “ 

18  X 22  “ 

19  X 23  “ 

21x26  “ 


^2  40 

4 25 

5 00 
5 75 
7 50 


Polished  Rubber  Trays. 


No.  1. 

4%  X 5%  for  plates  3%  x 4%,  4x5,  4% 

X 5%,  %-in.  deep 

1 28 

“ 2. 

5%x  8% 

(< 

4%x  6%,  5x7,  5 

X 8,  % “ 

56 

“ 3. 

7x9 

(( 

6%x  8%, 

1 “ 

72 

“ 4. 

00 

X 

0 

(( 

8 X 10, 

IVs  “ 

1 08 

“ 5. 

11  X 13 

10  X 12, 

th  “ 

1 56 

“ 6. 

12  X 15 

<< 

11  X 14, 

1%  “ 

2 40 

These  Trays  are  the  genuine  polished  hard  rubber,  made  especially 
for  us,  and  are  superior  to  any  in  the  market.  They  have  no  ridges  in 
the  bottom  to  waste  developer. 


Agate  Iron- Ware  Trays. 


The  dimensions  given  are  for  inside  the  bottom  of  tray. 


Size.  Shallow.  Deep. 

8x  10 , $1  25  |1  60 

10x12 ‘ 2 00  2 25 

11  X 14 3 00  3 37 

15  X 19 7 00  8 00 

19  X 24 12  00  " 15  00 


132 


Thfi  rs’CHuktZE 


lapaqned  Ipon  Daualoplqg  Trays. 


For 

3^x  414 

plates. . . 

....$  15 

For  11  X 14  plates 

^ 75 

n 

4 X 5 

a 

20 

“ 14x17  “ 

1 00 

<< 

414  x 6K 

a 

. . . . 22 

“ 18  X 22  “ 

2 00 

it 

5 X 8 

a 

. . . . 25 

“ 20x24  “ 

■ . 2 50 

it 

634  X 

a 

. . . . 30 

“ 24  X 30,  3 inches  deep.. . . 2 75 

it 

8 X 10 

. . . . 40 

“ 26  X 32 

‘ ....  3 00 

*i 

10  X 12 

it 

. . . . 50 

PORCEI-KIN 

TRAYS 

• 

(The  dimensions  g 

iven  are  for  inside  the  bottom  of  the  tray.) 

Size. 

Shall  >w. 

Deep. 

Size. 

Shallow. 

Deep. 

4 

X 5 . 

$ 35... 

. $ 40 

10  X 12, 

$1  32 

$1  66 

5 

X 7 . 

44. . . 

62 

11  X 14. 

2 16.... 

2 64 

5^ 

X 8^. 

60. . . 

75 

14  X 17 

5 10... . 

6 60 

7 

X 9 . 

66... 

82 

15  X 19. 

628.... 

8 00 

8 

X 10  . 

82. . . 

. 1 00 

19  X 24. 

12  88. . . . 

16  00 

Schultze’s  Glass  Baths  in  Boxes. 


Fig.  1. 


Fig.  2. 


Without  Box,  Fig.  1. 


1-4  size,  for  plate  3':|  x 4!^  $ 75 


11  X 14  size,  for  plate  10  X 12  $ 3 50 


5x  7 
7x10 
9x  11 


414  X 514  95 

634  X 814  ^ 30 

8 X 10  2 00 


12  X 16 

15  x20 
18  x22 


With  Box,  Fig.  2. 


11  X 14  5 25 

14  X 17  16  00 
17  X 20  30  00 


5x7  size,  for  plate  434  x 534  $3  50 
7 X 10  “ 634  X 834  3 25 

9 X 11  “ 8 X 10  4 50 

11  X 14  10  X 12  7 00 


12  X 16  size,  for  plate  11  x 14  |8  75 
15  X 20  “ 14  X 17  18  75 

18  X 22  “ 17  X 20  40  00 


133 


CO.  new  yoIrk- 


Porcelain  Evaporating  Dishes. 

FINEST  BERLIN  WARE. 


No.  5.  2 pints 

$ 70 

No.  1.  1 gallon 

$1  80 

No.  4. 

3 “ 

90 

No.  0.  2 “ 

3 00 

No.  3. 
No.  2. 

2 quarts 

3 “ 

1 00 

1 50 

No.  00.  3 “ 

4 50 

Holloui  glass  Tubes  for  Silvering  paper. 

These  are  much  stronger  than  solid  rods. 


One  end  flattened  to  prevent  its  turning. 


This  cut  shows  the  ujaa..cr  v^i  adjusting  it  for  use. 

15  inches  long,  % inch  diameter,  each | 25 

19  “ “ % “ “ “ 40 


50 


pay  Gasl?  a^d  sav/e  tl?e  diseoapt. 


134 


ThP  S'QHULTZE.  PM  ©TO  - £Q  LPf  t'  Co.  YORK- 


flgalB-lPon  Evapopafliig  Dishes. 


No.  1.  Diameter,  5 inches;  Capacity,  1 pint f 50 

“ 2.  “ 8 “ “1  quart 75 

“ 3.  “ 9 “ “ 3^  gallon 1 00 

“4.  “ 12  “ “ 1 “ 1 65 

5.  “ 16  “ “ 2 “ 3 00 

“6.  “ 18  “ “ 3 “ 4 00 

“ 7.  “ 20  “ “ 4 “ 5 75 

8.  “ 22  “ “ 5 “ 8 50 

9.  “ 24  “ “ 6 “ 11  00 

“10.  “ 26  “ “ 7 “ 15  00 

“11.  “ 27  “ “ 8 “ 20  00 

“12.  “ 28  “ “ 9 “ 27  00 


GIiHSS  Gt^flOURTES. 


HYDROMETERS. 

Best  single  degree,  each $0  50 


GL-KSS  STIRRING  RODS. 


6 inch 

15  inch 

8 “ 

12 

18  “ 

....  30 

10  “ 

15 

20  “ 

35 

12  “ 

20 

25  “ 

40 

135 


Patent  Fluted  Funnel 


This  is  the  latest  and  best  Glass  Funnel  ever  made.  They  are  very 
strong,  are  blown  in  molds,  and  have  solid  glass  ribs  on  the  inside,  run- 
ning  vertically,  as  shown  in  cut,  thus  forming  passages  through  which 
the  solution  descends  freely  after  passing  through  the  paper,  and  accom- 
plishes the  filtration  in  a much  shorter  time. 


Quarter  pint 
Half  pint. . . . 

Pint 

Quart 

Two-quart. . , 


$0  20 
25 
30 
40 
75 


Class  Funnel  and  Filter. 


In  this  combination  of  Funnel  and  Filter  the  bulb  retains  the  filter- 
ing cotton  in  such  a manner  as  to  obviate  the  difficulty  experienced  in 
the  ordinary  funnel  from  the  cotton  being  compressed  too  tightly. 


136 


r Thp  S‘CHUL,rZE'  EQiriP/-\Et^t  Co.  /sf'£W  YORK*/ 


Quarter  pint $0  25 

Half  pint ijO 

Pint 40 

Quart 50 

Half  gallon 75 

One  gallon 1 00 

Two  gallons 1 40 


Plain  Glass  punnels. 

Quarter  pint $0  10 

Half  pint 15  • 

Pint 20 

Quart 25 

Two-quart 35 

One  gallon 55 

Two  gallons 90 


Polished  pubbep  Funnels. 

No.  0.  34  40 

“ 1.  34  45 

“ 2.  1 pint 50 

“ 3.  1 quart 65 


Funnel  Stand. 

With  three  removable  rings  for  supporting  funnels,  allowing  the  air 
to  escape  and  prevent  leakage,  etc.  Someihing  long  wante  It  will 
accommodate  three  funnels  at  the  same  time. 

Price,  each $1  50 


Effective  Collodion  Bottles. 


Price,  each 


10  15 


137 


>Tf)Q^.^cHi/L.TZ£  /v£w/  yo'rk.’ 


flpe  • RheacJ  • of  • flll  • OthePs. 


THEY  ARE  INDESTRUCTIBLE,  v WILL  NOT  CHIP, 
CRACK,  RUST  OR  BREAK. 


Low  in  Price.  Easily  Kept  Clean.  Very  Light. 


<]LooK  For  Our  Trade  Mark.i> 

NONE  GENUINE  WITHOUT  IT. 


# 

<#> 

Price: 

List. 

No. 

1. 

Capacity  34  pint.  Plain, 

$0  25 

Ribbed  for  filtering. . 

. . $0  30 

a 

2. 

(( 

% - 

30 

ii 

it 

35 

ti 

3. 

tt 

134  “ 

35 

ii 

40 

a 

4. 

it 

1 quart.  “ 

45 

ii 

ti 

55 

u 

5. 

ii 

IK  “ 

60 

ii 

it 

70 

a 

6. 

a 

2 

75 

a 

a 

85 

it 

7. 

it 

3 “ “ 

1 

00 

ii 

it 

..  1 15 

it 

8. 

a 

1 gallon.  “ 

1 

25 

a 

ti 

..  1 45 

SHEMRS. 


Per  Pair. 


10  inch,  heavy  straight  trimmer $1  50 

13  “ “ bent  “ 1 

15  “ ’ “ paper  shears 2 50 


138 


fflOf^rpAr^S  AND  ©ESIPLBS. 


No. 

5. 

2 oz. . . 

4^.  4 “ ... 

4. 

6 “ ... 

a 

3. 

8 “ ... 

a 

2. 

14  *‘  .. . 

i t 

1. 

20  “ . .. 

No. 

0. 

4 inches. 

a 

1. 

43^  “ . 

it 

2. 

5 “ . 

66 

3. 

6 “ . 

4. 

63^  “ . 

5. 

7 “ . 

•66 

6. 

8 “ . 

WEDGE^WOOD. 


$0  30 
35 
50 
65 


$0  55 
60 
70 
85 

1 00 
1 25 


$0  50 
60 
75 
90 
1 15 
1 35 
1 65 


eppiGIBNT  ^LATB  LilPiPBI^. 


Tij  raise  plates  out  of  the  solution  without  dipping  in  the  fingers. 
Price $0  15 


@UPPS. 


For  photographers’  use,  to  prevent  soiling  the  sleeves  and  cuffs  while 
developing. 

Price,  per  pair $0  60 

FILTBP^ING  (©OTIPON. 

ABSORBENT. 


Absolutely  pure.  Free  from  any  foreign  matter.  Photographers 
will  find  it  a rapid  and  effective  Filter — the  most  economical  of  all  sub- 
stances used  for  that  purpose. 

1 lb.  package $0  85 

34  “ “ 50 

34  “ “ 30 

2 oz.  “ 20 


139 


r CO.  /^£W  YORK* 


Nepllre  Clasp  aal  Dm 


SapporL 


By  its  use  there  is  no  need  of  wetting  or 
staining  the  fingers  in  the  developer,  or  of 
touching  a plate  until  after  it  has  been  de- 
veloped, varnished  and  dried.  Adaptable  for 
all  sizes,  from  3^  x to  8 x 10,  inclusive. 

Each $0  15 


Adjn^taMB  Developing  Fon^. 


As  seen  by  the  cut,  this  is  for  holding  the  Dry  Plate  during  develop- 
ing and  washing.  It  entirely  prevents  soiling  of  hands,  and  by  its  aid  the 
plate  is  easily  examined  and  leturned  to  solution,  saving  necessity  of 
ridges  and  elevations  on  bottom  of  tray  to  prevent  capillary  attraction. 
They  are  made  in  two  sizes,  nickel  plated. 

No.  1,  for  plates  334  X 4^  to  5 X 8, 

“2,  “ 4x5  “ 8 X 10 


140 


,$0  60 
90 


w 


r/}p  S'CHUkTZE  PHOTO- EQ  if  [PZ\EJ^T  Co.  /w£W  YORK' 


FOLDING  NEGATIVE  RACK. 


A conveinient  and  inexpensive  dark-room  accessory. 

Price $0  50 


FILIVI  CARRIERS. 

^-INCH  THICK,  FOR  DRY  PLATE  HOLDERS. 

each 25  cents.  63^x83^,  each 40  cents. 

4x5,  each 30  “ 8x10,  each 50  “ 

5x8,  “ 35  “ 

Five  sizes  only. 


FILM  CARRIERS. 


j3^-INCH  thick,  for  wet  plate  holders. 


5x7,  each 

5x8,  “ 

634x834,  each 
8x10,  each. . . . 
10x12,  “ ... 

11x14,  “ ... 


SQUEEGEES..  (Velvet  Rubber.) 

6 inch 40  cents.|8  inch 50  cents. |12  inch 75  cents. 


HARD  RUBBER  PLATES. 


FOR  DRYING  PAPER  NEGATIVES. 


4x5  inch  thick 

g\  inch  thick,  each 

5x7,  “ 

18  “ 

iC 

“ 

5x8,  “ 

20  “ 

30 

6^x834,  “ 

30  “ 

(t 

.....45  “ 

8x10,  “ 

40  “ 

6i 

141 


^ if{ P/AfA" 7*  CO.  /V£ na/  YO R K • 


ADAMANTEAN  FERROTYPE  PLATES. 

Egg-shell.  Glossy. 

Box  of  8 doz.,  Black  or  Chocolate  Tint,  1-9  Size $0  80  $0  90 


“ 8 “ 

ii 

ii 

“ 1-6  “ 

. . 1 25 

1 35 

“ 8 “ 

ii 

ii 

“ 1-4  “ 

. . 1 85 

2 CO 

<<  4 “ 

“ 

i i 

<<  1.9,  “ 

, . . 2 20 

2 35 

.<  4 “ 

ii 

“ 434x634  size. . . . 

. . . 2 20 

2 35 

(<  4 “ 

it 

“5x7  “ .... 

. . . 2 40 

2 70 

“ 2 “ 

ii 

ii 

“6^x814  “ .... 

. . . 2 40 

2 70 

“ 2 “ 

ii 

a 

“7x10  “ ... 

. . . 2 70 

2 90 

200  Sheets 

ii 

ii 

“10x14  “ .... 

. . . 28  00 

30  00 

The  "best  and  most  uniform  plates  in  the  market. 


FERROTYPE  PLATES. 

Eureka,  Box  of  200, 10x14  Egg-shell,  Blk.  orChT’te,  $20  00,  GI0SS7,  $22  00 
Union  “ “ “ “ “ 15  00,Perdoz.  90 

Centennial  “ “ “ Black  only,  10  00,  “ 60 

Columbia  “ “ “ “ 7 00,  “ 50 


ARGENTIC  DRY  PLATES  FOR  POSITIVES. 

MANUFACTURED  BY  THE  PHENIX  PLATE  CO. 

The  Phenix  Plate  Co.’s  Instantaneous  Argentic  Dry  Plate  will  be 
found  far  superior  to  any  other  form  of  Positive  Plate,  giving,  as  it  does, 
the  maximum  of  beautiful  effects  with  a minimum  of  labor,  producing  a 
rich  and  brilliant  picture  with  rapidity  and  cleanliness,  doing  away,  as 
they  do,  with  the  use  of  a silver  bath  and  all  its  concomitant  evils — pin- 
holes, stains,  fog,  etc., — not  forgetting  the  vast  saving  in  time  and 
temper. 

The  Argentic  Plate  is  always  ready  at  hand,  and  the  working  of  it  is 
simplicity  itself. 

An  exposure  of  from  one  to  three  seconds  will  suffice  with  a good 
light,  two  minutes  to  develop,  three  to  five  to  fix,  wash,  dry  and  varnish,, 
and  the  operation  is  complete— ready  within  ten  minutes  for  delivery. 
For  out-door  work  these  Plates  work  well  with  a drop-shutter  exposure. 


Per  box  of  2 dozen,  x 4}4 $0  90 

“ “ 2 “ 4 X 5 1 25 

“ “ 2 “ 4>^x  534 1 50 

“ 2 “ 414  X 61^ 1 80 

“ “ 2 “ 5 X 7 2 00 

“ 2 “ 5 X 8 2 25 

“ “ 2 “ 634  X 8K 3 75 

“ “ 2 “ 7 X 10  4 00-  \ 

“ “ 2 “ 8 X 10  4 50 

“ “ 1 “ 10  X 14  4 00 

Phenix  stock  solution,  per  12-ounce  bottle 25 

Argentic  Varnish,  “ 6 “ 50 


142 


THE  PHOTOGRAPHER’S  TENT. 

Persons  ordering  tents  C.  O.  D.  will  please  send  one-half  the  money 
in  advance.  Made  of  any  size  to  order,  and  furnished  in  a few  days. 


Roof  made  of  8-ounce  U.  S.  A.  Standard  duck,  and  ends  and  side 
walls  of  8-ounce  twill.  Priced  ready  for  shipment. 

^ ^’1*  Height.  Size.  Regular.  Mildew-proof. 

5 feet 10  feet 12  x 21 $45  00 |50  00 

5 “ 12  “ 16x21 50  00 ' 60  00 


Nine-ounce  brown  duck  dark  room,  $15  00  extra. 


NEGATIVE  BOXES. 


Holding  24  1-9 
“ 24  1-6 

Plates 

“ 24  1-4 

“ 24  1-2 

i ( 

“ 24  4 X 

24  4’_^x 

5 Plates  

63^  “ 

70 

214  X 

8 “ 

8 ) 

U 5 X 

7 “ 

215  X 

8 “ 

88 

“ 24  4-4 

“ 24  8 X 

10  “ 

“ 24  10  X 

12  “ 

2 00 

“ 1 3 11  X 

14  “ 

12  1 4 X 

17  “ 

8 50 

“ 12  17  X 

20  “ 

4 .50 

“ 12  20  X 

24  “ 

Special  sizes  to  hold  any  number  of  plates  required,  made  to  order. 
Above  1. lacked  ir.side  and  fitted  with  lock  and  key,  $1.00  extra. 


143 


®hej|andall  Photo  lurnisher. 

(PATENTED  FEBRUARY  5,  1889.) 

I-OJa£  F=RICe,  HIGH  Q\_IML.IXY. 

HEATED  IN  FIVE  MINUTES  BY  OIL  OR  GAS. 

STUVOKie  DISOHMRGOD  KT  GNDS. 

Adjusted  by  ONE  StlREW  to  thickness  of  Photo,  Nickel-plated  Roll 
and  Burnishing  Surface. 

Simple,  Efficient  and  Economical. 


Price,  6)^  incli,  with  Oil  or  Gas  Heater,  boxed $8  00 

“ 1034  “ “ “ “ 12  00 

“ 153^  “ “ » “ 18  00 

To  tho  many  who  have  been  waiting  for  the  appearance  of  a low- 
priced,  yet  thoroughly  good  burnisher,  we  offer  the  above,  which,  not- 
withstanding its  low  price,  possesses  advantages  previously  found  only  in 
high-priced  burnishers. 

This  machine  is  heated  by  a coal  oil  lamp  or  a gas  heater  in  five 
minutes;  and  the  smoke  is  discharged  at  the  ends,  so  as  not  to  soil  the 
roll  of  the  burnishing  surface.  It  has  a nickel-plated  burnishing  surface 
13.4  inches  wide,  which  is  raised  or  lowered,  according  to  the  thickness  of 
the  photo,  by  the  hand-screw  in  front.  Should  the  burnishing  surface 
bcfcome  scratched,  its  pivot  bolts  can  be  moved  forward  slightly,  bringing 
a fresh  port  on  of  its  surface  into  play;  and  the  process  can  be  repeated 
until  the  entire  surface  needs  re-burnishing.  This  is  effected  by  rubbing 
it  lengthwise  with  crocus  cloth  wrapped  around  a soft  stick,  the  roll  hav- 
ing been  previously  removed.  The  feed  roll  is  13^^  inches  in  diameter, 
and  is  nickel-plated.  Should  it  ever  become  necessary,  it  ran  be  easily 
and  accurately  re-levelled  with  reference  to  the  burnishing  surface  by 
means  of  the  set  screws  holding  the  removable  journal  boxes,  and  it  can 
be  easily  removed  from  the  main  frame.  The  machine  is  also  provided 
with  stop  screws,  to  prevent  any  accidental  touching  of  ihe  burnishing 
surface  and  the  roll.  A coal  oil  lamp  and  a wrench  are  furnished  with 
each  burnisher.  A gas  heater  is  substituted  for  the  lamp  when  desired. 


144 


^ Th’Q  S' Q HU  LX  ZE.  PHOro-EQ[j(PZ\WTOG.  next 


The  Quadruplex  Enameler. 


Patented  February  3,  1885,  and  June  1,  1886. 

Improvement  No.  1 consists  of  a new  device  for  regulating  the  pres- 
sure on  the  cards  by  means  of  one  hand  screw  instead  of  two,  as  hereto- 
fore used,  making  the  pressure  uniform  and  positive  the  whole  length  of 
the  roll. 

Improvement  No.  2 consists  of  such  an  arrangement  of  four  cogs  as 
enables  the  operator  to  adjust  the  distance  between  the  rollers  to  accom- 
modate any  thickness  of  card,  from  the  very  thinnest  to  the  heaviest 
made,  without  visibly  disconnecting  or  separating  the  cogs  from  each 
other,  causing  the  rollers  to  revolve  just  as  smoothly,  and  the  gearing  to 
operate  just  as  perfectly  on  thick  as  on  thin  cards. 

Improvement  No.  3 covers  the  general  construction  of  the  machine. 

Improvement  No.  4 consists  of  the  beautiful  finish  given  these 
machines.  They  are  full  nickel-plated  all  over.  They  are  a handsome 
ornament  for  any  studio. 

Improvement  No.  5 consists  of  a new  kerosene  heater  of  our  own 
design,  which  will  heat  them  up  fully  one-third  quicker  than  those  here- 
tofore used. 

The  finish  given  to  photographs  with  this  machine  is  superior  in 
brilliancy  to  many  “enameled”  pictures  we  have  seen,  and  much  more 
durable  than  enamel.  No  lubricator  used.  No  scratches  possible.  No 
soiling  of  prints, 

10  inch $25  CO  I 20  inch $45  00 

15  “ 35  0 I .5  “ 55  00 

Gas  or  oil  heaters  included. 


145 


TAP  LTi r CO.  NEW  york^ 


THE  NEW  KC7VIE 

PATENT  FLUE  HEATING 

PHOTO  BURNISHER. 


11  and  15  Inch  New  Acme  with  G-as  Heater. 

Patented  Jan.  25,  1876.  Patented  Jan.  18,  1886.  Patented  Feb.  28,  1888. 
Also  Patents  for  Europe  and  Canada. 


21  and  26  Inch  New  Acme  with  Oil  Heater, 

work ! complication ! Simplicity  itself  I 

Strong  and  durable.  Most  economical.  Best  results.  No  soot.  It 
can  be  heated  in  five  minutes.  No  moisture  on  Feed  Roll  or  Polishing 
Tool.  Perfect  combustion.  No  smoke.  Positively  no  oil  from  bear- 
ings on  face  of  Polishing  Tool  or  Feed  Roll.  New  style,  handsome 
design,  all  nickel  finish.  Heat  gauged  by  thermometer  and  held  at  one 
point  by  raising  or  lowering  lamp  wick.  Burns  less  Gas  or  Oil  than 
any  other  Burnisher  made. 

As  we  use  only  a small  lamp  with  a five-inch  wick  the  heat  is  all 
confined  in  the  flue  and  carried  off  at  the  ends  and  rear  of  same,  away 


146 


Th Q S'c HUU TZ k PH oro  - £Q  7-  C O • /v£.vs^  YORK- 


from  the  picture  and  operator,  and  not,  as  in  our  old  style  burnishers, 
at  the  extreme  ends  and  thence  through  an  opening  made  for  that  purpose 
in  the  standards.  There  is  perfect  combustion  in  the  flue,  consequently 
no  soot  to  trouble  you.  The  tension  is  uniform  and  positive  the 
whole  length  of  the  tool.  The  turning  of  a small  hand  wheel,  con- 
veniently situated,  and  always  perfectly  cool,  being  all  that  is  neces- 
sary for  any  thickness  of  card.  Each  machine  has  a special  Horizontal 
Thermometer  attached,  which  will  indicate  precisely  what  degree  of 
heat  your  Burnishing  Tool  has,  and  can  be  regulated  to  any  degree  of 
heat  desired  by  increasing  or  diminishing  the  same.  The  Burnishing 
Tool  is  a hollow  flue  with  a convex  or  circular  surface,  which  will  be 
readily  appreciated  as  a great  improvement  over  the  flat  burnishing 
surface  existing  in  our  old  styles.  As  the  convex  surface  reduces  the 
friction  to  a minimum,  resting  on  three  points  of  bearing,  it  can  be 
instantly  attached,  avoiding  the  objectionable  delay  in  all  other  burn- 
ishers of  unbolting  and  unscrewing  extra  pieces.  It  is  highly  polished 
and  so  thoroughly  hardened  that  it  is  impossible  for  it  to  become 
scratched  and  will  wear  longer  than  any  other  Burnishing  Tool 
made.  There  is  no  possibility  of  any  moisture  forming  or  condensing 
on  the  Feed  Roll  or  Polishing  Tool  during  the  process  of  heating.  The 
Feed  Roll  being  made  hollow,  thereby  creates  an  air  chamber  through 
its  center  from  end  to  end.  This  positively  avoids  the  serious  danger 
of  spoiling  the  Polishing  Tool  or  picture  by  coming  in  contact  with 
such  moisture  a.s  is  unavoidably  the  case  with  all  other  Photo  Burnish- 
ers. The  Milled  or  Knurled  surface  of  the  Feed  Roll,  also  its  Hollow 
Construction,  and  the  Thermometer,  are  fully  covered  by  our  patents 
and  cannot  be  used  by  makers  of  other  burnishers.  The  Feed  Roll  will 
always  retain  its  roughness  and  will  invariably  carry  the  picture 
through  without  any  stopping  on  the  hot  tool.  The  effect  of  the 
knurling  on  the  Feed  Roll  is  to  leave  a very  desirable  nnish  on  the 
back  of  all  mounts,  and  is  not  subject  to  the  serious  objection  of  draw 
filed  Feed  Rolls.  Our  twenty -one  and  twenty-six  inch  can  be  heated 
ready  for  use  in  five  minutes,  and  are  virtually  two  burnishers  in  one, 
as  they  can  be  used  for  all  kinds  of  work  without  additional  expense 
by  simply  using  one  Heater  for  small  work.  The  shield  covering  top 
of  Feed  Roll  will  always  prevent  any  dirt  coming  in  contact  with  same 
or  getting  on  Polishing  Tool.  The  ends  of  Polishing  Tool  and  Feed 
Roll  are  so  constructed  that  it  is  impossible  for  any  oil  from  the  bear- 
ings to  get  on  the  face  of  either. 

([t^”In  ordering,  state  which  is  desired.  Oil  or  Gas  heaters. 

Full  directions  for  use  with  each  Machine. 

PRICE  LIST. 


11-inch  roll  with  Gas  or  Oil  Heater $25.00 

15  “ “ “ “ “ 35.00 

21  “ “ “ “ “ 55.00 

26  “ “ “ “ “ 65.00 


147 


York- 


EXTRAS. 

Extra  Thermometer $1.00 

“ Gas  Heater 1.75 

“ Oil  Heater 1.75 

Portable  Rack  for  Gas  or  Oil  heater 1.00 

Single  gas  pipe  attachment  for  rubber  tubing 50 

Double  gas  pipe  attachment  for  rubber  tubing 1.00 


New  Antimony  gas  tubing  in  lengths  of  3,  6, 9 and  12  feet,  at  20c.  per  foot. 
Extra  lamp  stove  wicks,  by  mail,  10c. 


EntreMn’s  Amerian  Rotary  Burnisher. 


This  burnisher  has  the  one-wheel,  quick-acting  center  adjustment. 
One  of  the  greatest  advantages  is  the  facility  the  operator  has  to  readjust 
the  rolls  in  case  of  uneven  wear  of  the  journals  and  boxes  by  the  lock-nut 
and  set  screw  placed  at  each  end  of  the  roll.  Perfect  adjustment  and 
pressure  can  be  maintained  at  all  times  by  simply  loosening  the  lock-nut, 
adjusting  the  roll  with  the  set  screw,  and  then  tightening  the  lock-nut. 
This  is  only  to  be  done  when  the  adjustment  has  become  impaired  by 
wear  and  constant  use  of  the  machine.  We  furnish  a two-end  wrench 
with  each  machine  for  this  purpose. 

10-inch  roll,  each $20  00  1 20-inch  roll,  each $35  00 

15  “ “ 25  00  I 25  “ “ 45  00 

148 


i 


S'CHUMTZE. 


EaMii’s  New  Men  Eoiarr  finber 

WITH  TURN-BACK  ROLL 

HAS  SWINGING  FIRE  PAN.  NEW  STYLE.  NEW  IN  PRINCIPLE. 
EASY  TO  WORK. 


(Patented  October  16,  1885,  and  February  15,  1887.) 


The  latest,  with  quick-acting  one-wheel  adj”stment,  by  which  the 
pressure  can  be  quickly  regulated  even  while  the  machine  is  in  motion. 

It  consists  of  two  steel  rollers,  one  above  the  other.  The  upper  draw- 
filed  or  roughened  roll,  the  lower  one  being  polished,  and  both  are  nickel- 
plated.  The  gearing  is  so  arranged  that  the  lower,  or  polishing  roller, 
revolves  faster  than  the  upper,  or  roughened  feed  roller,  thus  producing, 
by  a frictional  process,  a burnish  which  is  impossible  to  excel. 

This  Burnisher  is  so  constructed  that  the  upper  portion  of  the  frame, 
with  the  roughened  or  feed  roll  and  its  bearing  boxes,  can  be  thrown  over  , 
to  one  side  away  from  the  burnishing  roll.  This  is  of  great  importance  . 
when  the  machine  is  being  first  heated  before  commencing  to  work,  for 
during  the  operation  of  heating,  moisture  has  a tendency  to  condense  | 
upon  the  upper  or  roughened  feed  roll,  and  drop  from  the  same  on  the 
burnishing  roll,  which  causes  rust,  and  impairs  the  polished  surface  of  I 
the  roll.  \ 

Directions. — Just  before  heating,  take  out  the  two  small  pins,  and 
throw  the  upper  roll  away  from  the  lower  roll,  so  as  to  avoid  the  moisture 
dropping  on  the  polished  surface  of  the  same.  To  secure  the  best  results,  ' 
the  polishing  roll  must  be  as  hot  as  a laundry  iron  when  in  use,  and  per- 
fectly clean.  No  lubricator  required  with  these  mach  nes.  Use  Entrekin’s 
Diamond  Paste  for  polishing  and  cleansing  the  bm  nishing  roll.  Price, 
per  box,  20  cents. 

Prices  including  either  Gas  Heaters  or  Oil  Stoves. 

10-inch $25  (■  I 2^  -inch ' $35  00 

15  “ 30  00  I 25  “ 45  00 

149 


Entrekin-S  Eureka  Burnisher. 


The  Burnisher  can  be  heated  with  any  kind  of  lamp — alcohol,  coal  oil, 
? or  gas.  During  the  process  of  heating,  the  roll  can  be  turned  back  from 
the  burnishing  tool,  thereby  preventing  the  condensation  of  moisture 
forming  on  the  roll  or  t ol. 

To  dress  the  burni'shing  tool,  the  roll  is  simply  turned  back  from  the 
tool  in  an  instant.  No  Lot  plates  to  handle,  and  consequently  no  burnt 
fingers. 

This  machine  has  also  the  patent  removable  burnishing  tool,  which  is 
a decided  advantage. 

6-inch  roll |13  CO  I 14-inch  roll $30  00 

10  “ 20  00  I 20  “ 50  00 

25-inch  roll $65  00 


EnWin’s  Accnrate  Rotary  Bornisher. 

The  Latest — Patented  January  11,  1887. 


With  swing  fire  pan  and  one  screw-wheel  adjustment,  this  is  the  most 
perfect  device  ever  applied  to  a photograph  burnisher  for  securing  the 


^ T/)g  srQHULXZE.  PHOro-EQ\J\P>\Wr  C,^.  YORK* 


pressure  and  giving  perfect  accuracy  of  adjustment  with  one  motion. 
Another  great  advantage  is  the  facility  the  photographer  has  to  readjust 
the  rolls  in  case  of  uneven  wear  of  the  journals  and  boxes  by  the  lock  nut 
and  set  screws  placed  upon  the  wedges  at  each  end  of  the  roll ; perfect 
adjustment  can  be  maintained  at  all  times  by  simply  loosening  the  lock 
nut,  adjusting  the  roll  with  the  set  screw,  and  then  tightening  the 
lock  nut.  This  is  only  to  be  done  when  the  adjustment  has  become  im- 
paired by  wear  of  the  machine  from  long  and  constant  use.  We  send 
with  each  machine  a two-end  wrench  for  this  purpose. 

PRICES. 

10-inch  roll $20  00  I 20  inch  roll $35  00 

15  “ 25  O')  I 25  “ 45  00 

Prices  include  either  the  Oil  Stove  or  Gas  Burner.  The  former  sent 
unless  specified. 


THE  BEST  IN  THE  MARKET. 


Excelsior  Paste. 


FOR  MOUNTING  PHOTOGRAPHS. 


Will  keep  any  length  of  time  in  any 
climate.  Will  never  ferment,  become  sour, 
mouldy  or  offensive.  Will  remain  moist  even 
after  much  exposure  to  the  air.  Its  adhesive 
qualities  are  unsurpassed,  it  has  a pleasing 
pearly  color,  and  it  leaves  no  stain  upon  the 
card  mount.  If  found  too  thick  it  can  be 
thinned  with  cold  water. 


PRICES. 


1 pint  bottle 

25 

1 quart  bottle 

45 

34  gallon  bottle 

90 

1 gallon  bottle 

75 

5 gallon  keg 

00 

10  gallon  keg 

50‘ 

151 


DARK  ROOM  LAMPS. 


STUDENT  RUBY  LAMP. 


The  accompanying  illustration  represents 
a new  oil  lamp  for  use  in  developing  dry 
plates.  It  is  expressly  made  for  the  purpose; 
the  chimney-  is  of  ruby- colored  glass,  of  the 
proper  and  most  desirable  tint,  and  sur- 
mounted  with  a movable  top  to  intercept  the 
upward  radiation  of  the  light  of  the  lamp, 
and  there  is  also  perfect  protection  against 
the  downward  radiation 


PRICES  : 

No*  I SizCy  " “ $ j * 25* 
No.  2 Size,  - - 1.60. 


I.  C.  POCKET  RUBY  LANTERN. 


Used  when  putting  dry  plates 
into  the  holders,  and  also  when 
developing  them. 


Price,  - 60  cts. 


152 


The  UNXLD  Dark  Room  LanteriL 


This  is  beyond  question 
the  acme  of  perfection  in 
dark  room  lanterns.  The 
following*  are  some  of  its 
many  ad  vantag’es  : 1 1 

saves  your  eyesight;  it  is 
simple  and  easy  to  manage, 
and  has  no  complicated 
mechanism  to  get  out  of 
order;  it  is  provided  with 
an  oil  lamp,  fitted  with  an 
improved  Argand  burner, 
capable  of  a great  volume 
of  light  when  desired ; the 
ventilation  is  perfect,  hence 
no  danger  of  overheating; 
it  is  so  constructed  that  not  the  least  particle  of  white  light 
can  escape;  the  flame  is  regulated  and  controlled  from  the 
outside;  it  is  a perfectly  safe  light  for  the  most  sensitive 
plates,  and  sufficient  to  develop  the  largest  size;  it  can 
quickly  be  arranged  for  examining  negatives  or  positives 
after  fixing  by  opal  or  orange  light,  and  for  preparing  de- 
veloper or  doing  other  work,  the  room  can  be  instantly 
flooded  with  white  light,  and  as  quickly  changed  to  red 
again. 


Price,  complete,  • - - - $5.50. 


Petite  Dry  Plate  Lantern. 


This  little  lantern  will  be  found  quite  su- 
perior to  any  offered  at  a similar  price.  It 
is  fitted  for  illumination  by  means  of  a can- 
dle, and  is  much  to  be  preferred  to  an  oil 
consumer  on  account  of  safety  and  cleanli- 
ness. The  light  emitted  is  abundant,  and 
the  ventilation  perfect. 


Price,  - - - - 85  cts. 


153 


SUPERIOR  RUBY  LAMP-forGas. 


This  is  the  best  g-as-burning*  ruby  lamp  in 
the  market.  It  is  handsomer  in  appearance 
and  has  many  advantages  over  others.  It  is 
fitted  with  improved  incandescent  burner,  giv- 
ing the  greatest  illumination  with  the  least 
consumption  of  gas ; the  chimney  is  copper- 
flashed  ruby,  with  protection  against  the  escape 
of  the  least  particle  of  white  light.  The  stan- 
dard is  of  iron,  nicely  japanned,  and  the  other 
parts  are  of  brass,  well  finished. 


Price, 


$2.50. 


Par  Excellence  Candle  Ruby  Light. 

The  accompanying  cut  represents  the  Par 
Excellence  Candle  Ruby  Light,  for  developing 
the  most  sensitive  dry  plates.  With  this  lamp, 
there  is  no  danger  of  explosion,  no  breaking  of 
chimney  from  overheating,  no  oil  to  spill  while 
traveling,  no  disagreeable  smell  while  at  work 
in  the  dark  room,  and  no  possibility  of  smoke. 
The  lamp  is  always  ready  for  use,  and  nothing 
to  get  out  of  order ; its  mechanism  is  perfect 
and  understood  instantly;  it  is  without  doubt 
the  most  perfect  construction  in  the  shape  of  a 
ruby  developing  lamp  evQ^  introduced.  Its  outside  meas- 
urement, when  packed  for  transportation,  is  only  7'^  x 2^ 
inches,  and  its  weight  only  11^  ounces. 


Price,  - - - - $1.35* 

RUBY  AND  ORANGE  FABRIC. 

A very  desirable  article  for  lighting  dark  rooms.  Price  per  square 
yard,  either  shade,  60  cents. 

VITRO  METALTQUE. 

A non-breaV  able  and  flexible  glass  of  most  desirable  ruby  tint,  giving 
a light  very  soft  and  agreeable  to  the  eyes.  Per  square  foot,  60  cents. 
Per  square  yard,  $5.00. 


154 


S'QHULXZE.  f^HOro- EO^[P/\Et^T  CG-  NE'^  YORK* 


THE  “ALADDIN"  DARK  ROOM  LAMP. 

(PATENT  APPLIED  FOR.) 

This  Lamp  gives  several  times  as  much  light  as  the 
ordinary  Kuby  Lamp  for  equal  safety  to  plate,  and  the 
light  is  of  a soft  rich  yellow  color,  renosing  to  the  eye- 
sight and  nerves. 

No  Smoke,  no  odor;  a revolution  in  dark  room 
illumination.  The  Lamp  is  made  in  two  styles:  the 
Table  Lamp  and  the  Bracket  Lamp,  the  former  hav- 
ing a cast-iron  base  and  the  latter  a socket  which  can 
be  instantly  slipped  on  or  off  of  any  gas  bracket  with- 
out disturbing  the  ordinary  burner. 

In  ordering  please  state  if  TABLE  LAMP  or 
BRACKET  LAMP  is  desired. 

PRICE  IS  THE  SAI?IE  FOR  ROTH. 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  USE, 


Bracket  Lamp. 


Turn  on  gas  and  light  when  ail  the  air  in  tubing  is 
expelled.  Without  the  wick  the  Lamp  should  bum 
with  a blue,  colorless  flame.  Slide  wick  down  over 
lamp  t'lbe  until  it  rests  on  chimney,  holder,  and  regu- 
late height  so  that  wick  projects  about  one-eighth  of  an 
iinch  above  rim  of  lamp  tube  and  the  flame  takes  a 
rich  yellow  color.  Put  on  non-actinic  amber  chim- 
ney, and  if  gas  pressure  is  too  strong  turn  down  gas 
tmtil  lamp  burns  with  an  even,  steady 
flame.  The  lamp  will  burn  several 
hours  before  any  perceptible  decrease  in 
the  strength  of  the  light  takes  place, 
when  a turn  or  two  of  the  chimney 
holder  will  raise  the  wick  a trifle  and 
restore  the  brilliancy  of  the  light.  One 
wick  will  burn  about  one  hundred 
hours  before  it  requires  to  be  replaced 
by  a new  one. 

No  Trimming  of  Lamp  is  required  as 

the  wick  gradually  consumes  itself  as 
it  is  raised. 

The  lamp  can  also  be  used  as  a heat- 
ing lamp  for  the  laboratory.  When 
maximum  heat  is  desired,  unscrew  lamp 
tube,  reverse  brass  sleeve  so  that  the 
larger  circular  air-holes  are  available, 
and  insert  extra  brass  tip,  which  is  fur- 
nished with  each  lamp,  and  which  ad- 
mits a larger  supply  of  gas.  For 
dark  room  illumination  or  emulsion 
work  restore  lamp  to  its  original 
shape. 

Table  Lamp. 

Price  of  “ Aliiddin  ” Dark  Room  Lamp,  including  non-  ) ^ 
actinic  amber  chimney,  extra  brass  lip  and  box  of  > 
wicks,  complete  in  wooden  box,  - - - _ , j ^ 

Extra  Boxes  of  Wicks,  sufficient  for  one  thousand  hours  lighting,  per 


box. 

Extra  non-actinic  amber  chimneys,  each 


85  Cents. 
30  Cents. 


155 


^ r/)^  S'CHUL.TZE  PHoro^EQiriP>\El^r  oo.  /v£\^  yorR^- 


CLASS  PATTERNS. 


Carte  de  Visite — Oval,  Arch,  or  R.  C.,  each $0  25- 

Stereo.  Cards — Square  or  Arch,  “ 35 

Victoria  Cards — Oval,  Arch,  or  R.  C.,  “ 35 

Imperial  Cards — “ “ “ “ 50 

4x5  40 

5x8 60 

6^  X Oval  or  Square 75 

7x9,  “ “ 100 

8x10,  “ “ 135 


SCHULTZE’S  IMPROVED  PRINTING  FRAMES. 

(Supplied  with  backs  cut  | and  f.) 

Our  printing  frames  have  been  greatly  improved  by  the  placing  of  a 
washer  under  the  spring,  thereby  saving  the  wear  and  tear  of  the  wood-  . 
work,  and  the  springs  are  fa-  ten^d  with  rivets  instead  of  screws. 


Size. 

Flat. 

Deep. 

Size, 

Flat. 

Deep.^ 

314  X 4^ 

$0  36 

11  X 14 

$1  80 

$2  40 

4 X 5 

38 

14  X 17 

2 40 

3 00 

4Mx  534 

40 

16  X 20 

3 00 

4 20 

4^  X 61/2 

42 

17  X 20 

3 00 

4 50 

5 X 7 

50 

18  X 22 

4 00 

5 00 

.5  X 8 ... 

52 

2()  X 24 

5 00 

5 25 

61.^  X 8^ 

60 

$1*20 

24  X 30 

8 80 

8 X 10  

75 

1 40 

35  X 45 

15  00 

10  X 12  

1 00 

1 60 

30  X 60 

20  00 

When  the  backs  open  lengthwise,  10  per  cent,  additional  is  charged. 


SCHULTZE’S  Favorite  printing  frames. 


5 X 8 ....  $0 
6Kx8K.... 

8 X 10  .... 


52 

60 

75 


314  X 4>^. . . . $0  36 

4 x5  ....  38 

3^x6^....  42 

5 x7  ....  50 


Having  been  requested  to  make  a lighter  Printing  Frame  than  our 
regular  flat  frame,  we  comply  and  place  the  Favorite  on  the  market  with 


156 


p T'z g TS^^'  /v£:w"  york* 


the  full  confidence  that  it  will  prove  all  that  the  name  implies.  While 
the  Favorite  is  much  lighter  than  the  ordinary  flat  printing  frame, 
they  are  equal  in  strength  and  durability,  making  them  especially 
desirable  for  amateurs. 

These  frames  have  the  same  style  of  spring,  etc.,  as  Schultze’s  Im- 
proved Flat  Printing  Frame,  the  backs  also  being  cut  in  the  same  manner. 


PRINTING  FRAME  PADS. 

Good  felt  pads  for  the  printing  frame  have  long  been  in  demand.  To 
nipply  this  want,  we  have  provided  them  in  the  following  sizes: 


X 

4 X 
4!4'  X 

5 X 


5^, 

7, 


per  dozen. 


$0  35 
40 
45 
60 
70 


5 X 
6^x 

8 X 

10  X 

11  X 


8,  per  dozen. 

10, 

12, 

14, 


$0  80 
1 08 

1 75 

2 40 

3 00 


iliBT’S  MTENT  POINTING  PPAME. 

THE  PRINTING  FRAME  OF  THE  FUTURE. 

Back-Board  Patented  July  5,  1887.  Tally  Patented  January  24,  1888- 
Support  Patented  April  17,  188S. 


The  Most  Practically  Constructed  Frame  in  the  Market. 


157 


ThQ  S'CHULTZE.  PHordrEOlriPHih'T  cb 


ADT»S  PATENT  BACK-BOARD. 

As  will  be  seen  by  a glance  at  the  cut,  the  adjacent  edges  of  the  parts 
of  the  back-board  are  beveled  outward,  and  the  hinges  placed  on  the  sides 
with  their  axes  on  a line  with  the  surface.  This  permits  the  attachment 
to  the  face  of  the  back-board  of  a Heavy,  Continuous,  Elastic  Felt  Pad, 
manufactured  especially  for  this  particular  purpose.  This  obviates  the 
necessity  of  using  a separate  pad,  which  is  so  easily  misplaced  and  lost. 
It  will  be  seen  that  there  is  absolutely  no  strain  on  the  pad  in  opening 
and  closing  the  back-board,  as  it  in  no  ivay  acts  as  a hinge,  and  will  not 
become  worn  at  the  joint  in  the  back-board,  the  hinges  being  of  metal 
and  placed  on  the  sides. 

This  particular  construction  and  manner  of  hinging  can  be  used 
without  a pad,  which  demonstrates  the  fact  that  the  pad  does  not  act  as  a 
hinge. 

This  back-board  requires  no  special  catch  to  prevent  it  from  moving. 

ADT’S  PATENT  SUPPORT. 

Adt’s  Patent  Printing  Frames  are  now  supplied  (without  extra  charge) 
with  Adt’s  Patent  Support,  with  which  the  frame  can  be  stood  on  eith^er 
end,  and  at  four  different  angles,  for  exposure  while  printing. 

One  great  advantage  of  this  support,  in  addition  to  its  convenience  in 
supporting  the  frame,  arises  from  tlie  fact  that  it  is  out  of  the  way  of  the 
printer  when  introducing  the  paper,  or  examining  the  print,  for  when  the 
frame  lies  or  is  held  with  the  back  up,  the  support  instantly  drops  upon 
its  stops  for  rest,  and  is  entirely  out  of  the  way  of  the  hand  of  the  printer, 
so  that  he  may  remove  or  open  the  back-board,  or  replace  it,  as  if  there 
were  no  support  present.  Again,  it  being  arranged  close  around  the  sides 
and  ends  of  the  frame,  it  occupies  so  litile  space  as  not  to  interfere  with 
the  packing  or  storage  of  the  frames,  and  when  the  printer  places  his 
frame  for  exposure  the  support  readily  finds  its  portion  for  supporting  the 
frame  without  any  special  manipulation  by  the  printer. 

ADT’S  PATENT  TALLY. 

Another  valuable  feature  is  Adt’s  Patent  Tally,  which,  without  any 
exception,  is  the  best,  strongest  and  simplest  in  use.  It  is  impossible  for 
this  Tally  to  get  out  of  order,  on  account  of  its  simplicity. 

The  washer  between  the  pointer  and  spring  is  so  constructed  that 
moving  the,  spring  does  not  move  the  pointer. 

The  springs  are  riveted,  not  screwed,  to  the  back-board,  with  large 
brass  washers  between  them. 

The  frames  are  manufactured  of  cherry,  with  improved  machinery, 
and  handsomely  finished. 

Beware  of  Imitations  where  the  Pad  Acts  as  a Hinge. 


5x7 
5x8 

4^4^  x5K oOiei^x  834 

41^4  X 634 60  I 8 X 10  85  | 14  x 17 2 80 

When  made  with  backs  to  open  lengthways,  an  additional  charge  of 
ten  per  cent,  will  be  added  to  above  prices. 

AdVs  Patent  Printing  Frame  Support  Sold  Separately,  All  Sizes,  at 
$1.50  per  dozen. 


3 34  X 4 34 |0  50  I 

4 X 5 50  1 


$0  65  I 10  X 12 $1  15 

65  I 11  X 14 2 15 

75  I 13  X 16 2 40 


158 


• DEVOE’S  PRINTING  EASEL. 


Holds  the  Printing  Frame  at 
any  desired  angle.  Economizes 
space,  keeps  your  negatives 
square  to  the  sun,  thereby  mak- 
ing more  symmetrical  Vignettes. 

This  is  easily  done  with  this  ad- 
justable holder.  It  also  prevents 
your  printing  frames  from  slip- 
ping down  and  breaking  nega- 
tives. 

Better  than  shelves,  blocks  of 
wood,  or  any  other  device.  Easily 
put  oat  of  the  way  when  not  in 
use.  Simple,  efficient,  cheap. 

They  do  not  wear  out,  break 
or  rust,  being  made  of  malleable 
iron  and  strong  wire,  all  thor- 
oughly tinned.  Try  them  and 
you  will  wonder  how  you  ever 
got  along  without  them. 

Price,  size  suitable  for  Printing  Frames  from  to  10  x 12,  per  dozen,  $3.00 


Cut'Quts  or  medallion  masks. 

For  C.  de  V.  Oval Per  dozen,  $0  15 

“ Victoria,  “ “ 20 

“ Cabinet,  Oval  or  Arch “ 25 

“ 4-4  Ovals “ 30 

One  package,  containing  six  of  each  of 

above  sizes 75 

Gihon’s  Cut-Outs,  30  assorted  sizes 1 00 


Uleymouth’s  ||ignette  Papers. 

Nineteen  sizes  are  now  made,  suiting 
all  dirnensions  of  pictures  from  a small 
carte  figure  to  Victorias,  cabinets,  whole 
size,  etc.  They  are  printed  in  black  for 
ordinary  negatives,  yellow  bronze  for 
thin  negatives,  and  red  bronze  for  still 
weaker  ones. 

In  envelopes,  containing  one  each. 

Nos.  1 to  15 $1.00 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4 and  5,  for  cartes, 

per  dozen 50 

“ 6,  7,  11,  12  and  13,  for  large 

cartes  and  Victorias,  per  dozen  . 75 
8,  9,  10,  14,  15  and  1534, 

cabinets  and  4-4  size 1.00 

if  16,  17  and  18,  for  cabinet  and 

half- size,  per  dozen 1.25 


CALCINED  FLOUR 

for  retouching  negatives. — This  is  a preparation  for  grinding  negatives 
for  retouching ; with  it,  it  is  impossible  to  scratch  a film,  as  there  are  na 
gritty  particles  in  it.  25  cents  per  bottle. 


159 


. ThQ  S^CHUkTZE:  PHQrO''EOlf{P/\WT  C,p.  NE'^  YORK- 


THE  EXCEIiSIDR  STRHIGHT  TRIMMER. 


The  Excels-or  Straight  Trimmer  is  substituted  for  the  knife  for  trim- 
ming photographs,  and  does  the  work  much  more  expeditiously  and 
elegantly.  They  save  time,  save  prints,  and  save  money. 

They  do  not  cut,  but  pinch  off  the  waste  paper,  and  leave  the  print 
with  a neatlgr  beveled  edge,  which  facilitates  adherence  to  the  mount. 
Try  one,  and  you  will  discard  the  knife  and  punch  at  once. 

/ 

Ssel’s  Patent  Traasiaraiit  Vipattar 


Seed’s  patent  Adjustable  printing  frames. 


is  destined  to  bring  about  a 
revolution  in  Printing,  as  it 
dispenses  with  Tissue  Paper, 
Cotton,  and  all  the  many  appli- 
ances now  used  for  making 
Vignette  Prints. 

It  prints  in  Direct  Sunlight 
in  the  same  time  and  in  the 
same  way  as  an  ordinary  print 
is  made,  by  simply  putting  it 
over  the  Negative  in  the  Print- 
ing Frame.  It  gives  a very 
fine  and  even  gradation. 


Price  for  all  the  different  sizes. 

On  5 X 7 Plate.. $3  50  per  dozen. 
On  5 X 8 Plate.. $4  00  per  dozen. 


By  means  of  them  Photographers  can  print  with  the  Vignetter  from 
any  negative  on  which  the  image  may  not  be  exactly  in  the  center,  the 
extra  space  in  the  frame  admitting  of  adjusting  the  negative  over  the 
Vignetter,  as  may  be  desirable,  and  holding  it  in  its  place  by  means  of 
two  clamps. 

Made  for  sizes  5x7  and  5 x 8,  to  correspond  with  the  sizes  of  the 
Vignetters.  Price,  $10  00  per  dozen. 


160 


Scott’s  Adjustable  Ijisnetter  and  plain  printer. 


PATENT  APPLIED  FOR. 


The  Scott  Adjustable  Vignetter  is  readily  adjusted  to  any  possible 
position,  and  lield  tirmly  with  thumb  screws;  easily  attached  to  any 
ordinary  printing  frame,  and  when  once  in  position  need  not  be  removed, 

as  the  opening  is  sufficiently  large 
to  i^rint  plain  prints  to  full  capac- 
ity of  frame;  manufactured  of 
tin,  with  brass  springs  under- 
neatli  to  rai&e  vignetter  to  high- 
est position,  the  clamping  wire 
tightly  bolding  either  tissue 
paper,  cut-out,  or  both. 

It  is  a fact  well  known  to  every 
first-c  a-s  printer,  that,  in  order 
to  make  nicely  blended  vignettes, 
he  must  be  able  to  regulate  and 
to  vary  the  distance  between  the 


tissue-covered  aperture  of  the  vig- 
netter and  the  negative.  The  nearer 
the  aperture  of  vignetter  is  to  the 
negative,  the  more  abrupt  the 
blending  will  be,  and  vice  versa^ 
different  negatives  requiring  differ- 
ent adjustments  of  the  vignetting 
attachments. 


34  size,  each |0  50 

^ “ 60 

434  X 634  size,  each 65 

5 x7  “ “ 70 

5 x8  “ “ 70 


4-4  size,  each $0  75 

8 X 10  “ 85 

lOx  12  “ 1 00 

11  X 14  “ 1 25 

14x  17  “ 1 50 


THE  CLIMHX 

RETOUCHING  DESK. 

Patented  January  25,  1887. 

Our  new  style  Retouching  Frame 
presents  a feature  not  embraced  by 
any  other  frame  in  the  market,  as  it 
is  made  in  the  shape  of  a center 
table,  and  can  be  used  as  such  or  as 
a general  skylight  accessory.  The 
top  lifts  up  and  forms  the  frame.  It 
is  handsomely  made  of  black  walnut 
and  neatly  covered  with  baize. 

This  frame  is  suitable  for  negatives 
11  X 14  and  under. 

Price |15  00 


IGl 


Tfjg-  York* 


The 


Suitable  for  any  size  negative  under  25  x 30.  It  has  a false  top  'which 
can  be  pulled  down  to  darken  the  space  in  front  of  the  ground-glass  cut- 
out. The  bed  on  which  the  negative  is  laid  can  be  set  at  any  inclination 
to  suit  the  convenience  of  the  artist.  By  means  of  the  slide  rest,  the 
negative  may  be  moved  up  or  down  to  any  desired  position.  These  desks 
are  all  made  of  hard  wood,  perfectly  constructed,  nicely  engraved,  and 
well  finished.  They  are  an  ornament  to  any  studio.  Price,  $14  00. 


The  Novel  Retouching  Desk, 
same  as  above,  without  stand  or 
drawer. 

Price $9  00 


Novel  Retouching  Desk. 


162 


C/j^  <>-%N£i'^ . YpRK* 


SCHULXZE’S 

IMPROVES 

RETOUCHING  FRAME. 


Improved  Retouehing  Frame,  for 
8 X 10  and  under $3  00 


Improved  Retouching  Frame,  for 
X 14  and  under 7 00 


There  are  three  dark  tints,  viz.;  No.  1,  brownish  tint;  No.  2,  reddish 
tint;  No.  3,  bluish  tint.  These  are  generally  used  before  burnishing 
instead  of  India  ink. 

There  are  three  tints  to  match  up  albumen  tones,  viz.;  No.  1,  pure 
white;  No.  2,  light  yellow  white;  No.  3,  deep  yellow  white.  These  dry 
glossy  and  are  very  convenient  in  finishing;  will  also  bear  burnishing. 

The  six  colors,  in  polished  mahogany  box,  with  space  for 


brushes,  etc $3  00 

Per  single  cylinder 50 


CABINET  MAILING  ENVELOPES. 

Manilla $2  00  per  1,000  rrranite $3  50  per  1,000 

“ XX 3 00  “ Fawn 3 50  “ 

White 3 50  “ 


163 


THE  HESATIVE  PEESEEVEE. 


Consists  of  a stout  brown  paper  envelope,  one  end  open  and  cut  to  admi 
the  thumb  and  forefinger  in  removing  the  negative,  and  having  on  th 
front  three  printed  lines  for  the  number,  name  and  remarks.  They  ma^ 
be  used  either  with  or  without  a rack,  and  iu  the  latter  case  may  be  stoo( 
up  on  end,  or  piled  one  above  another  in  any  position,  with  safety;  bu 
their  chief  merit  lies  in'the  absolute  protection  of  the  glass  and  film  fron 
breakage  dust,  and  scratching. 

They  are  put  up  in  packages  of  500  each,  and  cost  as  follows: 


No.  1.  For  negatives  x 4I4,  x^er  1,000 $2  70 

“ 2.  “ “ 414x51^,  “ 3 15 

“3  “ “ 4I4  X 614,  “ 3 35 

“334.  “ ■ “ 5 X 7,  “ 4 00 

“4.  “ “ 5 x8,  “ 4 10 

“5.  “ “ 6^x84,  “ 4^0 

“6.  “ “ 8 X 10,  “ 6 20 

“7.  “ “ 10  X 12,  per  100  1 40 

“8.  “ “ 11  X 14,  “ 1 60 

“9.  “ “ 14  X 17,  “ 2 75 


RETOUCHING  PENCILS. 

Fabkr’s  Holder  for  Leads,  including  one  lead,  each  fO  25. 

A.  W.  FABER  S PENCILS. 


WITH  SIBERIAN  LEAD  FROM  THE  ALBERT 
MINE. 

For  Retouching,  Etc. 

We  give  the  following  scale  for  conveni- 
ence in  ordering  : 

BBBBBB — Extra  soft  and  extra  black. 

BBBB — Very  soft  and  extra  black. 

BBB — Very  soft  and  very  black. 

BB — Soft  and  very  black. 

^B — Soft  and  black. 

HB — Hard  and  black. 

F— Middling. 

H— Hard. 

HH — Harder. 

HHH— Very  hard. 

HHHH— Very  hard. 

HHHHHH— Extra  hard. 

The  above  scale  applies  to  both  the  pen- 
cils in  wood  and  leads  only,  so  be  sure  to 
state  which  is  wanted. 

SIBERIAN  PENCILS. 


|||ii|i|i||niiiiniiMiMmiiiMiimiiiiiiwmiiimHinin« 

1 

1 1 MamifairtoTyestablishedl 
,1761  f 

lilMi 

|j  !;iia|i 

1;  t 

1'  '''' 

|!l|l!!i||lf(|||' 

I'  ^ 1 

Hi 

iliiilfi 

n 1 '!'!  'iji  'iii 

1 1 Ifl 

r iiSlipi 

^2  dozen 

« 

ISiterian  leads 
I HHHHHH 

t for  New  Patent  0 

lArtislsTencilsI 

I 

^moveable  Leads. I 


2 B to 

6 H,  per  doz . . . 

$1  25  Each. 

.$0  13 

3 B “ 

6 B, 

1 50  “ . 

. 15 

2 B “ 

6 H,  leads,  pr  dz 

. 1 25 

. 13 

3 B “ 

6 B,  “ 

1 50  “ . 

15 

164 


^ s'c  Hut,  rz  £ PHo  r.  c p : jy£  vv/,  .y p r k ^ 


METALLIC  RETOUCHING  PENCILS. 

Crowell’s,  each 20  cents  | Smith’s  points,  each 25  cents. 


COLD  AND  SILVER  SAUCERS. 


Gold  Saucers,  small,  each.  .10  cents. 
“ medium,  “ . .13  “ 

“ large,  “ . .20  “ 


Silver  Saucers,  medium,  each,  lOcts. 
Silver  Ink  (French’s),  for  spot- 
ting out  ferrotypes, per  cake  35  “ 


Boyptm  Chemical  Coloss. 

Triple  strength.  Manufactured  expressly  for  painting  photographs, 
views,  etc.;  also  used  in  connection  with  the  Egyptian  Transparent  Com- 
pound for  producing  the  Egyptian  Crystal  Photograph,  said  to  be  the 
most  life-like  picture  in  the  world. 


No,  1.  No.  3. 

PRICE  LIST  OF  COLORS. 


Box  No.  1 contains  13  one-ounce  (white  glass)  bottles  of  colors  and 
one  six-ounce  bottle  compound  for  mounting  photographs  on  flat  or  con- 
vex glass  after  they  are  colored.  This  is  a box  with  nickel-plated  lock 
and  hinges,  highly  polished,  and  will  color  five  thousand  imperial  size 
photographs.  Price,  $6  00. 

Box  No.  2 contains  9 half-ounce  bottles  of  colors.  Polished  wood  box. 
Price,  $2  50. 

Box  No.  3 contains  9 quarter-ounce  bottles  of  colors.  Polished  wood 
box.  Price,  $1  50. 

Single  bottles,  30  cents  each. 

Egyptian  Transparency  Compound,  75  cents  per  bottle. 


MISCELLANEOUS  COLORS,  ETC. 

Anderson’s  (dry),  fitted,  per  box  of  14 $1  75 

Cake  Water  Colors,  per  cake  or  box,  to  order. . ..20c.  to  9 00 
Indian  Ink  (lion  head),  per  stick 20 


165 


CjIHON'S  opaque. 

opaque  (Gihon’s),  per  box 


50  cents. 


CHINESE  WATES  COLOES. 


The  great  original.  By  far  the  best $1  20  per  box;  bottles,  10  cents. 


MOIST  WATER  COLORS. 

The  twelve  most  desirable  colors,  viz.:  Vermilion,  Chrome,  Ultra 
Blue,  Light  Red,  Sepia,  Cr.  Lake,  Bt.  Sienna,  Em.  Green,  Vandyke, 
Indigo,  Gamboge,  Cobalt.  Price,  60  cents  per  box. 


Acme  Transparent  Water  Colors, 

FOR  COLORING  AND  PAINTING 

PHOTO=F»ORTRAnrS 


OM  ALL  KINDS  OF  PAPER, 


Views,  Ijanteru 
Slides,  Trausfer- 
otypes.  Trans- 
parencies, 


Engravings, 
Artotypes,  and 
Prints  of  all 

Kinds. 


For  Tapestry,  Paris  Tinting,  and  ail  kinds  of  D , o or  Fabric  Painting. 

For  Coloring  Unmounted  Photos,  for  Transferring  to  Convex  or  Plain 
Glass,  for  Sketching,  etc. 

Jli^^These  colors  are  in  solid,  but  moist  form,  and  are  a substitute  for 
the  ordinary  fugitive  liquid,  or  dye-colors;  are  easy  to  apply  and  very 
effective,  produv.  ing  ail  tints,  and  are  the  only  colors  that  vdll  make  a 
fast  Indelible  Black  on  Albumen  Paper  for  Hair,  Drapery,  etc. , and  the 
Set  contains  the  only  colors  of  this  class  Guaranteed  Fast  to  Light. 


LIST  OF  ACME  COLORS,  ETC.,  in  SEPARATE  DOUBLE  PANS  and  BOXES. 

With  a view  to  greater  permanency,  many  changes  have  recently 
been  made  in  the  composition  of  these  colors,  but  still  retaining  the  orig- 
inal names,  and  these  remarks  pertain  as  a whole,  only  to  the  colors  as 
now  made.  They  consist  of  Twenty-two  Transparent  Tinting  Colors,  as 
follows,  at  25  cents  each: 

Blue,  Bright;  Blue,  Dark  ; Blue,  Gray;  Brown,  Dark;  Brown,  Light; 
Black,  Blue;  Crimson,  Carmine;  Gold;  Green,  Dark;  Green,  Light;  Green, 
Olive;  Madder  Red,  Neutral  Tint,  Orange,  Flesh,  Purple,  Ros(',  Scarlet, 
Violet,  Wine;  Yellow,  Deep;  Yellow,  Lemon.  Also  six  body,  or  Surface 
Colors,  viz.:  Chinese  White,  Acme  Black,  Chrome  Yellow,  Vermilion, 
Cobalt  Blue,  Carmine,  at  15  cents  each  (except  Carmine,  35  cents.) 


Directions  now  accompany  each  Sep>a,rate  Color. 


166 


Th  9 s'c  HuL^fzs:'  RMpro  - Eo  if  I py^EKT  cio.  new  yor  k * 


Large  Box,  Palette  and  Instructions $2  50 

Amateur  Box,  “ “ 1 00 

Acme  Medium  in  pans,  “ 35 

Acme  Guide  to  Coloring,  50  pages 25 


The  Large  Box  contains  all  the  tinting  colors,  except  Blue^  Blacky 
Light  Broivn,  Olive  Oreen,  Purple,  and  Orange,  but  includes  White — 18 
m all. 

The  Amateur  Box  contains /ScarZe^,  Flesh,  D.  Brown,  Deep  Yellow,  D. 
Blue,  White — 6 colors. 

Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 


Flat  Bristle  Brushes. 


1 inch  wide,  each 12  cents. 

IK  “ “ 20  “ 

2 “ “ 25  “ 


2K  inches  wide,  each. 
3 “ “ , 

3K  “ “ . 


.35  cents. 
.50  “ 

.80  “ 


Width. 

K inch 
1 “ 

:: 


Each. 
$0  12 
25 
37 
50 


Camel’s  Hair  Dusters. 

Width.  Each. 

3 inches  |0  88 

3K  “ 1 00 

Round  Quill 
Dusters  . . 0 


23^  inches.  60 

HARD  RUBBER  SET  AND  BOUND  PHOTOGRAHhERS’  BRUSHES. 

The  bristles  of  these  brushes  are  secured  by 
first  immersing  the  butts  (or  stiff  ends)  of  the 
bristles  in  soft  rubber;  they  are  then  put  upon 
the  end  of  the  handle  (not  around  it,  as  in  the 
old  way);  a belt  of  rubber  combined  with 
metal  is  wound  around  the  whole,  covering 
the  butt  of  the  bristles,  and  conforming  to  a 
groove  running  around  the  adjoining  end  of 
the  handle.  The  portion  of  the  brush  covered 
with  rubber  and  metal  is  then  placed  in  a die 
and  vulcanized  (or  hardened)  under  heat  and 
pressure.  The  result  is  a solid  vulcanized 
hea  \ in  which  the  bristles  are  so  thoroughly 
imbedded  that  it  is  impossible  for  them  to  get 
loose.  The  handle  being  dovetailed  into  the 
head  (see  sectional  illustration),  is  also  firmly 
secured. 

It  is  self-evident  that  this  method  of  constructing  brushes  is  far 
superior  to  the  old  modes.  These  brushes  are  not  affected  in  any  manner 
by  any  solution  in  which  they  may  be  used,  and  they  can  be  kept  for  any 
length  of  time  in  either  damp  or  dry  atmosphere  without  injury.  Prices 
are  as  follows  : 


Width. 

1 inch  Camel’s  Hair. 

IK  “ 

2 “ “ 

2K  “ “ ' 

3 “ “ 


Each. 
$0  38 
57 
75 
95 
1 13 


Width. 

1 inch  Bristle,  paste. 

IK  “ 

2 “ “ 

2K  “ “ : 

3 “ “ 


Each. 
$0  20 
25 
35 
45 
50 


167 


rA(>  SCHUkTZE: 


SCALES  AND  WEIGHTS. 

Grinch  beam,  for  drams  and  grains. . 75  cts. 
5 “ “ “ . . 60  “ 

No.  2,  standard,  5 34 -inch  beam,  2-inch 
brass  pans,  on  walnut  box,  scale  packs  in 
drawer.  Price,  including  a full  set  of 
weights,  $5.50. 


NEW  PATENT  DI3PEN3INS  30HEEN. 


NO  WEIGHTS-qUICKLY  ADJUSTED. 


It  has  a 9-inch  nickel-plated  beam,  neatly  mounted  on  a japanned  iron 
standard.  The  fiont  end  of  the  beam  weighs  from  1 to  30  grains,  the 
other  end  weighing  from  one-half  to  eight  drams  or  one  ounce,  and  is 
very  accurate.  The  pan  is  movable  and  has  no  side  bar  to  interfere. 
We  guarantee  them  in  every  respect. 

” ' Price. $5  00 


168 


Th  9 S'c  HOLcTZ  PH  OTO.'  EQ  iri  f>/\Et^  T YORK- 


Patent  Pocket  Pyro  Scales. 


Capacity  from  one-half  to  twenty  grains.  No  weights  to  lose  ; can 
be  carried  in  the  vest  pocket ; always  ready  and  convenient ; every 
photographer  should  have  one. 

Price,  each $1  00 


THe  TV^KGIC  CKSTERS. 


PATENT  APPLIED  FOR. 


For  backgrounds,  camera  stands,  screens,  etc.,  etc.  The  best  caster 
ever  introduced  for  studio  purposes.  It  was  invented  specially  for  photo- 
graphic use.  Wood  wheel,  3 inches;  does  not  drop  out  when  raised  off 
the  floor. 

Price,  per  set  of  four $1  00 

FRENCH  CRYSTAL  PHOTO  CLASS. 


4-4 

per  box  of  130  panes 

$4 

25 

16 

X 20  per  box 

of  23  panes. . 

...$5 

75 

8 X 

10  “ 

90  “ 

4 

25 

18 

X 22 

18  “ ., 

...  7 

38 

10  X 

12  “ 

60  “ 

. 4 

25 

20 

X 24 

15  “ ., 

...  7 

-8 

11  X 

14  “ 

47  “ 

. 5 

75 

22 

x28 

12  “ . . 

8 

25 

14  X 

17  “ 

31  “ 

. 5 

75 

25 

X 30 

9 ‘ • . . 

...  8 

75 

The  above  prices  are  subject  to  fluctuation.  Not  accountable  for  break- 
age. Variable. 


CENUINE  B.  P.  C.  GLASS. 


1-9  size,  per  gross 

$1  15 

4x8  size,  per  gross 

$9  00 

1-6  “ 

(( 

2 00 

5x8  “ “ 

1-4  “ 

ii 

3 25 

4-4  “ “ 

1-2  “ 

t6 

6 00 

8x10  “ “ 

4^x6K 

a 

7 25 

10  X 12  “ “ 

169 


$0  55 
. 70 

. 80 


ORANGE  AND  RUBY  CLASS. 

FOR  DARK  ROOMS. 


Size  63^  X per  light $0  25 

“ 8 X 10,  “ 30 

“ 10  X 12,  “ 50 


Size  11  X 14,  per  light, 
“ 13x16, 

“ 12  X 20, 


SUPERIOR  CONVEX  GLASS. 

For  covering  fine  pictures,  and  speciMiiy^  fur  the  Photochrome  process. 

Card  size.  Oval  or  R.C 2j\  x 3y\  inches,  per  doz <t)0  20 

Promenade,  size,  Square  (R.C  ).  .4i/^  x 7^^  “ “ 60 

Imperial  size,  oval  or  R.  C 4|4  x 61<^  “ “ 50 

Panel  size.  Square  (R.  C.).  .4?4  x 83^  “ “ 75 

Boudoir  “ “ “ ..534x834  “ “ 1 00 

Whole  “ Oval,  “ “ ..634  x 834  “ “ 1 25 

Ex.  Whole  “ “ “ ..8  xlO  “ “ 2 50 

Double Whole“  “ “ ..10  xl2  “ “ 6 75 


BRYANT’S  PERMANENT  MIXED  PAINTS. 

FOR  REPAIRING  DAMAGED 

Bael\(Jrooi>ds  apd  /)(;(;e88orie5. 


These  are  capable  of  producing  all  the  tints  used  in  Background  and 
Accessory  Painting,  for  touching  up  damaged  Backgrounds  and  Accessor- 
ies. Each  package  contains  a brush  and  enough  paint  to  last  a gallery  a 
lifetime,  and  full  instructions  for  using  it.  If  kept  corked  the  paint  -will 
not  deteriorate  in  the  least  by  time. 

COMPLETE  SET  OF  MIXED  PAINTS,  90  GTS. 


PlfllopajMc  Carj  aafl  Farrotyje  Plata  Cattar. 


Photographers  will  find  this  a grand  thing  for  cutting  albumen  paper, 
and  it  is  also  invaluable  for  cutting  ferrotype  plates. 

The  advantages  of  this  cutter  are  : with  12-inch  blades  it  will  cut  any 
size  sheet.  No  other  machine  ever  made  will  cut  a shee  wider  than  the 
length  of  the  blades. 

All  the  pirt-i  are  made  to  gauges,  by  which  they  are  interchangeable, 
so  that  if  any  part  is  worn  out,  broken  or  lost,  a duplicate  uan  be  ordered. 

All  the  parts  are  made  of  the  best  material,  and  a cutter  capable  of  a 
range  of  work  nev  r before  attempted  in  a small  machine  is  offered  at 
less  than  one-half  the  price  of  any  other  cutter  with  same  length  of 
blades. 

Price  only  $10.00  for  a complete  machine,  with  adjustable  gauges  and 
latest  improvements.  Each  machine  boxed,  and  no  extra  charges. 


170 


Thp  s'chul.tze:  PHoro-EQLripz\Ef^r  og.  new  York- 


LOCKWOOD’S  PATENT  PHOTO  CLIPS. 


These  are  the  most  desirable  articles  of  their  class  to  be  found  in  the 
market,  being  substantially  made  in  the  best  manner,  and  the  fact  that 
they  never  break  or  give  way  in  any  particular  must  recommend  them  to 
all.^  The  springs  are  made  of  first  quality  brass  wire,  and  the  wood  is  very 
hard  and  durable.  They  are  made  in  two  sizes  and  various  styles,  as  fol- 
lows, the  cut  showing  exact  size  of  the  large  clip  : 


No.  Gross.  Doz. 

15  A,  small,  2^  inches,  plain,  chamfered $6  00  55  cts. 

15,  B “ “ with  hook,  chamfered 6 75  60  “ 

15,  “ “ “ and  hole,  chamfered. . 7 20  65  “ 

1,  large,  plain 7 20  65  “ 

14,  “ with  hook 8 10  70  “ 

17,  ‘‘  “ hole,  chamfered 8 25  75  “ 

18,  “ “ hook  and  hole,  chamfered 8 25  75  “ 


DRY  PLATE  SAFETY  SOX. 

In  outward  appearance  resembles  an  ordinary  negative  box,  though 
not  so  deep  ; but  within,  instead  of  grooves,  it  has  a close-fitting  cover 
lined  with  black  velvet,  so  as  t3  guard  the  plates  against  any  possible  re- 
flections. These  may  be  removed  from  the  original  packages,  that  should 
always  be  opened  in  the  dark  room,  and  safely  kept  in  this  box  until 
transferred  to  the  plate  holder. 

Price,  3 X 4,  $0  95  ; 4x5,  $1  00 ; 4^x63^,  |1  10;  5x8,  $1  15;  6^x834> 
25  ; 8 X 10,  $1  50,  including  lock  and  key. 


U/<^  ar(^  l7eadq4jart(^rs  for  used  by  \:\)e  pl^oto- 

grapl^er,  professional  or  amatetir. 

171  . 


Thg  jrCHUtiTZE.  PHoro  - EQ  J2  d.. 


The  Adt  Patent  Adjnstable  Photo-Clip. 

For  Holding  paper  and  Hegatives  While  Drying,  and  for  Printing  with  Backloards,  Etc. 


The  Adt  Photo-Clip  is  the  only  Photo-Clip  that  is  adjustable.  It  is 
superior  in  construction,  and  is  in  every  way  desirable. 

The  Adt  Adjustable  Photo-Clip  is  so  constructed  that  one  arm  is  mov- 
able, which  will  be  found  a very  valuable  feature,  as,  for  instance,  in 
printing  with  backboards,  where,  without  covering  more  than  the  ex- 
treme edge  of  the  negative  with  one  arm,  the  other  arm  extends  so  far 
under  the  backboard  as  to  insure  a firm  grasp. 


The  Adt  Adjustable  Photo-Clip  is  provided  with  a spiral  spring,  con- 
structed so  that  no  pin  pivot  is  required,  making  it  superior  to  any  other. 

The  Adt  Adjustable  Photo  Clip  is  made  of  selected  hardwood,  and  the 
brass  is  of  the  proper  composition  and  thickness. 

The  Adt  Adjustable  Photo-Clips  are  all  made  with  hook  and  hole,  so 
that  they  may  be  hung  on  a cord,  wire  or  nail. 

Price  (every  clip  warrartod)  of  the  Adt  Patent  Adjustable  Photo- 
Clips,  per  dozen,  75  cents  ; per  gross,  $7.50. 


SPRING  CLOTHES  PINS. 


Per  dozen $0  20 

Per  gross 2 00 


172 


KiD's  SeDsllized  Paper  Stratcter  ail  Drrer. 


PATENTED  APRIL  13,  1886. 


This  simple  arrangement  cannot  but  commend  itself  to  every  prac- 
tical photographer. 

The  cut  represents  the  Stretcher  open;  (a)  represents  the  two  frames 
fastened  together  with  hinges;  (b)  is  a rubber  strip  which  fits  in  groove 
(c);  in  opposite  frame  (d)  is  a board  same  thickness  as  the  Stretcher,  and 
lays  inside  while  the  sensitized  paper  is  being  placed  in  position  before 
the  Stretcher  is  closed  which  fastened  with  the  two  clasps  at  side.  By 
this  method  the  paper  is  held  in  place  by  the  rubber  strip  (b),  and  is  then 
set  up  and  allowed  to  dry.  When  dry  it  is  perfectly  smooth  (in  fact  just 
like  a drum-head),  and  has  a beautiful  gloss.  Two  sheets  can  be  put  in  a 
Stretcher  at  the  same  time;  when  dry  the  Stretcher  and  paper  are  put  in 
the  fuming  box. 

Paper  dried  in  this  manner  lays  perfectly  flat,  and  therefore  better 
prints  can  be  made,  and  you  can  also  cut  your  paper  either  lengthwise  or 
crosswise  of  the  sheet,  as  it  neither  stretches  or  shrinks  afterwards.  In 
addition  to  all  the  above  advantages,  the  paper  is  much  more  easily 
handled  than  in  any  other  way;  in  fact  it  is  no  trouble  at  all.  The 
Stretchers  are  made  in  two  sizes  for  whole  or  half  sheets. 


Price  for  half  or  whole  sheet,  each $1  50 

Price  for  20  x 24,  each 1 75 


Wheeler’s  Sensitized  Paper  Hanger. 


This  hanger  is  intended  to  suspend  silvered  paper,  or  any  other 
coated  paper,  while  drying,  and  is  attached  when  the  paper  is  first  taken 
from  the  silver  bath.  The  spring  of  the  wire  adjusts  itself  to  the  shrink- 


173 


ing  of  the  paper  while  drying  and  leaves  the  paper  when  dry  perfectly 
flat.  They  are  sold  in  pairs,  as  it  is  necessary  to  have  one  for  the  bottom 
of  the  sheet,  as  well  as  one  for  the  top,  the  weight  of  the  lower  one  being 
sufficient  to  keep  the  paper  from  curling  up. 

Price,  per  pair 50  cents. 


RUBBER  GLOVES. 

Just  the  Thing  to  Keep  Silver  or  Pyrogallic  Acid  off  the  Hands. 


Sizes,  ladies’  long,  Nos.  7,  8 and  9,  per  pair 50 

“ ladies’  short.  Nos.  7,  8 and  9,  per  pair 1 25 

“ gent’s  long,  Nos.  12,  13  and  14,  per  pair 1 t5 

“ gent’s  short.  Nos.  12,  13  and  14,  per  pair 1 35 


The  New  Magic  Yignetter. 

Patented  May  31,  1887. 

FOR  PRODUCING  THE  POPULAR  BACKGROUND  PHOTOGRAPHS. 


• Heretofore  the  difficulty  and  extra  labor  in  making  them  has  been  so 
great  that  but  few  have  ventured.  With  this  attachment  there  is  no 
more  trouble  or  expense  than  in  making  plain  photographs. 

Either  light  or  dark  backgrounds  can  be  used,  but  of  course  should 
be  suited  to  the  dress.  Can  be  easily  attached  to  the  diaphragm  of  any 
camera  by  means  of  the  two  screws,  as  shown  in  cut  above. 

It  is  telescopic,  so  it  cm  be  used  with  either  a long  or  short  focus 
lens.  It  also  has  a carriage,  so  that  the  picture  can  always  be  located  in 
the  center  of  the  plate. 

The  opening  can  be  adjusted  to  the  proper  size  by  simply  moving  the 
lever.  Focus  and  expose  as  usual.  Price,  each,  $8.00. 


174 


Kuhn’s  Improved  Vignetting  Attachment 


For  Vignetting  the  Negative. 


Strong-  a.iid  Du.i*able- 


It  is  perfectly  reliable  and 
quickly  adjusted  to  any  lens  by 
the  means  of  a thumb-screw. 
It  can  be  raised  or  lowered  at 
will  to  any  position  desired  by 
the  opt'rator,  by  simply  pulling 
a cord,  v.  itJiout  leaving  his  posi- 
tion behind  the  camera.  Price,, 
each,  $3.50. 


Patented.  September  6,  1887 


The  Clima.K  Print  Mounter. 


This  article  has  been  introduced  as  a convenient  means  of  pressing 
prints  on  cards  when  mounting.  It  consists  of  a pair  of  rollers  with  a 
handle  attached,  a band  of  fine  cotton  cloth  being  wound  around  the 
rollers,  the  ends  of  the  cloth  being  fastened  one  to  each  roller.  Springs 
in  the  ends  of  each  roller  tend  to  turn  them  in  opposite  directions  and 
thus  the  cloth  is  kept  stretched  across  the  intervening  space,  but  may  be 
rolled  entirely  from  one  roller  on  to  the  other  or  back  without  interfering 
with  their  action.  Thus  a fresh  clean  portion  of  the  cloth  may.  be  ob- 
tained whenever  the  portion  in  use  becomes  soiled  by  paste  exuding 
from  the  sides  of  the  print,  or  otherwise.  When  the  band  becomes  en- 
tirely soiled  it  can  be  removed,  washed  and  replaced. 

For  use,  place  the  pasted  print  on  the  mount  and  draw  the  roller 
over  it,  as  shown  in  the  cut;  the  pressure  of  the  roller  removing  the  air 
from  under  the  print  presses  it  securely  to  the  mount.  The  cloth  absorbs^ 
the  moisture  from  the  surface  of  the  print  without  displacing  it  and 
leaves  it  perfectly  smooth.  For  sale  by  all  dealers. 

Price,  each $2  00 


175 


THE  ADT  PATENT  PRIHT  MODHTER 


This  Improvement  Simpliiles  the  Mounting*  of  Photographic  Prints. 


The  Adt  Patent  Print  Mounter  consists  of  a spring  roller,  to  which  is 
attached  a handle,  and  upon  which  is  wound  a band  of  fine  cotton  cloth, 
one  end  of  the  band  being  fastened  to  a rod,  which  is  screwed  to  the 
mounting  table.  After  the  pasted  print  has  been  placed  upon  the  mount, 
the  roller  is  drawn  over  the  print,  as  shown  in  the  cut,  the  spring  roller 
drawing  the  cloth  band  perfectly  tight,  and  rewinding  it  when  the  roller 
returns.  The  uniform  pressure  of  the  roller  removes  all  the  air  from 
under  the  print  and  presses  it  securely  to  the  mount.  It  absorbs  the 
moisture  from  the  surface  of  the  print,  leaving  it  perfectly  smooth.  The 
band  is  of  sufficient  length  so  that  when,  in  time,  a portion  of  it  becomes 
soiled,  it  can  be  wound  upon  the  removable  rod,  which  is  fastened  to 
the  table,  thereby  exposing  a clean  surface.  When  the  entire  band  be- 
comes soiled,  it  may  be  removed,  washed  and  replaced.  It  will  be  noticed 
that  in  drawing  out  the  roller  it  is  made  to  revolve,  not  by  friction  on  the 
print,  but  by  the  tension  of  the  cloth,  one  end  of  which  is  held  by  the  rod 
and  screwed  to  the  mounting  table.  Therefore,  any  amount  of  pressure 
can  be  used  without  moving  the  print  in  any  direction.  The  Adt  Mounter 
is  the  simplest,  strongest  and  cheapest  mounter  made.  It  will  mount  all 
sizes  of  prints.  No  complications  or  getting  out  of  order. 

Price, Sl.50  each. 


THE  “SUCCESS’^ 

PRINT  MOUNTED. 

This  illustration  describes  it 
fully.  Price, 

6 inch $1  00 

12  “ 1 50 


176 


; r/)P  jrcH(jL.rz£  /^Horo-EQUipy^Et^r  go.,  a/^^na/  York* 


Alllerip's  GomiOMit  FrulliE  Repsler. 

(PATENTED.) 


This  neat  article  can  be  readily  attached  to  the  door  of  any  printing 
frame,  and  has  two  dials,  one  of  which  shows  how  many  prints  are  to  be 
made  from  the  negative,  and  as  each  one  is  removed,  it  is  recorded  on  the 
other  dial.  By  this  means  the  count  can  always  be  kept  correctly.  They 
are  all  nickel  plated,  and  the  cut  shows  the  exact  size. 

Price,  per  dozen $2  00 


Scott’s  Ppinteps’  ^^eglstep. 

A TIME-SAVING  NOVELTY. 


Only  6 Cents  £acli,  or  50  Cents  Per  Oozen. 


The  only  practicable  Print- 
ing Register  ever  made.  Pays 
for  itself  every  day. 

Only  Five  Cents  Each. 

No  more  marking  of  Print- 
ing Forms,  Prints,  or  Losing 
of  Pencils. 

Send  for  Sample  Dozen, 
Only  50  Cents. 


177 


S-CHULTZE  PHOTO- CO.-  /weW  YORK- 


STUDIO  REGISTER. 


Studio  Register. 


j tOfYIIIGMT,  1880,  CY  tgEtH  It  8TUA>  T,  CHICMB. 


DATE 

OHriERED. 

NAME. 

RESIDENCE. 

NO. 

NEGATIVE 

OftD. 

SIZE  AND 

STYLE. 

WHEM 

PROMISED 

PROOf  1 

SENT.  1 

amount 

PAID. 

AMOUNT 

DUE. 

WHEN 

DELIVERED 

REMARKS. 

- 

- 

- 

1 

— 

— 

— 

i 

— 

' 

j 



1 





! 



1 

1 

1 ^ 

I 

, 













— 

— 

— 

— 

1 



1 

— 

1 

1 

1 

z 

z 

— 

— 

1 

1 

1 

The  full  size  of  sheet,  as  used  in  the  book,  is  8':f  x 14  inches ; there 
are  20  lines  on  a page,  all  pages  alike.  The  books  are  well  bound,  with 
leather  back  and  corners,  cloth  sides  and  index  in  front.  No  well-« 
regulated  gallery  should  be  without  one  of  these  very  useful  books.  Use 
it  a week,  and  you  would  not  be  without  it  for  ten  times  the  price. 

No.  2.  160  pages,  each. ......  $2  75  I No.  4.  320  pages,  each $4  25 

“ 3.  240  “ “ 3 50  1 “ 5.  400  “ “ 5 00 

A sample  leaf  will  be  mailed  on  application. 


178 


T/)g  S'CHULTZEi  PHpro  ~ £Q  New  YORK' 


PuSE  HuBBE®  FiNGEfi  TiPS. 

Specially  Made  for  Photo  Use.  A Perfect  Protection  and  Relief  for  the  Fingers. 

The  only  economical  means  ever 
offered  against  the  discoloration  of 
nails  and  fingers  from  acids  and 
chemicals.  A great  improvement 
over  the  e?:pensive  and  clumsy  glove, 
as  they  do  not  impair  the  sense  of 
touch,  but  rather  increase  it.  Very 
easily  applied  or  removed. 

Per  set  of  three 


10  15 


Queen  Kerosene  Oil  Stove. 


Made  in  the  latest  improved  pattern.  Each  one  has  a water  basin  for 


keeping  the  tank  cool  that  holds  the  oil. 

No.  0.  1 Burner,  ll^-inch  wick $1  00 

“1.  1 “ 3 “ 1 60 

“ 2.  2 “ 3 “ 2 25 

“ 2^.  2 “ 3^  “ 2 50 

“ 3.  • 2 . 4 “ 3 00 


)^aue  yotj  (^v/er  tried  a I^eeti5eop(^  £095  P If  9ot,  \qt  4JS 
sepd  yod  ope  09  trial. 


179 


THE  NEW  PATENT 


ACME  ODORLESS  LAMP  STOVE, 


The  lightest,  safest  and  best  Oil  Stove  ever  invented.  Largest  single 
burner,  as  it  uses  a five-inch  wick. 

This  stove  is  constructed  on  entirely  new  and  scientific  principles, 
with  a double  ventilated  tank,  which  renders  it  perfectly  safe,  and  pre- 
vents the  oil  from  heating  and  generating  any  gas,  thereby  avoiding  the 
disagreeable  odor  existing  in  all  other  Oil  Stoves.  ’ 

The  casing  or  jacket  to  which  the  Burner  is  attached  is  separated 
from  the  Oil  Reservoir,  as  shown  in  cut.  With  a constant  current  of  cold 
air  passing  between  the  Jacket  and  Reservoir  to  feed  the  flame,  it  can  be 
burned  at  its  full  capacity  all  day  without  heating  or  smelling.  Will  boil 
two  quarts  of  water  in  fifteen  minutes ; has  the  largest  Burner  of  any 
lamp  stove  in  the  market ; has  a larger  Reservoir  and  holds  more  oil  and 
will  burn  twice  as  long  as  any  other  lamp  stove  with  a single  Burner. 
We  will  warrant  it  to  produce  twice  the  amount  of  heat  without  smoking 
that  is  possible  with  any  other  lamp  stove  of  this  style  ever  yet  produced. 

Price $1  75. 

Use  only  such  wicks  as  are  furnished  by  us  or  our  agents. 

Wicks,  by  mail,  10  cents  each. 


Do  pot  (:djt  out  tl^e  iIl4J5trati09S  ip  tl^is  eatalo(ju^. 


ThQ  SCHULTZE  PHOro-EQLf{P/A,Et^r  CO.  /y£:vN/  YORK* 


PK@T@S]^HPHEI^3’  BE^T  Pl^IEND. 


Worth  its  Weight  in  Gold,  and  Will  Save  the  Price  it  Cost  to 
Any  Photographer  Every  Week. 


flOE  NEW  ACME  PATENT  PORTABLE  RACK. 


SPECIALLY  ADAPTED  TO  OUR  OIL  STOVE  AND  ATMOSPHERIC 
GAS  HEATER. 

A perfect  substitute  for  the  extra  Oil  Stove  alwa7s  found  in  eveij^ 
Photograph  Gallery.  It  saves  time  and  money,  as  in  use  with  our  Oil 
Stove  you  have  only  one  Stove  to  fill,  clean  and  furnish  wicks  for.  It  is 
always  ready  and  can  be  adjusted  for  use  in  one  minute,  as  shown  in  cut. 
For  boiling  water,  making  starch,  drying  plates,  etc.,  etc.,  it  is  indispen- 
sable. The  heaters  are  never  required  for  use  with  the  Burnishers  when 
needed  for  the  other  purposes  mentioned,  and  by  having  our  Acme  Port- 
able Rack  at  command,  there  is  no  further  use  for  an  extra  Oil  or  Gas 
Stove  to  muss  with  and  be  kicked  around  the  gallery  under  foot. 

Price fl  00. 


Exaff^ipe  tl^is  boo^  closely  for  i^eu/  ^oods  apd 
lovu  prices. 


‘ 181 


BIAMONDS. 


Price. 

Ebony  Handle,  with  Keys,  each $4  00 

“ “ plain 3 25 

Engraving  Diamond  for  numbering  or  lettering 

negatives 4 25 

Steel  Glass  Cutter 15 


Allderige’s  Developing  Rocker. 


The  regularity  of  the  motion  allowed  by  the 
Rocker  necessitates  the  use  of  less  solution  and  di- 
minishes the  danger  of  streaked  plates.  It  not  only 
protects  the  hands,  but  serves  also  to  raise  the  plate 
from  the  tray  when  desired.  The  Rocker  is  adapted 
to  the  sizes  of  trays  mostly  used  by  professional  and 
amateur.  It  is  also  useful  in  toning  and  fixing  prints, 
the  motion  keeping  the  solutions  in  constant  agitation. 

Price,  each $1  60 


U/^  eaij  it  a9  object,  for  yoij  to  sepd  ds  yoar 
memorapdij/n  for  yodr  ijevu  outfit. 


1P2 


» ■ YORK- 


The  Air  Brush  applies  liquid  color  by  a jet  of  compressed  air.  It  is 
invaluable  in  any  photographic  studio  producing  large  work,  whether 
over  print  or  free-hand.  It  is  the  only  rapid  and  satisfactory  means  of 
finishing  Bromides.  A carefully  written  instruction  book  is  furnished 
with  each  instrument.  Write  for  descriptive  pamphlet  free. 


Price  of  Air  Brush,  complete $40  00 

“ “ “ and  easeh 45  00 


Six  per  cent,  discount  for  cash  or  C.  O.  D.  orders. 


ENTEEKIN'S  DIAMOND  PASTE. 


For  polishing  and  cleansing  the  burnishing  tool.  Paste  can  be  used 
when  roll  is  hot  or  cold.  Every  photographer  should  have  a box. 

Price,  per  box,  by  mail 20  cents 


CHAMOIS  SKIN,  35  to  75  cents  each. 


SPUER'S  FANCY  SCROLL  NEGATIVES. 

Made  on  Eas^^man’s  American  Films.  Take  no  others. 

Cabinet  size,  each $0  75 

Boudoir  size 1 00 

Cloud  negative 75 

:Set  of  seven.  Cabinet  size 5 00 

Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

183 


.“-AQ c/f  P/AF/^ 7-  CO.  new  rb'RK- 


HOWARD  FOTO-FOLIOS. 


These  Foto-Folios  are  different  from  the  ordinary  Foto-Folios  made 
for  holding  etchings,  photographs,  etc.,  in  having  flat  Cords,  which  are 
used  to  draw  and  bind  the  covers  firmly  together.  'On  the  sides  and  end 
of  the  Folio  are  jointed  flaps,  which  prevent  damage  by  dust  or  rubbing 
of  the  edges.  The  Cords  are  so  arranged  that  the  Photographs,  etc.,  are 
kept  perfectly  flat,  whether  there  be  one  or  a number  in  the  folio. 


Two  Styles,  Full  Cloth,  and  Half  Leather  Embossed,  Gilt  Lines. 


( 

• For 

Size 

.Thickness 

Price  > 

Half 

Full  leather 

Cards. 

Folio. 

when  filled. 

Cloth,  ea. 

Leather. 

Special. 

No. 

17. 

43^ 

X 

6K 

X 6^ 



$ 65 

■ $1  10 

it 

18. 

5 

X 

8 

X 8^ 

IK 

80 

$1  25 

(( 

i 

19. 

6^ 

X 

'8K' 

X 9K 

1^' 

1 10 

1 76 

it 

19a. 

7 

,x 

9 

■ ' 

X 914; 

IK 

1 10 

1 75^ 

, ’ :/-r 

it 

20.*; 

. 8 

X 

iq 

8X 

X 10^ 

".1^. 

1 35, 

, ^ ' 2 0 0' 

■■  li 

it 

21. 

10 

X 

12 

1114 

X 14K 

...2  _ 

I'OO 

2 50 

it 

21a. 

11 

X 

14 

iiH 

X 141^ 

2 

1 60 

2 50 

it 

22. 

14 

X 

17 

14^ 

X 17K 

2}4 

2 00 

3 00 

tt 

23. 

16 

X 

20 

16^ 

X 20^ 

2K 

2 50 

3 50 

Special  Styles  and  Sizes  to  order.  Prices  furnished  on  application. 


pr^seru(^  your  pl^otos  ^ood  sl^ape  by  djsipg  a 
J^ou/ard  poto-polio. 


184 


Thp  scHuL.rzE,  ':e^orp-:E^  co.  /v£w^  yorr.^ 


HOWHRD  HLBUmS 

FOR  PHOTOGRAPHS. 

The  Howard  Album,  with  interchangeable  cards,  is  the  latest  novelty- 
in  the  waj  of  an  album  for  mounting  photographs.  In  handsomely  em- 
bossed covers,  are  bound  25  of  Collins  cards,  which  are  chemically  pure 
from  all  matter  that  would  injure  the  photographs.  In  the  mode  of  bind- 
ing, and  their  interchangeable  feature,  lies  the  difference  between  this 
and  other  albums. 


To  each  card  are  attached  two  small  metallic  binding  loops,  so  fas- 
tened that  they  act  like  hinges;  through  the  projection  of  these  loops  a 
binding  cord  passes,  which  fastens  at  the  back  with  a tie;  thus  each  card 
is  bound  in  the  cover  independently,  and  may  be  taken  out  and  returned 
or  replaced  with  ease.  This  method  of  making  an  album  affords  the 
amateur  the  best  means  of  preserving  the  results  of  his  labor,  because 
each  picture  may  be  finished  before  putting  the  card  in  the  album.  The 
arrangement  of  the  pictures  may  also  be  altered  at  will — if  a single  6ard 
is  spoiled,  the  whole  album  is  not  ruined.  If- a picture  is  taken  out,  it 
can  be  quickly  and  readily  done  without  in  jury  to  the  volume. 


HOWAED  ALBUMS. 


Full  Cloth,  Embossed,  Gold  Label,  with  A.  M.  Collins  M/g^Coi’s  No. 


1 Cards. 


No. 

(( 

it 

a 

it 


1. 

2. 

2^. 

3. 

4; 


With  25  Collins  Cards. 


6x7  Cards,  for  4 x 5 Photographs $1  25> 

7 X 10  “ “ 5 X 8 “ 1 50 

8 X 10  “ “ 6^  X 81^  “ 2 00. 

10x12  “ “ 6>^x8^  “ 2 25 

11  X 14  “ “8  X 10  “ 2 50 


HOWAED  ALBUMS. 

Morocco^  Half  Leather,  Extra  Gold  Finish,  with  A.  M.  Collins  Mfg.  Co.'s  Cards,  Boxed. 


With  25  With  50 

Collins  Cards.  Collins  Cards. 


No. 

5. 

7 X 10  Cards,  for 

5 

X 8 

Photographs  $2  25 
“ 2 75 

No.  11. 

$3  50 

(< 

6. 

8 X 10 

H it 

6^ 

X 

“ 12. 

4 00. 

7. 

lOx  12 

• t it 

x834 

ii 

3 50 

“ 13. 

4 75 

it 

8. 

11  X 14 

ti  if 

8 

xlO 

4-00 

“ 14. 

5 50 

1 i 

9. 

14  X 17 

a •< 

10 

X 12 

or  11  X 14 

5 50 

“ 15. 

9 00 

it 

10. 

■ 16  X 20 

((  (< 

11- 

X 14 

or  14  X 17' 

7 75 

“ 16. 

11'  00> 

’ 185 


jrc H{/L,rz£  pro  ^ £q  r »c  o ■ /v£:w^  ycTrk  - 


Extra  Cards,  Collins’  Best,  for  Howard  Albums,  Mounted  with  Loops 

Ready  for  Use. 


6x7,  Package  of  one  dozen |0  38 

7 X 10,  “ “ “ 50 

8 X 10,  “ “ “ 60 

10  X 13,  “ “ “ 62 

11  X 14,  “ “ 88 

14x17,  “ “ “ 125 

16x20,  “ “ “ 155 


XHe  HOirt£KRD 

Negative  Preserver  and  Binder. 


These  convenient  Binders  consist  of  heavy,  finely  surfaced  envelopes 
•(Negative  Preservers),  secured  in  cloth  covers,  and  printed  for  reference, 
as  shown  in  cut,  and  are  designed  for  the  preservation  and  classification 
of  either  paper  or  glass  negatives,  or  mounted  or  unmounted  photo- 
graphs. 

The  Howard  Binders  occupy  much  less  space  than  negative  boxes. 
By  means  of  the  patent  adjustable  back,  the  file  enlarges  as  the  envelopes 


are  filled. 

The  Binders  are  all  made  with  front  flap  and  tie. 

No.  30.  For  4t|'  x 53^,  4x5,  and  x 4)4  negatives  or  prints $0  55 

No.  31.  For  5 X 8,  5 X 7,  41<£  x 634  negatives  or  prints. 65 

No.  32.  For  634  ^ ^34  negatives  or  prints. ' . . 85 

No.  33.  For  8x10  negatives  or  prints. 1 15 


186 


■^SCOVI1_1_'Sh^ 

Albums  I Phoi<o^papbs 


(KTJH^W  STYUEJ 


How  often  the  Amateur  Photographer  is  heard  to  remark,  that  as 
fast  as  he  makes  prints  from  a negative  his  friends  get  away  with  them, 
and  none  are  left  to  be  treasured  up  as  evidences  cf  his  advancement  in 
the  art.  In  order  to  keep  at  least  one  picture  from  each  negative,  and 
to  arrange  the  collection  in  the  best  manner  for  display  and  preserva- 
tion, tasteful  albums  have  been  introduced. 

Each  Album  has  48  pages,  24  leaves.  In  them  the  finest  cardboard 
only  is  used,  chemically  free  from  anything  that  could  injure  a print. 


F 3FK.  X O :E3  S . 


Size  of  Card 6x7  7 x 10  ' 10  x 12  11x14  14x17 

For  Photo,  (size) 4x5  5 x 8 x 8^  8x10  11x14 

Plain $1  25  ' 1 50  2 25  2 50  5 00 

'With  Prepared  Surface..  1 50  1 80  3 00  3 50  6 5fi 

With  Gilt  Lines 1 75  2 fO  2 75  3 00 


]f  tl^is  eatalo^tie  meets  yotir  sp(^eial  u/aQts,  se9d  us 
your  approval. 


187 


Th9  s'chuutze:  PHQrp'xEO Lr[Pz\El^ r co.  j^e:w  york* 


THE  ^dOVlLL  pOJ^TE-FEUlLLE 


Is  a device  for  the  preservation,  in  convenient  form,  of  cards  upon 
which  photographic  prints  have  been  mounted. 

A series  of  muslin  holders,  bound  between  covers  with  patent  flexi- 
ble backs,  constitute  a look  having  great  strength  of  binding  combined 
with  a flexibility  that  allows  the  book  to  be  opened  flat  without  strain. 
Prints  can  thus  be  put  into  book  form,  readily  and  securely,  after  they 
have  been  mounted,  and  also  (when  desi'ed)  burnished.  The  insertion  of 
the  cards  is  very  simple,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  directions  which  follow  : 
To  the  inner  faces  of  one  of  the  holders  apply  enough  paste  to  attach  the 
card  securely  ; not  so  much  as  will  smear  the  exposed  face  of  the  card  ; 
then  insert  the  card  and  rub  down  on  both  sides  ; allow  the  paste  to  dry- 
before  putting  in  another  card. 

Do  not  put  the  Paste  on  the  Card. 


PRICE  LIST  OF  PORTE-FEUIELE, 

Including  Twenty-five  Sheets  of  Collins’  Best  Quality  White  Cards. 

No.  1.  Outside  dimensions,  7x10  for  5 x 8 Photographs $1  50 

“ 2.  “ “ 10xl2for6^x  “ 2 10 

“ 3.  “ “ 11x14  for  8 xlO  “ 2 50 


Price  List  of  Porte-Feuille,  including  2.5  Sheets  of  Collins’  White 
Muslin-Back  Cards. 

No.  4.  Outside  dimensions,  7x10  for  5 x 8 Photographs $1  35 

“ 5.  “ “ 10  x‘12  for  634  X “ 2 00' 

“ 6.  “ “ 11x14  for  8 X 10  “ 2 40 


Price  List  of  Cards  per  package  of  25,  rot  including  Porte-Feuille^ 
Collins’  Best  White  Cards. 

7x10 $0  50  1 10x  12 $0  75 

11  X 14 $1  00 

Collins’  White  Muslin-Back  Cards. 

7 x 10 $0  35  I 10  X 12 $0  65 

11  X 14 10  90  . • 

Collins’  White  Muslin-Bach  Cards^  in  Rolls,  22  inches  wide,  lA^cts.per  yard^ 

188 


r 


r/)^  s^chuutze:  PHoro- EowiP/^Ei^r  co.  new  yo'rk- 


Ecl-ipse  7^i-bu7vt. 


(PATENTED.) 


The  Eclipse  Album,  with  interchangeable  leaves,  is  the  most  perfect 
manufactured.  Each  card  mount  is  distinctly  independent,  and  may  be 
taken  out  or  replaced  without  having  to  disturb  any  other  leaf  or  part 
of  album.  They  are  handsomely  finished  in  morocco  half  leather  bound, 
with  gilt  title,  and  enclosed  in  a neat  box. 

Extra  cards  for  Eclipse  Album  may  be  had  if  desired. 

PRICE  LIST. 

WITH  TWENTY-FOUR  COLLINS’  CARDS. 


No.  1.  6x7  cards,  for  4 x 5 photographs  $2  00 

“2.  7x  10  “ 6 x8  “ 2 25 

3.  10  X 12  “ 63^  X 8K  “ 3 50 

"‘4.  11 X 14  “ 8 X 10  “ 4 00 


PATENTED  TRANSPARENCY  FRAMES. 


These  are  made  with  one  side,  remova- 
ble, enabling  the  transparency  to  slide  into 
frame  easily  and  without  danger  of  break- 
ing. They  are  also  made  to  hang  either 
vertically  or  horizontally. 


4 X 6 $0  28 

4^x5K 30 

35 

5 X 7 35 

6^x7K 40 

6K  X 834 45 

6^  X 9 50 

8 X 10 50 

11  X 14 90 


189 


> " g yo'rk ‘ 


VENETIAN  TRANSPARENCY  FRAMES. 


With  either  Porcelain  or  Glass  Transparencies  the  Venetian  Trans- 
parency Frames  are  pronounced  “tres  elegant!”  On  account  of  the 
flexible  sides  these  Frames  are  more  readil}"  and  easily  adjusted  to  trans- 
parencies than  any  other  style.  Not  only  will  they  flt  glass  that  is  not  cut 
perfectly  true,  but  they  are  also  adjustable  for  one,  or  several  thicknesses 
of  glass. 

With  each  Venetian  Frame  a suitable  chain  pattern  is  furnished. 


ifenetian  Tpan^papEncij  Fpan]E  With  ^appending  Gljain. 


Size,  4 

X 5 

Size,  Opo  x 814'  • • . . 

“ 4'^ 



88  “ 

' “ 6->^x  9 .... 

48  “ 

“ 0 

X 7 

40  “ 

“ 8 V 1 0 

50  “ 

“ 5 

x8  

42  “ 

“ 10  X 12 

60  “ 



44  “ 

“ 11  X 14  

75  “ 

SPIRIT  L-MTVTRS. 


Glass,  each,  70  cents.  Britannia,  without  sliding  tube,  each,  76  cents. 
Britannia,  with  sliding  tube,  each,  85  cents.  - . 


190 


li 


f 


ErTGHBB  GBPiSS. 


FOR  TRANSPARENCY  FRAMES. 

6^  X 7^  for  4x5  Photos fO  30 

6%x  9 “5  X 8 “ 45 

8 xlO  “ 534x  7^  “ . 50 

10  xl2  “8  X 10  “ 63 


FIRST  QUALITY  PLAIN  &E0UND  GLASS. 


X 5 $0  08 

_ X 5^ 10 

4^x6^ 10 

5 X 7 12 

5 X 8 12 


8^  X 8j4 10  25 

6K  X 81^ 15 

8 X 10  25 

10  X 10  35 

10  X 12  50 


12  X 12 

....  $0  75 

11  X 14 

....  1 00 

14  X 14 

....  1 25 

14x17 

....  1 50 

17  X 17 

....  1 75 

THE  ANTHONY  • 

Self-Changing  Shower  Washing  Box. 


Price 


The  Anthony  Self-Changing  Shower 
Washing  Box,  for  dry-pJate  negatives,  is  a 
nicely  constructed  and  convenient  appar- 
atus, made  substantially,  and  well  japan- 
ned inside  and  out.  It  has  interior  grooves 
in  which  either  5x8  or  8 x 10  negatives 
may  be  placed.  When  the  negatives  are 
introduced,  the  hose  is  attached  to  a faucet ; 
the  lid  is  now  closed  and  locked,  if  desired, 
and  the  water  turned  on. 

It  will  he  seen  that  the  water  enters 
the  washer  from  above,  and  that  the  inside 
of  the  lid  is  made  in  the  form  of  a per- 
forated f ountain,  which  discharges  a spray 
over  the  plates.  When  the  negatives  are 
entirely  submerged,  the  water  is  all  drawn 
off  by  means  of  a self-acting  siphon,  and 
the  process  of  showering  is  repeated. 

With  this  apparatus  the  hypo  can  be 
thoroughly  eliminated  from  the  gelatine 
film  in  from  fifteen  minutes  to  half  an 
hour.  The  change  of  water  is  continuous. 

, 15  00 


191 


^CHuL^rz^'  co.  /^ew  ycrk* 


The  ScoYlll  Negative  Washing  Boxes. 


(PATENTED.) 


The  Scovill  Negative  Washing  Boxes  are  now  made,  as  shown  in  the 
above  illustrations,  so  that  plates  may  be  taken  out  without  putting  the 
fingers  in  the  washing  water.  The  perforated  bottom  prevents  water 
from  passing  through  the  box  with  too  great  force,  and  distributes  it  so 
that  every  plate  and  every  portion  of  a plate  is  equally  washed. 


For  314  X 4, >4  Plates $1  60 

“ 4 X 5 “ 1 75 

“ 41^  X 5K  “ 190 

“ 6H  “ 2 00 

“ 5 X 7 “ 2 10 

“ 5 X 8 “ 2 15 

“ 6K  X 81.^  “ 2 25 

“ 8 X 10  “ 2 50 

“ 10  X 12  “ 3 25 

“ 11  X 14  “ 3 75 

“ 14  X 17  “ 4 80 


Scovill  Alaotable  Neiative  WasUac  Boica 


I 


5x7, 

5x8, 

6^x 

8 X 10, 

10  X 12, 

11  X 14, 


(PATENTED.) 

Adapted  for  4x5  and  31^  x 41^  Plates 

“ “ 4 X 5 and  3l|' X 4i^  Plates 

“ “ 5 X 8,  5 X 7,  4 X 5 and  x 4}^  Plates 

“ “ 634  X 834  > 5x8,  5x7,  4x5  and  33^x434' 

“ “ 8 X 10,  634  X 83^.  5x8,  5x7,  4x5  and 

33^  x ^ Plates 

“ “ 8x10,  63^  X 834»  5x8,  5x7,  4x5  and 

33^  X 414^  Plates 


Each. 

$2  70 

2 75 

3 00 

3 50 

4 00 
4 50 


Latest  :-8  x 10  ADJUSTABLE  WASHINS  BOX. 


Adjustable  for  63^  x 834>  5 x 8,  5 x 7,  4 x 5,  d}^  x 434  Plates.  A//  Sizes 
to  be  Washed  at  Once.  Price,  $4.00. 

192 


\ 


THE  HDT 


->}PATMT  * MANIPULMH)!!.!^ 


The  combined  features  of  this  Deyice  make  it  an  indispensable  con- 
trivance for  the  Dark-Room. 


ADAPTABLE  FOR  VARIOUS  SIZE  TRAYS. 


As  will  be  seen  by  a glance  at  the  cut,  this  device  not  only  protects 
the  hands  in  lifting  the  plate  from  the  developer,  but  as  they  do  not  come 
in  contact  with  the  tray,  stained  fingers  are  entirely  avoided. 

It  not  only  prevents  soiling  the  hands,  but  will  be  found  a great  aid 
in  manipulating  the  plate. 

It  is  attachable  to  and  will  firmly  hold  various  sizes  and  depths  of 
trays  without  adjusting. 

The  lifter  is  of  German  Silver,  fiattened  at  the  end,  thus  requiring  no 
extra  amount  of  developer. 

They  are  strongly  made  and  heavily  nickel-plated  throughout. 


Price,  85  Cents  Each. 


RUBBER  TUBING  AND  STOPPLES. 


We  can  furnish  any  size  Rubber  Tubing  and  Stopples  to  order.  Sizes 
and  prices  furnished  on  application. 


U/e  eap  fijr9isl7  all  ^oods  ii^  tl^e  lii^e  of  /Irtist’s  (nation- 
als 3t  lou/est  prices. 


193 


■s^i-  \isL.  •?•  Sd  •»'  O.  •i'^ 

^epfeet  ^pegepving 

FOR  SENSITIZED  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PAPERS. 

(PATENT  APPLIED  FOR.) 

0@pp^0¥,  KHIlIllBIlM,  ^IE»¥iep¥. 


No.  1. 
“ 2. 
“ 3. 
“ 4. 
“ 5. 


Holds  4 X 5 to  4J4  X 614  (Preservative  extra)  |0  90- 


“ 5 X.  7 to5  X 8 “ “ 1 10 

“ 61^  X 8^  to  8 X 10  “ “ 1 50 

“ 18  X 22 “ “ 2 00 

“ 18  X 22  Gallery  use  “ “ 3 OO 


: ■I'XZDE:  : 

W.  \ d.  pepfeot  papep  ppe^ePVatiVB 

will  keep  Sensitized  Paper  FRESH  and  BRIL- 
LIANT FOR  MONTHS. 

EIGHT  YEARS  in  constant  use  in  Europe^ 
Paper  can  be  silyered  on  dull,  cloudy  days,  and: 
used  wlieneyer  needed.  Proof  Paper  always  fresh 
and  ready  for  use. 


Tin  box,  size  for  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3 Tubes each,  $0  20 

“ “ “ 4 and  5 “ 0 35^ 


ANY  SIZE  TUBE  MADE  TO  ORDER. 


194 


rAp  ^Horo"  EOLr{P/\Et^T  co.  rb'R k • 


Peerless  Tarnisl  Pot  and  Filterer. 


Patent  applied  for. 

It  is  a tin  pot,  as  shown  in  cut,  with  a filter  and  funnel  as  shown  in 
the  top  ; rubber  stopper  in  spout. 

Put  your  varnish  in  clean,  fiow  your  plates,  and  drain  surplus  varnish 
back  through  the  funnel  in  the  top,  and  you  will  never  be  troubled  with 
specks  of  dirt  in  your  varnish.  Pot  holds  16  ounces.  Price,  each,  50  cts. 


TRKNSLUClNe. 

For  Rendering  Eastman’s  Paper  Negatives  Translucent  Without 
the  Use  of  Heat. 

Directions. — Pour  a little  of  the  Translucine  on  to  the  back  of  the 
negative  and  spread  with  the  finger  evenly  over  the  surface ; in  four  or 
five  hours  the  Translucine  will  have  soaked  into  the  paper,  rendering  it 
nearly  transparent  and  free  from  grain.  Heat  is  not  necessary,  but  may 
be  used  to  accelerate  its  action.  When  the  paper  is  of  an  even  dark  color, 
wipe  off  rhe  excess  of  Translucine  with  a clean  rag,  and  the  negative  is 
ready  to  print. 

If  the  negative  is  in  constant  use,  an  occasional  application  of  the 
Translucine  will  keep  it  in  good  condition. 

Price,  per  bottle $0  35 


195 


Barnett’s  Milm  Barriers. 


The  introduction  of  Films  has  called  for  a medium  or  carrier  to 
handle  them.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  use  Films  in  holders  now 
on  the  market,  Barnett’s  Film  Carrier  gives  him  the  means  of  hand- 
ling this  new  negative  producer  as  flat  as  glass. 

The  Film  is  held  at  each  end. 


Price 

Price 

Sizes. 

per  Doz. 

Sizes. 

per  Doz. 

31^  X 414 

$1  30 

5x7  

$2  00 

4 X 5 

1 40 

5 X 8 

2 00 

41^4  X 5^ 

1 40 

6Kx  8K 

2 25 

4Mx  6K 

1 60 

8 X 10  

2 50 

Other  sizes  made  to  order  at  special  prices. 


BARNETT’S  PATENT  UNIVERSAL  FILM  CARRIER. 

The  Universal  Film  Carrier  will  carry  films,  perfectly  made  ; fit  any 
holder  now  made;  and,  by  means  of  a movable  end,  easily  adjust  any  un- 
evenness of  edge,  and  is  perfect  for  the  use  intended.  ^ 

Directions  for  Filling  the  Universal  Carrier. 

First. — Slide  the  films  into  grooves  on  side  of  carrier  to  within  a short 
distance  of  end. 

Second. — Place  a piece  of  paper  over  end  of  plate  into  brass  groove, 
when  the  film  can  be  readily  pushed  in  place. 

Third. — Extend  the  other  end  of  carrier  by  pulling  out  the  side.  Use 
same  means  as  in  adjusting  at  other  end.  When  the  slide  can  be  closed. 
There  is  no  necessity  of  the  fingers  touching  the  film  in  placingin  carrier. 


Price 

Sizes. 

per  Doz. 

iH 

|2  00 

4 X 5 

2 00 

X 534 

2 25 

4>4  X 63/2 

2 50 

Price 

' per  Doz. 

5 X 7 $2  75 

5 X 8 2 75 

6K  X 8^ 3 25 

8 X 10  4 00 


' 196 


Anthony’s  Bromide  Easel. 


I 


18— 

“111 


1 1 


ANTHDNy 


fjp 


This  cut  shows  the  front  of  the  appar- 
atus, which  is  very  simple  and  plain,  save- 
for  the  curtain-like  screen  which  hangs  fromi 
a roller  on  top.  The  screen  is  of  muslin,  and( 
has  printed  upon  it  in  bold  lines  and  figures 
the  outlines  and  sizes  of  bromide  paper.  It 
is  movable  up  and  down,  and  may  be  rolled 
up  at  pleasure. 

•The  object  of  this  movement  is  to  facili- 
tate the  centering  of  the  plan  board  with  the 
lens  of  the  enlarging  camera. 

Hitherto  this  has  been  only  accom- 
plished by  raising  or  lowering  the  whole 
plan  board  itself,  or  by  doing  the  same  thing 
with  the  camera.  Sometimes  a piece  of 

L paper  is  tacked  on  and  outlined,  but  is  hardly 

ever  in  accurate  position  for  two  successive 

negatives.  It  will  be  readily  seen  that  these 
expedients  are  not  only  inconvenient,  but 
risky,  and  liable  to  cause  serious  errors  in 
getting  the  right  position  of  the  picture  on 
your  sheet  of  paper.  The  turning  of  a little 
thumb-screw  will  raise  or  lower  this  curtain,, 
and  accomplishes  what  is  desired  in  a most 
simple  and  easy  manner.  When  the  right 
position  is  obtained,  the  cap  is  put  on  the  lens,  and  with  four  thumb-tacks 
or  other  suitable  pins  the  sensitive  paper  is  attached  to  the  corresponding 
outlined  size,  and  the  exposure  made. 

The  curtain  is  printed  in  duplicate,  so  that  when  the  first  becomes^ 
worn  or  soiled  it  can  be  cut  ofif  and  the  other  used  in  its  place. 

Price  of  Easel  and  Curtain $10  00 


ANTHONY’S 

UNIUERSIIIi  EflSEIi. 

F r making  enlargements,  hold- 
ing pictures  for  copying,  either 
opaque  or  transparent.  Will  take 
from  smallest  size  up  to  25  x 30. 

The  board  can  be  removed  and 
folded  into  small  space,  and  the 
entire  easel  can  be  unbolted  and 
rolled  into  a small  bundle  in  a few 
minutes.  It  can  be  inclined  for- 
ward or  backward,  and  meets 
every  want  for  an  article  of  its^ 
kind. 

Price $7  50' 


197 


irc IS ' f^£iy/  York* 


Eastman’s  Enlarging  Easel 

WITH  SPOOL  HOLDER  ATTACHED 

Us  U6e&  in  lEaetman's  lEnlarging  Department. 

This  apparatus  is  for  use  with 
either  natural  or  artificial  lieht 
enlarging  cameras,  or  with  the 
magic  lantern,  and  consists  of  an 
easel  made  to  stand  upon  the 
floor,  and  a spool  holder  fixture, 
which  liolds  tlie  roll  of  Perma- 
nent Bromide  Paper.  For  use, 
the  paper  is  drawn  down  like  a 
curtain  and  fastened  on  the  face 
of  the  easel  by  a hinged  frame, 
which,  when  in  place,  serves  as  a 
guide  for  registering  the  image 
correctly.  After  exposure,  each 
length  is  cut  off  and  a fresh  piece 
pulled  flown.  When  not  in  use, 
the  spool  of  paper  is  enclosed 
light-tight  in  the  holder.  Each 
easel  is  accompanied  by  one 
spool  ho  der.  If  it  is  desired  to 
use  several  widths  of  paper  on 
the  easel,  extra  spool  holders, 
which  are  interchangeable,  may 
be  f'uiployed. 

The  rnetho  I of  exposing  paper 
by  means  of  Eastman’s  enlarging 
easel  and  spool  holder  presents 
many  advantages.  It  obviates 
altogether  the  liability  of  finger 
marking  and  scratching  the  paper 
in  handling,  and  renders  the  regis- 
tering of  the  image  on  the  paper  certain  and  simple,  and  saves  time  and 
trouble  in  handling  the  paner. 

A few  sheets  of  paper  spoiled  by  handling  in  the  old  way  would  pay 
for  one  of  these  easels. 

Cut  sheets  nuiy  be  exposed  on  these  easels,  in  which  case  the  sheet 
may  be  pinned  to  the  face  of  the  easel,  or  better,  a film  carrier  may  be 
used,  the  hinired  clamping  frame  and  kits  being  all  provided  with  clips 
for  holding  the  ( arrier. 

IPIRIOE,  OOMIPLETE. 

No.  1.  For  spools  up  to  and  including  11  inches,  11  x 14 

pictures $7 

No.  2.  For  spools  up  to  and  including  16  inches,  for 

16  X 20  pictures 10 

No.  3.  For  spools  up  to  and  including  22  inches,  for 

22  X 27  pictures 12 

No.  4.  For  spools  up  to  and  including  25  inches,  for 

25  X 30  pictures 15 


S^l^dltze’s  prepari^d  5olatio9S  4J9eq4jall<^d. 


50 

00 

50 

00 


198 


S'CHUL^TZE:  photo  - £QUJPZ\^T  CO.  /v£w/  YORK* 


EASTMAN'S  KITS  FOR  ENLARGING  EASELS. 


Outside,  25  x :.0,  inside,  22  x 27 $1  50 

“ 22  x 27,  20  x24 1 40 

“ 20  x 24,  “ 18x22 1 30 

“ 18x22,  “ 16x20 120 

“ 16x20,  “ 14x17 100 

“ 14x17,  “ 11x14 80 

“ 11x14,  “ 10x12 ■ 66 

“ 10x12,  “ 8x10 60 


These  Kits  are  made  to  nest  one  into  the  other,  and  they  are  provided 
-with  buttons  for  fastening  in  place;  also,  spring  clips  for  holding  East- 
man’s  Film  Carriers  for  cut  sheets. 

PHOTOGRHPHING  ON  SILK. 

PERFECT,  SIMPLE,  ELEGANT. 

SPURR’S  SILK  PRINTING  SOLUTIONS. 

These  chemicals  have  No  Equal  for  Brilliancy.  No  humbug,  but  a 
practical  process  for  making  photographs  on  the  most  delicate  silk  fabrics 
or  linen. 

They  do  not  print  in  the  cloth  and  make  a flat  picture.  Any  desired 
tone  can  be  had  from  a rich  brown  to  a blue-black;  easy  to  manipulate 
and  never  failing.  Can  be  used  in  many  ways  for  souvenirs,  hat  marks, 
bamiers,  silk  scarfs,  handkerchiefs,  etc.  They  Will  Create  a Sensation. 

The  progressive  photographer  who  introduces  this  work  and  makes  a 
few  samples  and  does  not  set  the  chemicals  upon  a shelf  and  wait  for 
some  one  to  call  for  it,  but  advertises,  pushes  and  wakes  up  the  people,  is 
the  one  who  is  in  the  lead.  Remember  one  set  of  these  chemicals  costs  $3, 
and  will  make  100  Prints  at  $1  each. 

As  easy  to  manipulate  as  albumen  paper,  and  none  genuine  unless 
put  up  in  blue  glass  bottles  with  name  engraved  in  the  side. 


16  oz.  Salting  Solution $1  50 

8 oz.  Sensitizing  Solution. 1 50 


199 


TUB 


HlBBAi  BEPEATING  FLASE-LAHP. 

[WITH  PATENT  ATTACHMENTS.] 

PEEFECT,  SAFE  AND  EELIABLE. 


There  is  no  waste  of  Material,  and  any  intensity  of  illumin* 
ation  can  he  obtained  with  pure  Mag-nesium  Powder, 


Alili  METAL  WORK  NICKEL  PLATED. 


LAMP  AND  ATTACHMENTS. 


This  is  the  only  convenient,  economical  and  satisfactory  lamp  yet 
invented,  and  a trial  will  convince  the  most  skeptical  that  a lamp  has  been 
produced  which  meets  every  requirement. 

Its  great  advantages  will  be  appreciated  by  the  amateur  as  well  as  the 
professional  photographer.  It  will  afford  the  amateur  endless  amuse- 
ment, and  add  to  the  profits  of  the  professional.  The  expense  for  light  is 
reduced  to  a minimum.  The  advantage  of  being  able  to  repeat  the  flash 
a half  dozen  times  from  one  charge  of  magnesium,  its  small  size  (Pocket) 
and  regulated  intensity,  are  some  of  its  points  of  superiority. 

Everyone  possessing  a camera  can  find  a thousand  uses  for  this  lamp. 

It  is  placed  in  a convenient  little  box,  5 x 334  ^ 2 inches,  which  con- 
tains besides  the  lamp  and  attachments,  a bottle  for  holding  alcohol,  one^' 
for  powder  and  an  extra  charge  bottle. 

5gf“This  lamp  is  endorsed  by  the  best  known  amateur  and  profession^ 
photographers,  and  is  warranted  to  give  perfect  satisfaction. 


PRICE  BY  MAIL $3  50 

In  full  Leather  Box  with  Handle. 4 50 


200 


S^'CHi/L^rZEi  YORK* 


The  “Safety”  Flash  Ignitep. 


(PATENT  APPLIED  FOR.) 


This  Igniter  can  be  used  either  for 
flash  compounds,  magnesium  cart- 
ridges, or  pure  magnesium  powder  on 
bed  of  gun  cotton.  It  is  safer  and  more 
reliable  in  its  working  than  any  similar 
apparatus  heretofore  used.  No  un- 
steady, dangerous  and  expensive  alco- 
hol flame.  No  premature  explosion  of 
powder.  The  only  Igniter  that  burns 
without  a flame.  The  flash  can  be  con- 
trolled by  operator  from  his  camera 
without  any  assistance  and  from  any 
distance,  as  the  Igniter  is  equally  reli- 
able with  any  length  of  tubing.  Two 
or  more  flashes  can  be  ignited  at  exactly 
the  same  instant  by  using  two  or  more 
igniters  in  connection  with  double  neck 
bulb  or  forked  tube  connections. 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  USE- 

Remove  the  Flash  Pan  top  and  withdraw  the  Carbon  Holder.  Light 
the  Carbon  without  removing  it  from  holder  and  when  well  aglow  put 
back  the  holder  in  its  place.  Close  circular  opening  in  center  of  flash 
pan  with  small  wad  of  gun  cotton,  allowing  the  wad  to  protrude  just  a 
trifle  below  the  opening.  Pour  the  flash  powder  on  pan  covering  gun 
cotton  wad.  Replace  the  pan  on  igniter  and  when  ready  to  flash  press- 
the  bulb. 

To  insert  a new  carbon  turn  retaining  pin  to  one  side  and  force  the 
carbon  down  into  holder  by  compressing  the  feeding  spring.  While 
spring  is  compressed  turn  back  retaining  pin  over  center  of  carbon, which 
is  now  lighted  as  above.  A drop  of  water  at  end  of  finger  or  of  a match 
will  extinguish  the  carbon  after  exposure  is  made  so  that  a number  of 
exposures  can  be  made  before  renewing  the  carbon. 

Price  of  Safety  Flash  Igniter,  including  box  of  scented  carbons,, 
rubber  bulb  and  3 feet  of  rubber  tubing,  complete  in  wooden  box,  $4.00. 

Extra  boxes  of  prepared  and  scented  carbons,  enough  for  over  100' 
exposures,  25  cents. 

Extra  rubber  tubing,  in  lengths  up  to  50  feet,  per  foot,  5 cents. 


plasl;  pi70to§rapl7y  is  botl;  Ii^stmetiv/e  a9d 

profitabl(^.  Sry  It. 


201 


41  imPERIHL  1^ 


Magnesium  Flash  Lamp. 


For  Professional  and  Amateur  Photography. 

J^void  the  use  of  dangerous  Compouids — Use  Pure  Magnesium  only, 


UY  THK  USK  OF  THE 

Imperial  NIagnesium  Flash  Lamp. 

(PATENT  APPLIED  FOR.) 

Absolute  safety  secured,  and  the 
strongest  illumination  obtained,  with 
none  of  the  dangers  to  person  or  sur- 
roundings attendant  upon  the  use  of 
some  of  the  many  dangerous  and  u’  - 
safe  Flash  Light  Compounds  now 
upon  the  market. 

We  are  assured  by  Scientific  ex- 
perts and  professional  Photographers 
that  magnesium  alone,  uncom- 
pounded with  anything  else,  gives 
the  most  perfect  actinic  effect. 

The  simplicity  of  construction  and 
manipulation,  enabling  all  to  use  it 
with  the  utmost  ease  and  certainty 
of  result,  will  at  once  commend  itself  to  both  the  Professional  and  Ama- 
teur. The  amount  of  smoko  given  off  is  insignificant;  exposure  succeed- 
ing exposure  without  hindrance  therefrom.  The  full  charge  is  15  grains 
(at  the  utmost  20  grains)  of  pure  Magnesium  ; a few  grains,  however 
(3  to  5),  being  sufficient  for  simple  portraiture.  The  cost  of  each  charge 
is  a fraction  of  a cent.  It  is  specially  adapted  for  interiors,  in  fact  is 
essential  therefor,  as  the  pictu«e  is  frre  from  solarization,  necessarily 
attending  many  other  artificial  lights.  A lucrative  evening  business  can 
be  speedily  built  up,  as  with  the  use  of  this  Lamp  negatives  may  be 
-secured  with  quicker  exposure,  and  more  certainty,  than  by  daylight. 

Full  directions  accompany  each  Lamp.  Price,  $6  00. 


Odr  eopstapt  ai/i)  is  to  seru(^  odr  patrols  pro/riptly, 
el^eaply  ai^d  u/ell. 


202 


’THe  Reeves 


FqAGQEsiuHi  FixASM  kjsrqp. 

(PATENT  APPLIED  FOR.) 

This  new  and  unique  lamp  renders  it  possible  to  make  fully  exposed 
aegatives  at  night  with  results  equal  to  and  not  distinguishable  from 
daylight  pictures. 

Reference  to  the  cut  shows  its  simplicity  and  easy  method  of  using. 

The  rimmed  back,  7 x 934  inches  in  size, 
holds  horizontally  two  wicks,  the  pan  be- 
low has  other  wicks  or  pads  of  cotton 
wool,  surrounding  the  bowl  of  an  ingeni- 
ously shaped  brass  blow-pipe,  to  which  is 
attached  a rubber  tube  ar.d  bulb.  To  use  it 
the  pipe  is  charged  with  powdered  metallic 
magnesium,  a small  quantity  of  alcohol 
poured  on  the  wicks,  which  when  lighted 
give  a very  large  flame  (the  width  of  the 
back  and  several  inches  higher),  pressure 
on  the  bulb  fires  the  magnesium  through 
the  blaze,  the  result  being  a flash  of  tre- 
mendous size  and  actinic  power.  Then 
the  back,  which  is  hinged,  is  shut  down,  at 
once  extinguishing  the  blazing  alcohol. 

There  is  no  Smoke,  and,  there  being  no  reservoir  for  alcohol,  there  is 
absolutely  no  danger  of  explosion. 

The  bowl  of  the  blow-pipe  is  so  designed  that  it  spreads  the  magne- 
sium in  a fan-like  shape  through  all  parts  of  the  flame,  using  only  about 
twelve  grains  of  powder. 

Inside  the  hinged  back  are  hooks  to  fasten  the  wicks,  also  a false  back 
with  curved  bottom  to  convey  the  superfluous  alcohol  from  upper  wicks 
into  lower  pan.  The  back  has  spring  to  set  it  at  any  angle;  there  is  a 
guard  or  fender  to  blow-pipe  to  prevent  it  overheating,  and  cover  for 
same.  The  whole  is  well  and  strongly  made  throughout  of  Russia  iron, 
neatly  mounted  on  metal-covered  board,  packed  in  box. 

The  results  attainable  with  this  lamp  are  simply  astonishing;  it  will 
illuminate  the  largest  sitting-rooms,  so  that  the  smallest  detail  at  furthest 
end  of  room  are  well  defined  on  negative.  The  flash  being  so  large  and 
well  diffused  there  are  no  sharp  shadows;  for  t ie  same  re.ason  the  light 
is  not  so  trying  on  the  eyes  as  when  the  flash  proceeds  from  a point,  as 
with  the  explosive  compounds. 

Full  instructions  inclosed  with  lamp. 

Price  complete,  including  rubber  tube  and  bulb,  wicks,  etc.,  $3  00. 


I^(^pdtatio9  serves  to  virtue  35  li^l^t  does  to  a picture. 


203 


1 ^ cp.  /V£W  Vo'rk-’ 


Pneumatic  Flashb®. 


This  is  a most  ingenious  in- 
vention. Simple  in  construction, 
compact  in  form,  safe  to  use.  It- 
consists  of  a blow-pipe,  small 
horizontal  lamp,  circular  flash 
pan,  and  a rubber  bulb  and  tub- 
ing. A gentle  pressure  on  the 
rubber  bulb  throws  the  flame  into 
the  flash-pan,  and  ignites  the  com- 
pound instantly.  It  saves  the 
eyes  of  the  operator,  as  he  can 
watch  his  subjects  instead  of  look- 
ing after  a lighted  match  or  taper* 
It  is  made  of  brass,  neat  in  design, 
and  is  so  compact  that  it  can  be 
carried  in  the  coat  pocket. 

Price $1  50 


Violet  Lightning  Flash  Gompoiind. 

PRICE : 


Small  bottle |0  40 

One-ounce  bottle 75 

Four-ounce  bottle 2 25 

Eight-ounce  bottle 4 25 

Sixteen-ounce  bottle 7 50 


PURE  MAGNESIUM  POWDER. 

Per  ounce $0  50 


BLITZ  PULVER 


Per  package  of  20  charges 


$0  00' 


SCHULTZE’S  BEST  FLASH  POWDER. 

Per  1 -ounce  bottle $0  35. 


204 


Th9  SCHUUrZE  f^HOro-EQinP/\El^T  CO.  mew  YORK- 


MAGNESIUM  CARTRIDGES. 


It  is  an  easy  matter  to  photograph  in  the  dark  by  means  of  the 
Scovill  Magnesium  Cartridge.  Anyone  can  do  it,  the  requirements  are 
so  simple. 

Focus  by  means  of  a candle  or  lamp  held  close  to  the  subject,  if  a 
-portrait,  to  one  of  the  central  members  of  a group  ; or,  if  in  an  interior, 
to  a place  where  detail  is  prominent,  as  wall  paper  or  carpet. 

For  the  exposure,  select  the  size  cartridge  most  suitable  for  the  sub- 
ject. Place  the  cartridge  on  a saucer  or  metal  plate,  and  behind  it  a card- 
board screen  of  about  a yard  square,  to  reflect  the  light  on  the  subject. 
The  cartridge  should  be  supported  about  the  height  of  the  camera  from 
the  floor,  and  behind  the  camera,  to  one  side.  Remove  the  cap  of  the 
cartridge  before  lighting  the  fuse. 


Small  size,  in  packages  of  six,  per  package $0  30 

Large  “ “ “ “ 40 


^ICHMBSON’S  t GUC®  t LUBfilMOH. 

Entirely  New,  and  the  Best  Imitation  of  Glace  ever  Discovered. 

Just  as  easy  to  apply  as  common  soap  lubricator,  and  as  beautiful  re- 
sults can  be  obtained  as  with  the  real  glace  method.  In  offering  this  new 
preparation  to  the  fraternity,  we  do  so  without  the  slightest  hesitancy, 
feeling  confident  that  it  possesses  so  many  virtues  that  when  a fair  trial 
is  given,  it  will  be  found  to  be  utterly  indispensable  to  every  gallery. 
There  are  times  when  every  photographer  has  trouble  in  burnishing  his 
prints.  ' They  will  not  take  a polish.  With  the  use  of  this  lubricator  the 
trouble  is  always  avoided.  It  produces  a beautiful,  rich,  satin  polish, 
strengthens  shadows,  brings  out  detail,  fills  the  pores  of  the  paper,  leav- 
ing a thin  film  over  the  picture  which  protects  from  the  action  of  the 
atmosphere,  preventing  spotting  and  fading  to  a great  extent.  Nothing 
heretofore  ever  used  makes  a picture  look  so  beautiful.  Since  first  intro- 
ducing this  preparation  we  have  improved  it  greatly.  It  can  now  be  used 
on  any  kind  of  mount,  colored  or  otherwise.  The  color  will  not  come  off, 
and  it  never  fails  to  produce  a beautiful  gloss. 


Price  per  Bottle  of  8 ounces $1  00 

“ “ “ 4 “ 50 

“ “ “4  “ by  mail,  postage  paid 75 


205 


Tht?  s;CHUL.rZE.  PHOTO- EQUI  CO.  /V£W/  YORK- 


EASTMAN’S  PERMANENT  BROMIDE  PAPER. 

S oxr  O. 

In  Bolls  or  on  Spools  for  Eastman's  Enlarging  Easels. 

Patented  May  5,  1885. 


Per  Yard. 


10  inches  wide $0  56 

11  “ 62 

12  “ 68 

14  “ 79 

16  “ 90 

18  “ 1 00 


Per  Yard. 


20  inches  wide $1  12 

22  “ 1 24 

24  “ 1 55 

25  “ 1 40 

30  “ 1 68 

31  “ 1 74 


Not  less  than  10  yards  on  a spool. 


CUT  SHEETS. 


3^  X 4^ 10  25 

4 X 5 40 

11  X 14 $3  00 

12  X 15 3 35 

41^  X 5^ 50 

4^x  634 55 

4^x  634 60 

5 X 7 65 

14  X 17 4 50 

16  X 20 6 00 

17  X 20 6 40- 

18  X 22 7 50 

5 X 734 

5 X 8 75 

20  X 24 9 00 

22  X 27 11  25 

634  X 8^ ^10 

8 X 10  1 50 

24  X 30 13  30- 

25  X 30 14  00 

10  X 12  2 25 

24  X 36 16  00 

10  X 14  2 65 

30  X 40 22  50 

other  sizes  in  proportion.  . 

If  ordered  in  packages  of  less  than  one  dozen,  an  extra  charge  of  25 
cents  will  be  made  for  packing. 


“A”  thin,  smooth  surface;  “B”  heavy,  smooth  surface;  “C” 
heavy,  rough  surface. 


"EXTPA  qUlCK"  fEplVTA^EKT  BpOlVTIDE 

For  use  with  artificial  light  or  with  hard  negatives,  we  issue  an 
“ Extra  Quick  ” paper.  This  paper  gives  a softer  chemical  effect  than 
our  “Standard”  paper,  and  works  with  one-third  to  one-half  the  ex- 
posure. With  this  paper  a print  can  be  obtained  from  any  negative,  no 
matter  how  hard. 

For  all  ordinary  purposes,  we  recommend  the  “ Standard  ” paper. 
No  difference  in  price. 


206 


EASTMAN’S  NEEATIHE  PAPER. 

This  Negative  Paper  is  adapted  for  landscape  and  interior  work,  and 
for  large  portraits.  For  these  purposes  it  is  equal  to  glass  in  all  respects, 
and  has  the  important  advantages  of  portability,  freedom  from  halation, 
and  economy.  Full  directions  with  every  package. 

CUT  SHEETS. 


Size. 

Per  Package. 

Size. 

Per  Package. 

3V  X 4k:, 

two  doz.  in  box. . 

$0  65 

11  X 14,  one  doz.  in  oox 

4 

X 5, 

<(  i( 

90 

14  X 17,  “ “ 

4^x  634, 

<< 

1 40 

16x20,  “ ‘‘ 

5 

X 7, 

ii  U 

1 55 

17x20,  “ “ 

7 75 

5 

X 7K, 

((  << 

1 65 

18x22, 

9 00 

5 

X 8, 

i6  6i 

1 75 

20  x24,  “ “ 

12  00 

634 

X 834, 

ti  ii 

2 45 

24x36,  “ “ 

20  00 

8 

X 10, 

3 50 

30  X 40, 

27  50 

10 

X 12, 

one  doz.  in  box. . 

2 60 

ON 

SPOOLS,  TO  FIT  ROLL  HOLDERS. 

334  inches,  for  two  doz. 

314 

X 434  exposures 

$0  75 

4 

H 

a 

4 

X 5 “ 

1 00 

4^ 

H 

ii 

434 

X 734  “ 

1 80 

494 

i i 

a 

4^ 

X 634  “ 

1 55 

5 

6 6 

ii 

5 

X 8 “ 

2 00 

634 

U 

634  X 834  “ 

2 70 

8 

U 

ii 

8 

X 10  “ 

4 00 

10 

u 

a 

10 

X 12  “ 

6 00 

11 

ii 

11 

X 14  “ 

8 00 

14 

a 

one  doz. 

14 

X 17  “ 

6 00’ 

16 

a 

ii 

16 

X 20  “ 

8 00 

18 

ii 

18 

X 22  “ 

10  00 

20 

a 

20 

x24  “ 

13  25 

25 

6( 

25 

X 30  “ 

20  00 

Spool’s  wound  with  3 or  4 dozen,  if  required. 


EASTMAH’S  AMERICAN  FILMS. 

Patented  May  5,  1885. 

The  American  Film  consists  of  a film  of  insoluble  sensitive  gelatine 
emulsion  attached  to  a paper  supported  by  means  of  a layer  of  soluble 
plain  gelatine.  The  paper  serves  as  a temporary  support  during  the 
operations  of  exposure,  developing,  fixing  and  washing,  after  which 
the  film  is  laid  down  on  a prepared  sheet  of  glass,  the  paper  is  removed 
by  warm  water,  which  dissolves  the  soluble  gelatine  layer  and  leaves  the 
film  on  the  glass;  the  paper  is  then  replaced  by  a varnish  of  thick  gela- 
tine and  glycerine,  dried,  and  the  whole  stripped  from  the  glass  ready  for 
printing.  Full  details  of  the  operations  outlined  are  given  in  the  printed 
directions  enclosed  in  every  package.  We  recommend  these  films  for  use 
for  negatives  for  photo-mechanical  printing  in  place  of  glass  stripping 
plates. 

CUT  SHEETS. 


Size.  Per  Pac\ca;.  e. 

3':^  X 43^,  two  dozen  in  package $0  70 

4 X 5,  “ “ 1 00 

4'^4  X 63^,  “ “ 1 50 

5 X 7,  “ “ 1 75 

5 X 7^,  “ “ 1 90 

5 X 8,  “ “ 2 00 

6K  X 8K,  “ “ 2 80 

8 X 10,  “ “ 4 00 

10  X 12,  one  dozen  “ 3 00 

11  X 14,  “ “ 4 00 


207 


^T/)^  'SQHUkrZE,  PHOro  - EOlf[P/\WT  CO.  nE\'^  YORK- 


Films  on  Spools,  to  fit  the  Eastman-Walker  Roll 

Holders. 


Size. 

33^  in.,  for 

24  exposures. 

31^  X 



Per  Package. 
10  85 

4 

24 

4 X 

5 

1 10 

24 

i( 

4^x 

6^ 

1 75 

4K  “ 

24 

(( 

4^x 

^y2 

2 00 

5 ' 

24 

a 

5 X 

8 

24  ‘ 

<< 

6Kx 

8K 

3 00 

'8 

24 

a 

8 X 

10  

4 50 

10 

24 

u 

10  X 

12  

6 75 

11 

24 

it 

11  X 

14  

9 00 

Other 

sizes  in  proportion. 

Transferotype  Paper. 

Patented  October  14,  1884. 


CUT  SHEETS. 


Size. 

Per  Doz.  Size. 

Per  Doz, 

Size. 

Per  Doz. 

3)^  X 41^ 

6K 

x 834.... 

. ...  $1  10 

17x20.., 

$6  40 

4 X 5 

..  . 40 

8 

X 10  ... 

1 50 

18  X 22. . , 

7 50 

41^x5K 

50 

10 

X 12  .. .. 

2 25 

20  X 24. . 

9 00 

43^x634 

55 

10 

X 14  ... . 

....  2 65 

22  X 27. . , 

11  25 

434  X 634 

60 

11 

X 14 

3 00 

24  X 30. . . 

13  50 

f)  X 7 

65 

12 

X 15 

....  3 35 

25  X 30. . , 

14  00 

5 X 7^ 

70 

14 

xl7  .... 

....  4 50 

24  X 36. . , 

16  00 

5 X 8 

75 

16 

X 20  ... . 

6 00 

30  X 40. . , 

22  50 

SPECIAL  SIZES  FOR  PLACQUES, 

, TILES, 

Etc. 

Size. 

Per  Doz. 

Size. 

Per  Doz. 

Size. 

Per  Doz. 

4x4 

. . 10  35  1 

6x6 

...  $0  75  1 

lOx  10... 

$2  00 

5x5 

50  1 

8x8 

...  1 30  1 

12x12..., 

3 00 

Other  sizes  in  proportion. 

If  ordered  in  packages  of  less  than  one  dozen,  an  extra  charge  of  25 
cents  will  be  made  for  packing. 


BROMIDE  COPYING  PAPER, 

For  Copying  Drawings,  Plans,  etc. 

This  paper  is  similar  to  Permanent  Bromide  Paper,  being  coated  with 
the  same  sensitive  compound,  and  requires  the  same  treatment  in  ex- 
posure and  development.  The  paper  itself  is  not  genuine  photographic 
paper,  and  is  not,  therefore,  suitable  for  portrait  work. 


Size. 

Per  Doz. 

CUT  SHEETS. 

Size.  Per  Doz. 

Size. 

Per  Doz. 

33^x434 

634 

X 834 

. $0  55 

17  X 20.  . . . 

....  $3  20 

4 X 5 . . . ., 

20  1 

8 

X 10  

75 

18  X 22 

3 75 

434  X 534 

25  1 

1 16 

X 12  

. 1 13 

20  X 24 

4 50 

434  X 634* . . . ■ 

28 

10 

X 14  

. 1 33 

22  X 27 

....  5 63 

4'34  X 63>^ . . . . , 

30 

11 

X 14  

. 1 50 

24  X 30 

6 75 

5 X 7 

38 

12 

X 15  

. 1 68 

25  X 30 

....  7 00 

5 X 734 

35  1 

14 

xl7  

. 2 25 

24  X 36 

8 00 

y 8 

38 

16 

X 20  

. 3 00 

.80  X 40 

11  25 

Other  sizes  in  proportion. 

If  ordered  in  packages  of  less  than  one 

dozen. 

an  extra  charge  of  25 

cents  will  be  made  for  packing. 


208 


^ ThQ  s'CHi/L.rza  ..f^Horo- EQLfiP^EJ^T  ao.  new  york-- 


PeERL-ESS 

Ready  Sensitized  Aristotype  Paper, 


This  paper  will  give  finer  results  than  prints  made  upon  any  other 
paper. 

The  paper  will  not  stretch  and  cause  distortion. 

It  can  bemused  either  with  soft  or  harsh  negatives,  with  far  superior 
results  than  albumen  paper. 

When  burnished  with  a hot  machine,  produce  a glace  finish,  or  with 
a cold  roller,  a mat  surface. 

Its  printing  and  toning  qualities  are  very  rapid,  printing  in  about 
one-third  the  time  of  albumen  prints. 


Size. 

' Price 

Per  Doz. 

Size. 

Price 
Per  Doz. 

4x5  

$0  30  1 

5 X 8 

4 X 5 -34 

1 6i4x  834. 

90 

4x6  

35  1 

8 X 10  

. 1 10 

5x7  

40 

10  X 12  

1 50 

Tie  Star  ★ Eitra  Brllllaat  AlMaian  Papr. 

We  have  for  a long  time  been  on  the  lookout  for  e make  of  Albumen 
Paper  that  was  equal  to  the  best  in  the  market,  and  which  (^ould  be  sold 
at  a lower  price.  We  have  found  it.  It  is  the  STAR  EXTRA  BRIL- 
LIANT DRESDEN  ALBUMEN  PAPER. 

Guaranteed  the  Acme  of  Excellence.  Guaranteed  not  to  Blister. 
Guaranteed  Easy  Working.  Guaranteed  to  Please. 

_At  the  extreme  low  price  of  $31.00  per  ream,  $16.00  per  half  ream,  $8.25 
per  quarter  ream,  85  cents  per  dozen.  This  is  ten  kilo  genuine  Rives 
paper,  full  size,  albumenized  with  pure  egg  albumen  in  all  the  leading 
colors,  including  the  popular  Pense.  No  Gelatine  Used. 

In  order  to  introduce  this  elegant  paper  quickly  and  place  it  upon  the 
market  on  its  merits,  we  will  furnish  one  sample  dozen  at  the  dozen  price, 
postage  free.  One  dozen  Star  Extra  Brilliant  Albumen  Paper  by  mail,  85 
cents,  ])Ostpaid. 

Per  Ream.  Per  Doz. 

N.  P.  A.  Dresden  Extra  Brilliant  (Double  Albumenized), 


White,  Pink,  Pearl  and  Pense $33  00  $0  90 

S.  & M.  Dresden  Extra  Brilliant  (Double  Albumenized), 

White,  Pink,  Pearl  and  Pense 33  00  90 

Three  Crown  Extra  Brilliant  (Double  Albumenized), 

White,  Pink,  Pearl  and  Pense 33  00  90 

N.  P.  A.  Dresden  Extra  Brilliant  (Double  Albumenized, 

13  kilo),  20)4  X 2434  inches.  White  and  Pense 38  00  1 00 


209 


PHoro-Eo^iP/^wr  CO.  /v£:w/  York* 


N.  P.  A.  Dresden  Imperial  Brilliant  (Single  Albumen- 

ized),  White  and  Pink  

S.  & M.  Dresden  Imperial  Brilliant  (Single  Albumen- 

ized),  White  and  Pink 

Three  Crown  (Single  Albumenized),  White  and  Pink 

Enameled  Violet 

26  X 40  Saxe  (Double  Albumenized),  White 

Hovey’s  Original  Special  Rives  (Double  Albumenized), 

White,  Pink,  Pearl  and  Pense 

D.  Hovey’s  Sons  Brilliant  Rives  (Single  Albumenized), 

White,  Pink,  Pearl  and  Pense 

Hovey’s  Original  Saxe  (Single  Albumenized),  White, 

Pink,  Pearl  and  Pense 

Brown’s  Extra  Brilliant  (Double  Albumenized),  10  kilo 

Rives,  White,  Pink,  Pearl  and  Pense 

Brown’s  Brilliant  (Single  Albumenized),  10  kilo  Rives, 

White,  Pink,  Pearl  and  Pense 

Brown’s  Saxe  (Single  Albumenized),  8^  kilo  Rives, 

White,  Pink,  Pearl  and  Pense 

H.  Extra  Brilliant  Rives  (Double  Albumenized),  White, 

Pink,  Pearl  and  Lilac 

Morgan’s  Brilliant  Rives  (Double  Albumenized),  White, 

Pink,  Pearl  and  Lilac 

Eagle  Brilliant  Rives  (Double  Albumenized),  White,  Pink, 

Pearl  and  Lilac 

Star  Brilliant  (Single  Albumenized),  White,  Pink,  Pearl 

and  Lilac 

2d  Choice  Extra  Brilliant  (Double  Albumenized),  White, 
Pink,  Pearl  and  Lilac 


27  50 

7£h 

27  50 

75' 

27  50 

7^ 

40  00 

1 20 

6 00 

33  00 

90- 

30  00 

85- 

27  00 

80 

33  00 

90 

30  00 

85 

27  00 

80 

33;oo 

90 

33  00 

90 

33  00 

90 

25  50 

70 

24  00 

65 

Champion  Sensitized  Aibumen  Paper. 

4 X 5 per  pkge  of  2doz.,  $0  40  634  ^ 834  P®**  pkge  of  2 doz.,$l  00 

5x8 “ “ 75  8 X 10  “ “ 1 50- 

18  X 22 per  doz.,  $3  00 

PLAIN  SAXE  PAPER. 


Per  dozen $ 0 50 

Per  ream 18  00 


CLEMON’S  SALTED  PAPER. 

MAT  SURFACE. 

Per  dozen,  18  x 22 

Per  ream 

20  X 24,  Mat  Surface 

22  X 27,  “ 

25  X 30,  “ 

26  X 40,  “ 

ENDLESS  ROLL. 

PLAIN  STEINBACH’S. 

Medium,  54  inches  wide P®i*  yard,  fO  30 

Heavy  54  “ “ 


$ 0 90 

32  00 

per  doz.,  5 00 

“ 5 25 

“ 7 25 

“ 9 00 


210 


T/).g  S'CHi/L.TZ^ 


CHAMPION  FEEEO-PEUSSIATE  PAPER,  POE  MAKINS 
BLUE  AND  WHITE  PIOTUEES. 

This  paper  is  extremely  simple  in  its  manipulation,  and  therefore 
very  convenient  for  making  proofs  from  negatives.  It  is  also  adapted  for 
the  reproduction  of  Mottoes,  Plans,  Drawings,  Manuscript,  Circulars,  and 
to  show  representations  of  Scenery,  Boats,  Machinery,  etc.,  for  an  en- 
graver to  copy  from.  The  rapidity  with  which  a print  can  be  made  with 
this  paper  is,  for  numerous  purposes,  and  to  men  in  some  occupations,  a 


very  great  recommendation  in  its  favor. 

X 4^  inches,  in  light-tight  boxes  of  2 dozen,  per  box |0  22 

4x5“  “ “ 2 “ “ 28 

4^x  634  “ “ “ 2 “ “ 35 

5x7  “ “ “ 2 “ “ 45 

5x8  “ “ “ 2 “ “ 50 

6^x  834  “ “ 2 “ “ 67 

8 xlO  “ “ “ 2 “ “ 83 

18  X 22  “ per  sheet,  18  cents ; per  doz 2 00 


To  save  loss,  boxes  are  not  broken.  In  full  rolls  of  10  yards  each,  36 
inches  wide,  $4.00  per  roll. 


FILTERING  PAPERS. 


French  Round,  in  packs  of  100  sheets.  No.  19 $0  25 

“ “ “ “ “ 25 30 

“ ‘ “ “ “ 33 45 

“ “ “ “ “ 40 60 

“ “ “ “ “ 45 70 

“ “ “ “ “ 50 85 

Best  Square  White  Filtering  Paper,  per  quire, 25 


ENGLISH  TISSUE  PAPER. 

SIZE,  20  X 30. 

Per  dozen,  the  best $0  20 


CEPA  SKIN. 

ONION  SKIN,  FINEST  FRENCH. 

Size,  17  x 22 per  doz.,  $0  25 


JOSEPH  PAPER. 


FOR  CLEANING  GLASS,  ETC. — VERY  SOFT  AND  TOUGH. 

SIZE,  1434  X 1934. 


Per  dozen 
Per  ream. 


211 


$0  15 
5 40 


- rf)g..s'QHuu.rZE:,^^HQro^-EQiriP/^El^r.  C,o.  /v£vsA  york* 


GUMMED  PAPER. 

Per  dozen 

Sheplie’s,  per  roll  of  800  yards 


la  20 

60 


LITMUS  PAPER. 

Per  Sheet,  Blue  and  Red 

Per  Book,  “ “ 


$0  05 
05 


BLOTTING  PAPER 

Medium,  19  x 24 

Heavy,  19  x 24 

Extra  heavy,  19  x 24 


per  doz.,  $0  60 
. “ 75 

. “ 1 00 


POST-OFFIGE  PAPER. 

HEAVY  BUFF  FOR  DARKROOM. 


Per  sheet $0  05 

Per  dozen 50 


MASK  PAPER. 

PERFECTLY  OPAQUE. 

Size,  20  X 24,  per  doz f 0 25 


NEEDLE  PAPER. 

Size,  20  X 24,  per  doz 


10  50 


ANTHONY’S  BROMIDE  PAPER. 

Sizes  and  prices  same  as  Eastman’s.  , 

“ Quick  ” for  artificial  light,  and  “ Slow  ” for  daylight.  Three  grades 
in  each  H.  S.,  heavy,  smooth;  L.  S.,  light,  smooth;  and  H.  G.,  heavy 
grained. 


V 

Ebonite  papier  fT[aQ\)e  Srays  are  b(^st  for 
Bromid(^  u/ori^.- 


212 


irrzE'  'phqto'  eq r , g o,  /vev;/^  .yoRK* 


GHERRIGAli-S. 


WARRANTED  PURE  AND  DF  FULL  WEIGHT  AND  MEASURE. 


Remember,  all  Chemicals  are  bought  and  sold  by  Avoirdupois  weight, 
which  is  437i  grains  to  the  ounce,  and  16  ounces  to  the  pound,  while  at 
the  same  time  they  are  mixed  by  Apothecaries  weight — 480  grains  to  the 
ounce,  and  12  ounces  to  the  pound;  hence,  if  you  do  not  get  but  437^ 
grains  of  any  Chemical  for  an  ounce,  do  not  think  it  short  weight. 

Acid,  Acetic,  No  8 one-pound  bottle $0  18 


.two-pound 

“ “ “ five-pound  “ 

“ “ Glacial one-pound  

“ “ “ one- half-pound  bottle 

“ “ “ one-quarter-pound  bottle 

“ “ “ one-ounce  bottle 

“ Boracic one-half-pound  bottle... 

“ “ one-quarter  pound  bottle 

“ “ one-ounce  “ 

“ Citric one-pound  “ 

“ “ one  half  pound  “ 

“ “ one-quarter-pound  “ 

“ “ two-ounce  “ 

“ “ one-ounce  “ 

“ Formic “ “ 

“ Gallic “ “ 

“ Nitric,  C.  P two-ounce  “ 

“ “ “ one-quarter-pound  “ 

“ “ “ one-half-pound  “ 

“ “ “ one-pound  “ 

“ “ Commercial “ “ 

“ “ “ two-pound  ' “ 

“ “ “ seven-pound  “ 

Muriatic  C.  P.  and  Sulphuric  C.  P.  same  price  as  Nitric  C.  P. 

Acid,  Oxalic one-pound  box 

“ “ two-pound  “ 

“ Pyrogallic,  Schering’s  or  Schultze’s.  .one-half-ounce  can. 

“ “ “ “ ..one-ounce  “ 

“ “ “ “ . .one-quarter-pound  can. . 

“ “ “ “ . . one-hctif-pound  can. 


32 

70 

60 

40 

28 

15 

40 

30 

15 

80 

50 

30 

18 

12 

25 

20 

20 

25 

30 

45 

30 

40 

20 

25 

45 

20 

35 

30 

50 


..one  pound  can 4 50 

“ Salicylic one?ounce  bottle 25 

“ Tannic “ . . “ 30 

Aniline  Blue one-balf-ounce  bottle.  . . 35 

Alum,  Chrome.. one-pound  package 20 

“ Common “ “ OO’ 

“ Pulverized. “ “ 15 

Alcohol,  Atwood’s  Patent  (Genuine) one  gallon ' . 3 40 

“ “ “ “ one-half  gallon 1 75 

“ “ “ “ one  quart,  i . .I 90 

“ “ ..... .one  pint. 45 

“ Wood  (for  burning  only) “ . A ' • 25 

“ “ one  quart 45 

“ ' “ ’ one-half  gallon 85 

“ ' “ one  gallon. ..r.  170 

Ammonia,  Cone.  Liq .one-half-pound  bottle. . . 25 

“ ‘‘  .one-pound  .; . 35 

“ “ four-pound  “ 1 L GO* 


213 


orOr.EQ{JfiP/\EI^T  CO.  Ar£w/  YOPK^ 


A mill  on  ia.  Chloride 
“ Nitrate. . 


Baryta,  Nitrate,  C.  P 

Calcium  Chloride 

Chloroform 

a 

n 

Copper,  Acetate  (cryst) 

“ Sulphate,  C.  P 

Dextrine 

Ether,  Sulph.  Cone 

ti  (<  «( 

<(  ((  (( 

Gold  Chloride,  C.  P.  ’.  1 ! ‘ ! 
“ “ and  Sodium. .. . 

Glycerine 

<( 

Gum  Arabic,  selected 

“ Damar,  best 

**  Sandarac,  best 

“ Shellac,  refined  bleached 

“ “ Orange 

“ Turpentine,  best 

Iron,  Proto- Sulphate 

“ and  Ammonia 

Iodine  Crystal  (re-sublimed). . . 

“ Tincture 

Kaolin 

Lead,  Acetate 

“ Chloride 

**  Nitrate 

Lime,  Chloride  of 

Lavender  Oil 

ti 

it  it 

Magnesium,  Chloride 

Magnesia,  Nitrate 

Mercury,  Bi-Chloride 

ti  it 

Paraffine 

Pumice  Stone,  Pulv 

Potassium,  Bi-Chromate 

“ Carbonate 


tt 

Cyanide 


Neutral  Oxalate, 

tt  ti  * 

Permanganate. . 

Sulphuret 

< ( 

Sulphate 

(( 


Soda,  Acetate. 


Bi-Carbonate 

Carbonate,  C.  P.,  Granular. . 

“ Citrate 

Hypo-Sulphite 

“ • 113-pound  keg, 


.one-ounce  bottle  ...  10 

.one-pound  “ ...  50 

.one-half-pound  “ ...  30 

.one-quarter-pound  bottle  20 

.one-ounce  bottle 20 

“ 13 

.two-ounce  “ 30 

.four-ounce  “ 50 

.eight-ounce  “ 80 

.one-ounce  “ 15 

one-pound  “ 50 

. “ “ 13 

“ 90 

.two-pound  “ • 1 75 

.three-and-a-half-p’d  bot.  3 00 

.fifteen-grain  bottle 50 

“ “ 25 

.two-ounce  “ 25 

.four-ounce  “ 40 

.one-pound  “ 60 

.per  pound 75 


35 

50 

55 

45 

15 

06 

15 


.one-ounce  bottle 35 

. “ “ 20 

.per  pound 10 

.one-ounce  bottle 12 

“ “ 15 

“ “ 13 

.one-pound  package 20 

.two-ounce  bottle 25 

.four-ounce  “ 35 

.eight-ounce  “ 60 

.one-ounce  “ 15 

. “ “ 15 

. “ “ 13 

.two-ounce  “ 20 

.per  pound  “ 35 

.one-pound  package 10 

.one-ounce  bottle 10 

.one-pound  “ 25 

.two-pound  “ 40 

.five- pound  “ 90 

.one-half-pound bottle. .. . 35 

.one-pound  “ 65 

. one-pou  n d package 35 

.two-pound  “ 60 

.one-ounce  bottle 15 

.one-pound  “ 35 

.one-half -pound  bottle. ...  20 

“ “ “ 30 

.one  pound  “ 50 

“ “ 50 

. one-half- pound  bottle. . ..  35 

.one-quarter-pound  bottle  20 

.one- pound  package 12 

“ 10 

.per  ounce 15 

per  pound 06 


3 35 


214 


^ r^p  ' S^CHUL.TZE.  PHOTO' EbLr]P^\^t^T'  Oo.  YORK* 


Soda,  Phosphate one-half-pound  bottle. 

“ Sulphite  Granular one-pound  “ . 

“ “ “ one-half-pound  “ . 

“ “ Crystals one- pound  “ 

“ “ one-half-pound  “ . 

“ Sulphate one  ounce  “ . 

“ Tungstate per  ounce 

Silver,  Chloride “ 

“ Iodide “ 

‘‘  Nitrate,  1 or  2-ounce  packages. 


20 
40 
25 
28 
15 
15 
20 

1 50 

2 00 
70 

.per  pound 11  00 

10 
30 
90 
90 
25 
50 
30 


Strontia,  Chloride  or  Muriate one-ounce  bottle. 

Tannin “ “ . 

Uranium,  Chloride “ “ . 

“ Nitrate “ “ . 

Venice  Turpentine “ “ . 

Water,  Distilled one  gallon 

“ ‘‘  one  half  gallon. . 

IODIDES  AND  BROMIDES. 

Iodide,  Ammonia one-ounce  bottle. 

“ Cadimium “ “ . 

“ Calcium “ “ . 

“ Lithium “ “ . 

“ Potassium “ “ . 

“ Zinc “ “ . 

Bromide,  Ammonia “ “ . 

“ , Cadimium “ “ . 

“ Lithium “ “ . 

“ Potassium “ “ . 

gelathte. 

The  following  standard  brands,  quoted  at  present  prices,  subject  to 
fluctuation. 


40 

45 

40 

75 

30 

60 

10 

20 

40 

10 


Swiss per  pound. 

Comte  fils “ 

Coignet’s  Gold  Label “ 

Heinrich’s “ 

Nelson’s  No.  1 “ 

“ No.  2 “ 

GUN  COTTON. 

Schultze’s  Best per  ounce. 

Anthony’s  Climax “ 

“ Negative “ 

Union  “ “ 

Han ce’s  Silver  Spray “ 

“ Delicate  Cream “ 

COLLODIONS  AND  VARNISHES. 

SELECT  COLLODIONS. 

"‘The  Best,”  for  Negatives  or  Positives. . .one-half-pound  bottle 

“ “ “ ...one-pound  “ .... 

Anthony’s  Copying one-half-pound  “ .... 

“ Extra  Portrait “ “ “ .... 

“ Instantaneous 

“ New  Negative 

“ New  View 

“ Porcelain 

“ Positive 

L.  & H.  Ferrotype 

L.  & H.  Negative 

Phoenix  Ferrotype 


$1  25 
1 25 
1 65 
1 35 
1 35 
1 35 


$0  45 
75 


50 

45 

50 

75 


$0  50 
90 
75 
1 00 
65 
65 
65 
1 50 
65 
60 
60 
50 


215 


^ Thg  jrcHULTZK  PHOTO  - EQ  if {PZ\^l^r  Co.  neW  YORK- 


SELECT  VARNISHES. 

“The  Best” six-ounce  bottle $0  25 

“ one-pint  “ 60 

“ one-quart  “ 1 10 

The  Best. — This  Varnish  we  guarantee  the  best.  It  can  be  used  for 
either  negatives  or  positives,  dries  quick  and  hard,  and  will  not  soften  in 
the  sun. 


Crystal . . 
Diamond, 

ii 


Flint 

ii 


Retouching. 

Mountfort’s, 


Schultze’s  Ground  Glass  Solution, 


.per  bottle $0  30' 

35 

.per  pint 1 00 

.per  quart 1 75 

.per  bottle 40 

per  pint 1 00 

per  quart 1 90 

.per  bott'e 40 

40 

.per  pint 1 00 

.per  quart 1 90 

per  bottle 50 


THE  EXCEUiENCE  ” DEUEUDPER 

FOR  DRY  PLATES  AND  GELATINE  FILMS. 

Price,  30  Cents  Per  Pottee. 

This  developer  is  put  up  in  highly  concentrated  form,  keeps  well,  and 
will  perform  nearly  twice  the  work  of  any  similar  developer.  It  never 
becomi^s  muddy,  and  can  be  used  repeatedly  with  fine  results.  It  is  sold 
ready  mixed,  and  needs  only  to  be  diluted  with  water.  Fully  fifty  8 x 10 
plates  can  be  developed  with  one  bottle  of  developer.  Being  in  one  solu- 
tion, its  management  is  easily  understood  by  the  beginner,  who  is  often 
“ all  at  sea”  with  developers  put  up  in  separate  solutions.  It  stands  un- 
rivaled as  a dry  plat  e developer,  and  is  extremely  rapid  in  action.  It  can 
be  used  with  any  brand  of  plates,  giving  beautifully  soft  negatives.  To 
those  who  are  desirous  of  avoiding  the  trouble  of  preparing  their  own 
developers,  it  will  recommend  itself  on  the  very  first  trial,  and  it  goes 
without  saying  that  it  will  figure  as  a valuable  item  in  the  travelers’ 
photographic  outfit.  Under-exposed  plates  will  bear  prolonged  and 
forced  development  with  this  solution  without  showing  the  least  tendency 
to  become  veiled  or  hazed  in  the  shadows,  as  is  so  common  with  most  de- 


velopers. 

DIRECTIONS  FOR  USE. 

Water 1 ounce. 

Solution 1 drachm  (|  ounce). 

FOR  UNDER-EXPOSED  PLATES,  USE 

Water 1 ounce. 

Solution 3 drachms. 

IN  CASE  OF  OVER-EXPOSURE,  USE 

Water 2 ounces. 

Solution 1 drachm. 


A good  plan  is  not  to  throw  away  the  old  developer,  but  alw  ays  keep- 
^ sufficient  quantity  on  hand.  Give  a little  more  time  than  necessary  to 
make  full  timed  negative,  and  by  commencing  with  the  old  developer 
give  the  high  lights  a start  of  the  shadows,  which  you  can  easily  soften 
afterward  by  the  use  of  a stronger  developer  at  the  finish.  In  this  manner 
you  will  obtain  the  brilliant  high  lights  so  much  admired  in  the  w et  plate, 
and  so  seldom  found  in  the  average  dry-plate  pictures.  By  varying  the 
proportions  given  above,  any  degree  of  softness  or  contrast  can  be  ob- 
tained. After  developing  and  rinsing  plates,  immerse  them  in  a saturated 
solution  of  alum.  This  hardens  the  film,  avoids  the  possibility  of  frilling, 
and  gives  brilliancy  to  the  negative.  Fix  in  a strong  solution  of  hyposul- 
phite soda. 


216 


s'cHj/L.rzE- 


ITHING  SUCCEEDS  LIKE  SUCCESS ! 


Will  develop  with  M&RVELLOUS  DETAILS  and  EXTREME  CLEANLINESS,  DRY 
PLATES,  (Negatives  or  Transparencies)  BROMIDE  PAPERS  and  OPALS. 


May  lie  Dsel  Again  anfl  Again,  Until  its  Deyeloping  Power  is  ExAanstel 


One  of  the  principal  advantages  of  this  Developer  is,  that  it  gives  plenty 
of  latitude  in  timing  the  Plates.  The  great  latitude  in  the  time  for  exposure 
makes  it  especially  valuable  to  the  Amateur,  or  those  who  are  not  sufficiently 
practised  in  the  exact  time  required  for  exposure. 

A Plate  greatly  over-exposed  can  be  saved  by  using  an  old  developer,  or  by 
using  Bromide  Potash.  A Plate  slightly  under-exposed,  or  having  had  a very 
short  exposure,  can  be  forced  by  using  a few  drops  of  a saturated  Solution 
of  Carbonate  of  Soda,  (ordinary  Washing  Soda).  Plates  having  had  a short 
exposure  will  stand  more  pushing  without  becoming  foggy  than  if  any  other 
Developer  had  been  used. 

It  does  not  stain  the  fingers  nor  the  plate,  and  gives  negatives  of  quick 
printing  quality  and  wet  plate  appearance. 

It  is  rapid  in  action,  and  its  developing  powers  seem  almost  inexhausti- 
ble. Over  50  8x10  negatives  have  been  developed  with  8 ounces  of  Developer. 

It  is  ready  for  use  and  needs  no  addition  or  dilution,  and  does  not  dis- 
color like  the  Pyro  Developer. 

The  experience  we  have  had  and  the  great  care  exercised  by  us  in  mak- 
ing it,  place  us  in  a position  to  guarantee  the  most  satisfactory  results.  We 
therefore  invite  the  Professional  and  Amateur  to  give  it  a fair  trial,  and  feel 
certain  that  they  will  be  able  to  fully  corroborate  all  that  is  said  in  its  favor. 

Price,  per  8 ounce  Bottle,  ....  25c. 

“ “ 1 pint  “ ....  50c. 

“ “ I quart  “ ....  90c. 

“ “ I gallon  “ - - - - $3.00. 


217 


“THE  PAR-EXCELLENCE” 

TONING  SOLUTION 

THE  BEST. 

THE  CHEAPEST. 

WILL  WORK  EXCELLENTLY  WITH  ANY  BRAND  OF  PAPER. 

Price,  75  Cents  Per  Bottle. 


iDmEOTioisrs  tjse. 

Make  deep  prints,  and  wash,  as  usual,  before  toning.  For  toning,  use 
one  ounce  of  the  “Par-Excellence”  Toning  Solution,  diluted  in  eight 
ounces  of  water.  The  toning  bath  can  be  used  over  and  over  again  by 
adding  a few  drops  of  the  stock  solution  every  once  in  a while  to 
strengthen  it.  The  “ Par- Excellence  ” is  the  most  economical  Toning 
Solution  ever  put  on  the  market.  You  don’t  waste  any,  as  is  the  case 
with  other  solutions,  where  you  have  to  make  up  a new  bath  every  time 
you  wish  to  tone  a few  prints.  Freshly  silvered  and  ready  sensitized 
paper  can  be  toned  equally  as  well  with  this  solution. 


THE  PHEHII  GELATINE  DEY  PLATE 

Supplies  a long-felt  want  to  those  who  desire  a plate  on  which  they  can 
depend  for  Absolute  Uniformity,  Extreme  Rapidity,  Perfect  Quality. 
Easy  in  manipulation,  giving  perfect  gradation  of  tone,  with  full  density. 
Quick  in  fixing. 


^l^X 

43^  per  doz 

F^rice: 

$0  45 

List. 

8 X 10  per  doz 

$2  40 

4 X 

5 “ 

65 

10x12  “ 

3 80 

4 X 

75 

11x14  “ 

5 00 

41:1  X 

614  “ 

90 

14x17  “ 

9 00 

1 4 A 

5 X 

7 “ 

1 10 

16x20  “ 

12  50 

5 X 

63^  X 
7 Y 

8 “ 

1 25 

17x20  “ 

13  00 

814  “ 

1 65 

18x22  “ 

15  50 

10  “ 

2 10 

20  X 24  “ 

18  50 

S zes  11x14  and  larger  are  put  up  half-dozen  in  a box. 

We  also  supply  all  standard  makes  of  Dry  Plates,  including  Cramer, 
Eagle,  Stanley,  Seed,  Harvard,  etc.,  at  same  list  price. 


E\)e\  par  Excellepei^  i5  t\)(^  oi^ly  solfjtiOQ 

uiill  toi^e  ready  s(^95itiz(?d  papier  to  perfeetioQ. 


218 


Th^  SCH^LTZ^  CO.  new  YORK- 


REVISED  AND  REDUCED  PRICE  LIST. 


t3;[RBUTT’^  l^Ey^TOplE  D1(Y  pLATE^. 

1889 


O 1 ( * 

fl  S3  ^-2 

O c3 

SL  S 

A .'05  ® 1 

® 0 ^ tL 

“.a 

^ > DO  ^ 

- c3 

& i s £ 

ce.fl  ftft 

0 S3 

s,  give 

Land- 

Photo 

n fine 
jparen- 
on  of 

n fine 
3w  and 

® ^ n 

.WSeJ 

-M 

*0  ee  fl 

^ ® 
o ^ A?a 

ll--  » 

W <n 

-d  ® <D  fl 

««  ® d 

(M  CC  CQ 

. ft  0 Q. 

flic  0 . 

® 2'i3 

pH  fl  'O  0 
OQ'-'  C 2 

fl  CD  80  „ 

^ . '-'d 

.i2  ® *2  S 

S.5  « 

.2  £ 

2 5- Ph’C  tA 
? 0 “ d S' 

^ 0 X M ^ 

P fl+3 

c2§ 

1^1 

3 0 0. 

5-"  £ 

<!  ^ 

/ CC  m 

o^^d  oj 

0^3  ^ 
fl  GQ 

og'i 

Us 

^Sa 

the 
Dry  Pis 
sonally 
lish  gla 
ly  cut. 

^cc  ce  a> 

05  d 

" -‘d  S ^ 'fl  Ifl 

Strippi 
for  Po 
and 
Copyin 
d active 

Q ^ V 

t Sh  d.2 
08 

Gelatin 
clear  g 
cies  ar 
Negati\ 

fl^dH 

^§0 
a»  P 0 

Size 

of  Plates. 

“Eclipse  ’ Sen.  27 
“Special’’  Sen.  25 
or  “B.” 

Stripping- 

Plates. 

Orthochro- 

matic. 

Plain  Glass 
Transpar- 
ency. 

Ground  Glass 
Transparency. 

Thin  crystal 

Dozen. 

Dozen. 

Dozen. 

glass  for  lan- 
tern slides. 

Dozen. 

334'x  4 

.... 

Doz.$0  65 

— 

3I4X  414 

$ 0 45 

$ 0 55 

55 

4x5 

65 

1 6 90 

80 

80 

$1  00 

4^x  5K 

75 

1 00 

90 

90 

1 12 

414X  634 

90 

1 20 

1 08 

1 08 

1 35 

4^x  614 

95 

1 25 

1 20 

1 20 

5 X 7 

1 10 

1 45 

1 40 

1 40 

i 75 

534x  7 

1 25 

1 65 

1 50 

1 50 

5 X 8 

1 25 

1 65 

1 50 

1 50 

i’96 

e^x  8^ 

1 65 

2 20 

2 00 

2 00 

j i doz.  1 35 

1 1 doz.  2 60 

8 xlO 

2 40 

3 20 

3 00 

3 00 

j i doz.  1 90 

1 1 doz.  3 75 

10  xl2 

3 80 

5 05 

4 50 

4 50 

^ doz.  2 80 

11  xl4 

5 00 

6 65 

5 85 

5 85 

34  doz.  3 60 

14  xl7 

9 00 

12  00 

10  80 

10  80 

34  doz.  6 75 

16  x20 

12  50 

16  65 

15  00 

15  00 

17  x20 

13  00 

17  30 

15  60 

15  60 

18  x22 

15  50 

20  00 

18  50 

18  50 

20  x24 
. 

18  50 

24  50 

22  00 

22  00 

.... 

13^  Circular  Special  Instantaneous  Plates  for  the  Concealed  Camera, 
in.  diam.,  per.  dozen,  |1.20.  6^  in.  diam.,  $1.65. 


Sl:xes  103c12  and  larger  are  pu.t  np  half  doacen  in  a bojc. 

219 


opal  Glass  fop  Transfeppotypcs. 

Selected  and  fine  ground  on  one  side. 


REGULAR  SIZES. 


SIZE. 

PER  DOZ. 

EACH. 

SIZE. 

PER  DOZ. 

EACH. 

3i^x4K, 

$0  60 

10  05 

5 x8, 

$1  44 

$0  12 

4 x5, 

72 

06 

6^x8^, 

2 04 

17 

4i^x6K, 

1 08 

09 

8 xlc, 

2 88 

24 

5 x7, 

1 20 

10 

10  xl3, 

4 32 

36 

SRRCIAL  SIZRS. 

SIZE. 

PER  DOZ. 

EACH. 

SIZE. 

PER  DOZ. 

EACH. 

4x4, 

$0  60 

$0  05 

8x  8, 

$2  40 

$0  20 

5x5, 

96 

08 

10x10, 

3 60 

30 

6x6, 

1 32 

11 

12x12, 

5 40 

45 

Bon-fllapche  Popcelain  Panels. 

FOR  PHOTOORAPHEKS. 

With  Ground  Face  and  Clear  Beveled  Edge. 


Especially  Desirable  for  Usd  with  Eastman’s  Transferrotype  Paper, 


Size. 

63^  X 634 

5Mx  8 
8}4 

11  X 8^ 

1534  X 8K 

8 X 10 

9K  X IIK 

12^  X 14^ 

13M  X 16K 

34 -inch  bevel. . . 

it 

For  Picture. 

4)4  X 6K 

5 X 7 

Each. 

$0  33 

45 

50 

it 

it 

i i 

. . . Three  Cabinets  . . . 
6Kx  8^ 

8 X 10  

90 

1 15 

70 

1 00 

a 

10  X 12  

1 90 

11  xl4  

2 30 

A PERFECT  SUBSTITUTE  FOR  GLASS. 


CARBUTT’S  FLEXIBLE  NEGATIVE  FILMS. 


These  Films  require  exactly  the  same  treatment  as  dry  plates.  No 
extra  processes  are  necessary.  Expose,  Develop,  Fix,  Wash,  Dry.  Being 
but  1-lOOth  of  an  inch  in  thickness,  can  be  printed  from  either  side. 


3nZ:310HT  T^L-TM^OST  DISF^L-T^OeO, 

Can  be  used  in  the  regular  plate-holder  furnished  with  any  camera  for 
Studio  work,  or  Films  sufficient  for  Twenty-four  Exposures  can  be  car- 
ried in  a single  holder  for  Landscape  and  Instantaneous  Views,  taking  up 
no  more  space  than  the  present  holder,  and  WEIGHING  LESS  than  Two 
Glass  Plates. 


31^x41^, 
4 x5 
41^x5^ 
4i^x6>^ 

4Mx6K 


PRICE  OF  FLEXIBLE  FILTBTS— PER  DOZON. 


$0  65 
95 

1 12 
1 30 
1 40 


5 x7 
53^x7 
5 x8 

6Kx8K 

8 xlO 


$1  65 

1 75 
1 80 

2 50 

3 00- 


B ” Films  coated  with  ‘‘Special”  and  ^ ^Eclipse”  Emulsions. 
Can  be  sent  by  mail  to  any  part  of  the  world  without  f ear  of  breakage. 
We  also  furnish  all  other  makes  of  Flexible  Films,  including  Allen 
& Rowells  and  Seed’s  Negative  and  Positive  Films  at  lowest  market  price. 


220 


EASTMAN’S  TRANSPARENT 

(\ON-STRIPPI^^G) 

Flexible  Filmsfor  Roll  Holders. 


H SREHT  DISCOVERY. 

The  backing  of  this  new  film  being  a compound  of  nitro-cellulose  and 
camphor,  it  is  impervious  to  water  and  unaffected  bj  chemicals  used  in 
development. 

It  is  as  thin  and  flexible  as  paper  and  transparent  as  glass. 

A trial  will  convey  better  than  any  words  an  idea  of  the  character  of 
the  film  and  serve  to  convince  the  most  skeptical  that  a perfect  suli)stitute 
for  glass  in  photography  has  now  been  found. 

It  is  developed  the  same  as  a glass  plate  and  requires  no  strixyping. 

The  process  by  which  this  new  film  is  made  has  been  worked  out  by 
the  aid  of  an  extended  experience  in  making  both  glass  and  paper  dry 
plates,  and  we  can  safely  say  that  all  the  difficulties  in  both  manufactures 
have  been  avoided  in  the  new  film,  thus  enabling  us  to  present  a material 
for  negative  making  that  has  never  before  been  approached  either  in  uni- 
formity or  general  freedom  from  defects.  The  emulsion  used  is  of  extra 
rapidity. 

F>RIOE 


Cut  Sheets. 


Size.  Per  Pkg:. 

Size, 

Per  Pkg- 

33^  X 44^,  2 doz.  in  p'kge |0  90 

5 

X 734»  2 doz.  in  p’kge. ...  $3  CO 

4 X 5,  “ “ 1 35 

5 

X 8,  “ 

“ ....  2 70 

4i3^  X “ “ 2 00 

6i^x  8K,  “ 

“ ....  3 60 

5x7,  “ “ 2 45 

8 

X 10, 

“ ....  5 40 

French  and  German  Sizes. 

Size. 

Per  Pk-. 

9x12  cm.  2 dozen  packages. 

13x18  “ 

18x24  “ 

On  Patent  Spools,  to'  fit  the  Eastman-Walker 

Roll  Holder. 

Price. 

Price. 

Size. 

24  Exposures. 

48  Exposures. 

33^  inch,  314  X 414'  Exposures. . 

$1  00 

|2  00 

4 “4x5  “ 

1 50 

• 3 00 

434'“  414x6^ 

2 00 

4 00 

4^4  “ 4^x634 

2 25 

4 50 

5 “ 5 x8 

3 00 

6 00 

C34  “ 0^x814 

4 00 

8 00 

8 “ 8 X 10  “ 

6(0 

13  00 

Spools  for  French  i 

and  German  Sizes. 

Price. 

Price. 

Size. 

24  Exposures. 

48  Exposures 

9 cm.,  9 X 13  cm 

. ...  $1  20 

$2  40 

13  “ 13x18  “ 

, . ..  3 00 

6 00 

18  “ 18  x24  “ 

9 60 

Add  134  cents  per  inch  for  postage  on  24  Exposure  Spools  and 
cents  per  inch  on  48  Exposure  Spools,  if  ordered  by  mail. 


221 


^ Thg  jrcHuLXZE  RHoro-Ea{/{Pz\WT'c.o.  /v£v<^  York- 


Dbvbloping  Outfits 


CONSISTING  OF 


One  Bottle  Par  Excellence  Developer,  two  Japanned  Iron  Trays,  one  4^ 
oz.  Glass  Graduate,  one  Minim  Glass  Graduate,  one  pound  Hyposul- 
phite Soda,  one  Bottle  “The  Best”  Shellac  Varnish,  one  dozen  Dry 
Plates,  one  Schultze  Focusing  Cloth,  one  Par  Excellence  Candle  Ruby 
Lamp,  one  Negative  Rack. 


5 50 

6 35 


F^rinting  Ouvrits 

CO'^'STSTTNG 


prices: 


4 X 5 $4  25  I 63^  X 834 

414  X 634 4 50  8 X 10 

5 X 8 5 00  I 


One  Printing  Frame,  one  deep,  Porcelain  Tray,  one  Polished  Rubber 
Tray,  one  package  of  Sensitized  Albumen  Paper,  one  bottle  of  Par  Excel- 
lence Toning  Solution,  one  2 oz.  Graduate,  one  pound  Hyposulphite 
Soda,  twenty-five  sheets  cardboard  with  gilt  form,  one  one-half  pint  jar 
Excelsior  Paste,  one  one  and  one-half  inch  Bristle  Brush,  one  Glass  Form, 
one  Excelsior  Trimmer. 

Price  for  4 x 5 $4  85 

“ “ 43^  X 634 5 10 

“ “5  X 8 6 30 

“ “ 61^  X 83^ 6 90 

“ “ 8 X 10  8 50 


222 


OG.  ne:w  york- 


PERMIINENT  BROMIDE  PAPER  OUTFITS. 


The  quickness  with  which  permanent  prints  may  be  obtained  by^ 
developing  them  upon  the  Permanent  Bromide  Paper,  added  to  the  fact 
that  no  toning  is  required  in  the  operation,  offers  many  advantages  to* 
the  photographer.  We  have  selected  the  following*  outfits  for  the  use  of 
those  desiring  to  use  this  process.  They  will  be  found  to  contain  every- 
thing necessary  for  securing  perfect  results.  Each  comprises 


1 Dozen  Sheets  of  Permanent  Bro- 
mide Paper. 

1 Developing  Tray. 

1 Fixing  Tray. 

1 lb.  of  Oxalate  of  Potash. 

For 
314  X 

4x5 
414X  514  “ 

; 414  X 6^  “ 

5x7 
• 5x8 

X 8K  “ 

8 X 10 


1 lb.  of  Protosulphate  of  Iron. 

1 lb.  of  Hyposulphite  of  Soda. 

1 )4  Acetic  Acid. 

1 oz.  of  Sulphuric  Acid. 

1 oz.  of  Bromide  of  Potassium. 

Price. 
. $1  50 
. 1 65 

. 1 75 

. 1 90 
. 2 00 
. 2 00 
. 2 50 

. 3 00 


For  Sheets. 

414  inches,  Permanent  Bromide  Paper  Outfit 
((  ((  <(  <(  (( 

(<  (( 


Blue  Print  Paper  Outfits. 

The  ease  with  which  proofs  may  be  obtained  from  negatives  by  the 
“Blue Print  ” process  has  made  it  a general  favorite.  To  facilitate  its  use, 
both  in  printing  from  negatives  and  from  line  drawings,  we  have  arranged; 
outfits,  each  of  which  comprises  everything  needful  for  successful  results, 
as  follows: 

2 dozen  Sheets  “Schultze’s  Cham-  1 Felt  Pad,  size  of  paper. 

pion”  Blue  Print  Paper.  1 Washing  Tray,  size  of  paper. 


1 Printing  Frame,  size  of  paper. 

For  Sheets.  Price. 

314  X 414  inches,  Blue  Print  Paper  Outfit $1  00 

4x5  “ “ “ 1 20 

414  X 634  “ “ “ 1 50 

5 X 7 “ “ “ 1 65 

5x8  “ “ “ 1 75 

634  X 834  “ “ “ 2 00 

8 xlO  “ “ “ 2 75 


Schultze’s  Outfit  for  ||)aking  lantern  Slides 

OOZi3-»XS>Z'S  OF 

1 doz.  Thin  Crystal  Glass.  j 1 bottle  Universal  Developer. 

2 doz.  Black  Mats.  | 2 3^  x 434  Papier  Mache  Trays. 

1 doz.  334  X 4 Keystone  Gelatine-  1 lb.  Hyposulphite  Soda. 

Albumen  Dry  Plates.  | 1 package  Black  Adhesive  Paper. 

The  above,  packed  in  wooden  case,  price,  complete ....  $3  00 
For  enlarging,  reducing,  or  copying  Negatives  to  make  Lantern- 
Slides,  we  recommend  the  use  of  one  of  the  Climax  Enlarging,  Reducing 
and  Copying  Cameras. 


223 


Photographic  Pointing  aitd  Retouching 

FOR  THE  TRADE, 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  one  of  the  best  firms  in  the  city  to 
take  entire  charge  of  our  r*rinting  and  Retouching  department,  and  feel 
perfectly  safe  in  saying  we  can  please  the  most  particular  Photographer, 
^nd  give  you  work  that  will  be  a credit  to  you. 

Send  “u-s  a Tn±al  Onden. 

Pack  negatives  carefully,  with  cover  screwed  on  if  possible. 


Size  of 
Negative. 

Retouching, 

Each. 

Printing. 

Each. 

VIounting,  Spot- 
ting and  bur- 
nishing com- 
plete, includ- 
ing Cards. 

Each 

Style  of  Mounting. 

-CJard 

•$0  15  to  $0 

25 

$0  03 

$0  Oli 

No. 

127  Collins 

’ Mts. 

Cabinet 

20  to 

45 

05 

02 

n 

127 

it 

Panel — 4x8.. 

30  to 

50 

08 

021 

a 

128 

it 

4x5 

2(1  to 

45 

04 

02 

No. 

9 

a 

5x8 

30  to 

50 

10 

03 

< i 

9 

ti 

6|^x8^ 

30  to 

75 

15 

03| 

Ex. 

1 

it 

8x  10 

35  to  1 

00 

25 

05 

Ex. 

1 

i i 

lOx  12 

40  to  1 

50 

50 

08 

a 

1 

it 

11  X 14 

50  to  2 

00 

75 

10 

i6 

1 

a 

14  X 17 

1 00  to  4 

00 

1 00 

15 

1 

a 

Enlarging  and  Finishing  in  Crayon  on  Eastman’s  Permanent 
Bromide  Paper  for  the  Trade. 


FROM  GOOD  ORIGINAL  NEGATIVES  ONLY. 

Qur  UJoi’lt  »>ni  be  Guaranteed  First  Class  in  every  particuiar. 
Send  your  Order  for  Spscimen  print. 


Our  Patrons  will  find  this  a splendid  opportunity  to  increase  their  busi- 
ness, and  furnish  their  customers  a large  Portrait  at  a reasonable  price. 
Oost  is  now  within  the  reach  of  all.  We  have  established  a price  list 
having  a sliding  scale  to  cover  the  amount  of  work  to  be  done,  the  quality 
of  the  work  being  the  same.  Photographers  will  readily  understand  that 
a little  artistic  work  on  a good  Permanent  Bromide  Print  produces  a 
much  better  result  than  a large  amount  of  poor  work.  The  greatest  pains 
will  be  taken  with  all  work  entrusted  to  our  care,  and  no  effort  will  be 
spared  to  give  satisfaction  to  every  customer.  A trial  order  solicited. 

IDEIFinSTITIOlSr  OIF  "woi^ik:- 

Mounted  and  Retouched.— This  includes  spotting  and  mending  and  a 
few  artistic  touches  in  the  background,  sufficient  to  make  a readily  sale- 
able finished  print  from  a good  negative. 

Finished,  First  Class.— This  includes  an  artistic  background,  smooth- 
ing the  face,  sharpening  the  eyes  and  hair,  and  all  work  necessary  to 

make  a highly  finished  print.  . ^ xv 

Finished  Full  Crayon.— Includes  working  over  the  entire  print,  the 
result  being  a highly  finished  crayon  drawing. 


S'CHjJLTZE'f^^O'T'O-'EOLflP/^^t^r  CO.  Ar£:v^/  YORK- 


:e>i^ice  list. 


Size. 

1 

Unmounted. 

1 

Mounted. 

Mounted 

and 

Retouched 

Finished 
First  Class. 

Finished 

Full 

Crayon. 

lOx  12 

$1  00 

$1  50 

$2  50 

$4  00 

$6  00 

11  X 14 

1 25 

1 75 

2 75 

4 75 

7 00 

14x  17 

1 50  ! 

i 2 00  i 

3 00 

5 50 

8 25 

16  X 20 

1 75 

2 25 

3 50 

6 25 

9 50 

I8x  22 

2 25 

2 75  j 

1 4 00 

7 25 

11  00 

20x  24 

2 50 

3 00  1 

1 4 50 

8 00 

12  00 

22  x 27 

2 75 

3 50 

5 00 

8 50 

13  00 

25x  30 

3 00 

3 75 

5 50 

10  00 

15  00 

24x  36 

4 00 

4 75 

7 00 

15  00 

22  50 

30x  40 

6 00 

7 25 

10  00 

20  00 

30  00 

33|^  to  50  per  cent,  extra  for  finishing  copies. 

Above  prices  include  the  print.  Retouching  negatives  when  re- 
(juired,  charged  extra. 

Prices  of  finishing  in  pastel  and  water  color  on  application. 

Guarantee. — We  guarantee  the  likeness  when  no  changes  from  the 
negative  are  required.  All  changes  from  the  negative  are  at  client’s  risk, 
and  will  be  charged  extra  if  they  involve  extra  work. 


Prices  of  Enlargements  on  Opal  Glass. 


Plain  Finished  in 

Size.  Enlargement,  Monochrome. 

10x12 $3  00  $6  00 

11  X 14 3 50  7 00 

14x  17 4 00  8 00 

16  x20 4 50  9 00 

18x22 6 00  11  00 

20  x24 7 00  13  00 


From  good  original  negatives  only. 

The  prices  for  finishing  include  the  enlargement. 


SOLAR  PRINTING  FOR  THE  TRADE. 

PRICE  LIST  FOR  PRINTS  BY  PLATINUM  PROCESS. 


Size  of  Print. 

Price. 

Size  of  Head. 

Mounted  on 
Cardboard. 
Extra. 

Mounted  on 
Stretcher. 
Extra. 

8x  10 

$0  50 

214  ill. 

$0  10 

$.... 

10  X 12 

75 

3 “ 

10 

11  X 14 

75 

4 

10 

’36 

14x  17 

1 00 

5 

15 

40 

18 X 22 

1 75  ' 

6 

25 

40 

::0x  24 

2 00 

8 “ 

30 

40 

22  X 27 

2 25 

8^  “ 

.... 

40 

- o X 30 

2 50 

[ 9 “ 

.... 

50 

29  X 36 

4 00 



75 

; 0 x 40 

5 00 

8 00 

12  00 

18  00 

10  “ 

1 00 

HU  X 04* 

45  X 60 

Mx  72 

Stretchers  will  be  furnished  at 

54  X 100 

25  00 

J cost  price  for  these  four  sizes. 

P!ease  mention  size  of  head,  or  we  will  print  the  sizes  quoted  above. 
We  make  no  charge  for  negatives. 


225 


‘ Thg  ^0 Hu L^TZE  PHOro- EQU-{PZ\EHT  CO.  /V£vs^  YORK* 


Price  List  for  India  Ink  Work. 


Size  of  trint. 

8 X 10 from  $ 1 50  to  $ 3 50  each. 

lOx  12.. “ 2 00  “ 4 50  “ 

11x14. “ 4 25  “ 6 50  “ 

14x  17 “ 5 50  “ 7 50  “ 

16x20 “ 7 50  “ 10  50  “ 

18x22 “ 8 50  “ 12  00  “ 

20x24 “ 1100“  17  00  “ 

25  X 30 “ 14  00  “ 20  00  “ 


Finished  in  water  colors  for  same  prices.  Print  included. 


]|rti8tic  photograph  Coloriog  for  the  Trade. 


Photographers  who  have  introduced  photograph  coloring  in  the 
proper  manner  to  their  patrons  have  found  it  very  remunerative. 
It  is  a fact,  however,  that  a vast  majority  of  photographers,  for  various 
reasons,  are  unable  to  offer  artistic  work,  and  hence  do  not  take  any 
interest  in  offering  it  to  their  patrons.  Any  one  of  good  taste  can  do  the 
ordinary  tinting,  but  to  color  a photograph  completely  and  artistically, 
including  background  and  accessories,  takes  an  expert  to  execute. 

We  have  several  expert  color  artists  in  our  employ,  which  enables  us 
to  offer  the  best  work  to  our  patrons  at  marvelously  low  rates.  Photo- 
graphs will  be  returned  artistically  colored,  brilliantly  burnished,  and 
with  a tissue  cover,  in  from  three  to  six  days  from  date  of  receipt. 

You  should  have  a good  line  of  samples  to  show  your  patrons  the 
style  of  work  you  can  furnish,  and  these  we  will  color  at  a reduction  of 
25  per  cent,  from  the  prices  given  below,  provided  they  are  included  in 
first  order,  and  in  amount  not  less  than  one  dozen  assorted  cabinets,  or 
mixed  sizes  to  correspond  in  amount. 

RRIGE  LIST. 


Cabinets,  each |0  25 

Panels,  “ 35 

Boudoirs,  “ 50 

Imperials,  “ 60 

8 X 10  “ 75 


11  X 14,  each 
14x17,  “ 

16  X 20,  “ 

18  X 22,  “ 

20  X 24,  “ 


$1  25 
. 2 00 
. 2 50 
, 3 50 
, 4 00 


These  prices  are  only  for  the  original  or  perfect  prints,  but  may  be  on 
albumen,  plain  or  bromide  paper. 

The  color  of  hair,  eyes,  complexion  and  jewelry  should  be  plainly 
given.  Drapery,  etc.,  will  be  colored  according  to  directions,  as  nearly 
as  possible,  or  may  be  left  to  the  taste  of  the  artist. 


PRICE  LIST  of  PICTURE  FRAMES. 

Price  per  Bozen. 

No.  9.— 13^-inch  polished  walnut  with  ^-inch  stencil  gilt. 


Size. 

With  glass  and 
back.  Fitted. 

Without  glass  and 
back.  Unfitted. 

8x10  inside  measurement 

$ 5 00 

$ 4 50 

lOx  12. 

6 00 

5 25 

11  X 14 

8 25 

6 75 

14  X 17 

8 30 

16  X 20 : : 

13  00 

10  00 

No.  16. — l)^-inch  walnut,  1-inch  imitation  rosewood,  engraved  corners, 

and  ^-inch  gilt, 

< 226 


ThP  S'CHUL.TZE  'f^Horo-EOiri CO.  /SEW  YORK* 


8 X 10  inside  measurement. 

lOx  13 

11  xl4 


8 

00 

7 

50 

9 

00 

8 

25 

11 

00 

9 

50 

14 

00 

11 

50 

18 

00 

15 

00 

No.  19. — 13^-inch  polished  walnut.  1-inch  French  veneer,  engraved 
corners,  and  13^-inch  fancy  gilt. 

8 X 10  inside  measurement 9 60  9 10 

10  X 12 10  80  10  05 

11  xl4 13  50  ' 11  00 

14  X 17 15  50  13  00 

16  x20 19  00  16  00 

No.  25. — 2-inch  fancy  gilt,  1-inch  ebony,  engraved  corners,  and  ll^-inch 

fluted  gilt. 

8 X 10 9 60  9 10 

10x12 ■ 10  80  10  05 

11  X 14 13  50  11  00 

14x  17 15  50  13  00 

16  x20... 19  00  16  00 

No.  28. — 23^-inch  flat  imitation  French  veneer  with  handsome 
engraved  corners,  center  pieces,  and  1 34* inch  fluted  gilt. 

8x10  inside  measurement 


11  xl4. 


No.  154.  — 334-inch  fancy  or  st 
8x10  inside  measurement . 


10  00 

9 50 

11  00 

10  25 

13  00 

11  50 

16  50 

14  00 

20  00 

17  00 

10  00 

9 50 

11  00 

10  25 

13  00 

11  50 

16  50 

14  00 

20  00 

17  00 

11  xl4 

14x17. 

16x20 

Besides  these  we  carry  in  stock  and  make  up  to  order  a flne  line  of 
fancy  Oak,  Gold  and  Bronze  Frames.  Prices  and  description  furnished 
on  application.  We  can  furnish  anything  in  the  frame  line  at  lowest 
prices. 


UioiTsted  Picture  Cord. 


Per  piece,  net. 

No.  0.  Twenty  yards $0  12 

“ 3.  “ 20 

“ 4.  “ 25 


No.  5. 
“ 7. 


Twenty  yards 


Per  piece,  net. 

$0  30 

35 


CUire  Picture  Cord. 


No.  0. 
“ 1. 
“ 2. 
“ 3. 
“ 4, 


Silver. 


Per  piece,  net. 

$0  05 

08 

13 

15 

20 


No.  0. 
“ 1. 
“ 2. 
“ 3. 
“ 4. 


Gold, 


Per  piece,  net. 

$0  15 

20 

25 

35 

45 


No. 

115. 

114, 

113. 

112, 

111 

110 


Per  Gross. 

,...$0  30 

No.  Per  Gross. 

109 $0  45 

33 

108 50 

35 

107 60 

....  38 

106 63 

105 80 

104., 1 00 

237 


PICTURE  NAIL-S. 

In  all  styles,  from  26c.  per  doz.  and  $1,75  per  gross  upwards 


PICTURE  I MATS. 

Common  White  Paper  mats. 

GILT  LINE  AROUND  OPENING. 


Size.  Per  100. 

8 X 10,  with  o vral,  square  or  arch  opening $ 75 

10  X 12  “ “ ‘‘  “ 1 00 

Embossed  or  Pebbled  mats 


Per  Doz. 
10  10 
15 


Size. 

Per  100. 

Per  Doz. 

Size. 

Per  100. 

Per  Doz. 

8 X 10.  . 

|1  35 

$0  20 

1 16  X 20 

$8  00 

$l  00 

10  X 12.. 

1 75 

25 

1 18  x22 

1 80 

11  X 14. . 

3 00 

40 

1 20  X 24 

2 25 

14  X 17. . 

80 

1 22  X 28.  . . . . 

2 75 

Gray 

English  Mats. 

• 

GRAY  ENGLISH 

BOARD  WITH  GILT  BEVEL  OPENING. 

Per  100. 

Per  Doz. 

Per  100. 

Per  Doz. 

8x10.. 

^6  00 

$0  72  1 

16x20 

$18  00 

$2  20 

10x12.. 

7 00 

85  1 

18  X 22 

20  00 

2 35 

11  X 14. . 

9 00 

1 10  1 

20  X 24 

25  00 

3 00 

14  X 17. . 

13  00 

1 65  1 

22  X 28 

3 75 

Deep  Bevel  Mats. 

Deep,  burnished  gold  bevel,  with  pebbled  face. 

square  or  arch. 


No.  108. 

Any  size  openings,  oval, 


Size.  Per  Doz. 

8 X 10 $2  25 

10x12 3 00 

11  X 14 4 00 

14  X 17 7 00 


Size.  Per  Doz. 

16x20 |12  00 

18  X 22 15  00 

20  X 24 18  00 

22x28 20  00 


As  in  all  other  lines,  we  have  unusual  facilities  for  supplying  at  lowest 
figures,  picture  mats  of  every  description  from  the  cheapest  to  the  best 
grade.  Odd  sizes  and  styles  furnished  to  order  at  shortest  notice.  Send 
for  quotat  ons. 

L-OOKING  GL-MSSES. 

We  are  prepared  to  fill  orders  for  looking  glasses,  pier  glasses,,  etc. 
Our  line  is  very  complete  and  the  goods  are  all  first-class.  Prices  from 
$1.00  upwar  Is.  Description  and  quotations  on  application. 


STUDIO  EKSELS. 

Elegant  designs  in  Oak,  Cherry  and  Imitation  Mahogany,  ranging  in 
price  from  $2.50  to  $5.00  each. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  STANDS  AND  TABLES 

in  Walnut.  Elegant  designs,  from  $1.25  to  $4.60  each* 


ThP  S'CHiJLjrZE  PH0ro-EO{fiP/\^l^T  CO.  A^£V/  YORK* 


JNo.  198F.  No.  1421^:. 

Our  stock  comprises  the  latest  styles,  and  prices  range  from  58c.  up- 
wards. Herewith  we  give  a few  of  the  most  popular  styles  ; to  enumerate 
the  complete  line  would  take  up  too  much  space.  Send  us  your  orders 
stating  about  how  much  you  desire  to  expend  and  we  will  send  you 
something  that  we  know  will  suit. 


No.  185, 


329 


^ ThQ  S'CHUL^TZE  PHoro- EOUr{P/-\^l^T  Co.  /v£:v/  YORK-  '- 


Descplplion  of  fllbunis. 

130.  Genuine  French  Morocco  Leather,  embossed  gold  design.  $2.60. 
135.  Embossed  Silk  Plush,  Alligator  Pattern,  nickel  word  “Souvenir.” 
$2.60. 

1423^.  Silk  Plush,  padded,  with  nickel  word,  “Portraits,”  and  embossed 
pages.  $2.65. 

198  F.  Embossed  Silk  Plush,  with  floral  inside.  $2.65. 

These  albums  are  in  quarto  size,  about  11  inches  long,  9 inches  wide, 
and  about  3 inches  thick  ; are  arranged  for  30  Cabinets  and  32  Cards,  or 
for  40  Cabinets  and  2 panels.  They  are  fitted  with  Patent  Nickel 
Extension  Clasps  and  Vellum  Cloth  Guard  Joints,  and  when  open  lie 
perfectly  flat. 


ENTREKIN’S  MAGIC  LUBRICATOR. 

AN  EXCELLENT  ARTICLE  FOR  BURNISHING  PHO- 
TOGRAPHS. PRICE  PER  CAKE,  15  CENTS. 


SUBSCRIPTIONS  RECEIVED 

FOR  ALL 

jourfiat^^ 

A full  line  of  publications  in  stock ; mailed  post-paid  on  receipt  of  price. 


HARD  RUBBER  DIPPERS. 


No.  4.  For  5x  7 Bath $0  40 

“ 5.  “ 7x10  “ 45 

“ 6.  “ 9x11  “ ' 50 

“ 6i.  “ 11x14  “ 55 

“ 7.  “ 12x16  “ 60 

“ 9.  “15x20  “ 1 10 

“10.  “ 18  X 22  “ 1 60 


FOCUSING  CLOTHS. 

Ordinary each  $0  25 

Good  Rubber “ 60 

Best  “ “ 75 

Best  Velvet. “ 125 


Thg  s'CHuurzE.  qro '£^pyjPz\E^ r co.  /^ew  York- 


nnthong’s  Series  of  Photo  Poblications. 

No.  1.  Lea’s  Manual  of  Photography.  Second  edition,  octavo,  cloth, 
440  pp.  ; fine  toned  paper  ; 150  wood- cuts.  The  most  scholarly  work 
of  its  kind.  $3.75. 

No.  2.  The  Silver  Simheam.  By  Prof.  Towler,  M.D.  Ninth  edition, 
cloth,  650  pp.,  large  12mo.  The  most  popular  and  complete  of  all  the 
photographic  manuals.  100  wood-cuts.  $3.00. 

No.  3.  El  Rayo  Solar  (Spanish).  Octavo,  cloth,  540  pp. ; fine  toned 
paper.  The  only  reliable  treatise  on  the  art  of  photography  in  that  ■ 
language.  Second  edition.  $6.00. 

No.  4.  How  to  Paint  Photographs.  By  Geo.  B.  Ayres.  Sixth  edition. 
Cloth,  208  pp.  Revised  and  enlarged  and  brought  up  to  every 
present  requirement.  Price  again  reduced  to  $1.00. 

No.  5.  The  Ferrotype  and  How  to  Make  It.  By  E.  M.  Estabrooke 
Fifth  edition.  Cloth,  176  pp.,  12mo.  The  Standard.  $1.00. 

No.  6.  The  Art  of  Retouching.  Revised  by  the  author,  Mk.  J.  P. 
Ourdan.  Cloth,  large  12mo.  Tinted  super-calendered  paper.  Il- 
lustrated with  lithographic  drawings,  photographs  and  wood-cuts. 
$1.00. 

No.  7.  Modern  Dry  Plates,  or  Emulsion  Photography.  By  Dr.  J.  M. 
Eder,  the  eminent  German  authority  on  Gelatine.  ’ Translated  by 
Mr.  Horace’  Milner  and  edited  by  Mr.  H.  Baden  Pritchard,  F.  C.  S. 
138  pp.  large  12mo.  Cloth,  $1.00  ; in  paper  cover,  30  cents. 

No.  8.  The  Art  and  Practise  of  Silver  Printing.  By  Capt.  W.  De  W.  Ab- 
ney and  Mr.  H.  P.  Robinson.  128  pp.,  large  12mo.  Cloth,  75  cents ; 
in  paper,  30  cents. 

No.  9.  Burton’s  Modern  Photography.  A revised  and  enlarged  edition 
of  the  A B C of  Modern  Dry  Plate  Photography.  By  W.  K>  Burton, 
C.  E.  126  pp. ; paper,  35  cents. 

No.  10.  The  (Photographic)  Studios  of  Europe.  By  H.  Baden  Pritchard, 

• F.  C.  S.  280  pp.,  large  12mo  ; 40  wood-cuts.  The  cheapest  and  most 
practical  hand-book  ever  published.  Cloth,  $1.00;  in  paper 
cover,  50  cents. 

No.  11.  Elementary  Treatise  of  Photographic  Chemistry.  By  Arnold 
Spiller.  72  pp.,  paper  cover,  illustrated.  Companion  to  the  A B C of 
Modern  Photography.  25  cents. 

No.  12.  How  to  Make  Photographs.  By  T.  C.  Roche.  Edited  by 
H.  T.  Anthony.  Revised  and  enlarged.  With  an  appendix  by 
Arthur  H.  Elliott,  Ph.  D.,  F.  C.  S.  The  best,  most  comprehensive  and 
reliable  work  published  on  amateur  photography.  Illustrated  with 
photographs  made  with  amateur  outfits,  and  profusely  illustrated 
with  wood-cuts.  122  pp.,  paper,  50  cents  ; cloth  75  cents. 

No.  13.  La  Fotografla  Hecha  Facil.  The  Spanish  edition  of  How  to 
Make  Photographs.  Revised  and  enlarged  as  above.  A complete  man* 
ual  of  dry  plate  photography.  Cloth,  $1.00. 

No.  14.  Wie  Photographische  Bilder  Gemacht  Werden.  The  German 
edition  of  How  to  Make  Photographs.  Cloth,  $1.00. 


231 


s^cHj/L.rzEi^moro - Eoirtpy^E/^x  co-  ./v£:w/  york^ 


No.  15.  comment  on  Fait  Les  Photographies.  The  French  edition  of 
How  to  Make  Photographs.  Cloth,  $1.00. 

No.  16.  About  Photography  and  Photographers.  By  H.  Baden  Prit- 
chard. Regular  edition,  $1.00.  Pocket  edition,  30  cents. 

No.  17.  Como  Fazer  Photographias.  The  Portuguese  edition  of  How 
to  Make  Photographs.  Cloth,  $1.00. 

No.  18.  How  to  Photograph  Microscopic  Objects.  By  I.  H.  Jennings. 
The  best  practical  treatise  on  the  subject  of  Photo- micrography. 
Cloth,  75  cents. 

No.  19.  The  Magic  Lantern  and  its  Applications.  By  L.  H.  Laudy, 
Ph.  D.  The  most  complete  manual  on  the  Magic  Lantern  published. 
Octavo,  cloth,  75  cents. 

No.  20.  Photography  in  the  Studio  and  in  the  Field.  By  E.  M. 
Estabrooke,  author  of  The  Ferrotype  and  How  to  Make  It.  A 
practical  manual  for  the  amateur  or  professional  photographer. 
Profusely  illustrated,  12mo.,  cloth,  238  pages.  $1.50. 

No.  21.  On  the  Choice  and  Use  of  Photographic  Lenses  (with  addi- 
tional papers  and  tables).  By  J.  H.  Dallmeyer,  F.  R.  A.  S.  Sixth 
edition.  Revised  and  enlarged.  Paper,  50  cents. 


The  Scovlll  Photographic  Series. 

No.  1.  The  Photographic  Amateur.  By  J.  Traill  Taylor.-  A guide  to 
the  young  photographer,  either  professional  or  amateur.  Second 
edition.  Paper  covers,  50  cents.  Library  edition,  $1.00. 

No.  2.  The  Art  and  Practice  of  Silver  Printing.  By  H.  P.  Robinson 
and  Capt.  W.  De  W.  Abney,  R.  E.,  F.  R.  S.  Third  edition.  Paper 
covers,  50  cents.  Library  edition,  75  cents. 

No.  4.  How  to  Make  Pictures.  By  Henry  Clay  Price.  Fourth  edi- 
tion. The  A B C of  Dry-Plate  Photography.  Paper  covers,  50  cents. 
Library  edition,  75  cents. 

No.  5.  Photography  with  Emulsions.  By  Capt.  W.  De  W.  Abney,  R.  E., 
F.  R.  S.  A treatise  on  the  theory  and  practical  working  of  Gelatine 
and  Collodion  Emulsion  Processes.  Second  edition.  Paper  covers, 
75  cents.  Cloth  bofund,  $1.00. 

No.  7.  The  Modern  Practise  of  Retouching.  As  practiced  by  M. 
Piguepe,  and  other  celebrated  experts.  Fourth  edition.  Paper 
covers,  50  cents.  Library  edition,  75  cents. 

No.  8.  The  Spanish  Edition  of  How  to  Make  Pictures.  Ligeras 
Leccion^s  sobre  Fotografia  Dedicados  a Los  Aficionados.  Paper 
covers,  50  cents.  Cloth  bound,  $1.00. 

No.  9.  Twelve  Elementary  Lessons  in  Photographic  Chemistry.  Pre- 
• sented  in  very  concise  and  attractive  shape.  Second  edition.  Paper 
covers,  50  cents.  Cloth  bound,  75  cents. 


232 


^ XCHULtZEi  PHOTO' £QLflPZ-\E/^T  Co.  /v£v/  YORK- 


No.  12.  Hardwich’s  Photographic  Chemistry.  A manual  of  photo- 
graphic chemistry,  theoretical  and  practical.  Ninth  edition.  Edited 
by  J.  Traill  Taylor.  Leatherette  binding,  $2  00. 

No.  13.  Twelve  Elementary  Lessons  on  Silver  Printing.  Second 
edition.  Paper  covers,  50  cents. 

No.  14.  About  Photography  and  Photographers.  A series  of  inter- 
esting essays  for  the  studio, and  study,  to  which  is  added  European 
Kambles  with  a Camera.  By  H.  Baden  Pritchard,  F.  C.  S.  Paper 
covers,  50  cents.  Cloth  bound,  75  cents. 

No.  15.  The  Chemical  Effect  of  the  Si)ectrum.  By  Dr.  J.  M.  Eder. 
Paper  covers,  25  cents.  Cloth  bound,  50  cents. 

No.  16.  Picture  Making  by  Photography.  By  H.  P.  Robinson.  Author 
of  Pictorial  Effect  in  Photography.  Written  in  popular  form  and 
finely  illustrated.  Paper  covers,  75  cents.  Library  edition,  $1.00. 

No.  17.  First  Lessons  in  Amateur  Photography.  By  Prof.  Randall 
Spaulding.  A series  of  popular  lectures,  giving  elementary 
instruction  in  dry-plate  photography,  optics,  etc.  Second  edition 
Paper  covers,  25  cents.  Library  edition,  75  cents. 

No.  18.  Out  of  print. 

No.  lb.  The  Magic  Lantern  Manual.  Second  edition.  By  W.  I. 
Chadwick.  With  one  hundred  and  five  practical  illustrations.  Cloth 
bound,  75  cents. 

No.  20.  Dry  Plate  Making  for  Amateurs.  By  George  L.  Sinclair,  M.  D. 
Pointed,  practical  and  plain.  Leatherette  binding,  50  cents. 

No.  21.  The  American  Annual  of  Photography  and  Photographic 
Times  Almanac  for  1887.  Second  edition.  Paper  cover ; (postage, 
12  cents  additional),  50  cents.  Library  edition;  (postage,  12  cents 
additional),  $1.00. 

No.  22.  Photographic  Printing  Methods.  By  the  Rev.  W.  H.  Burbank. 
A practical  guide  to  the  professional  and  amateur  worker.  Paper 
covers,  75  cents.  Cloth  bound,  $1.00. 

No.  23.  A History  of  Photography.  Written  as  a practical  guide  and 
an  introduction  to  its  latest  developments.  By  W.  Jerome  Harrison, 
F.  G.  S.,  and  containing  a frontispiece  of  the  author.  Cloth  bound, 
$1.00. 

No.  24.  The  American  Annual  of  Photography  and  Photographic 
Times  Almanac  for  1888.  Illustrated.  Second  edition.  Paper; 
(by  mail,  12  cents  additional),  50  cents.  Library  edition ; (by  mail, 
12  cents  additional),  $1.00. 

No.  25.  The  Photographic  Negative.  A practical  Guide  to  the  prepara- 
tion of  sensitive  surfaces  by  the  Calotype,  Albumen,  Collodion  and 
Gelatine  Processes,  on  glass  and  paper,  with  supplementary  Chapter 
on  development,  etc.,  by  the  Rev.  W.  H.  Burbank.  Cloth  bound,  $1.50. 

No.  26.  The  Phote graphic  Instructor  for  the  Professional  and  Amateur. 
Being  the  comprehensive  series  of  practical  lessons  issued  to  the 
students  of  the  Chautauqua  School  of  Photography.  Revised  and 
enlarged.  Edited  by  W.  I.  Lincoln  Adams,  with  an  Appendix  by 
Prof.  Charles  Ehrmann.  Paper  covers,  75  cents.  Library  edition,  $1.25. 


233 


S'CHULTZE  O'f'O ZS  1 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Accessories — Papier  Mache 115  to  128 

Profile 112  to  114 

Air  Brush 183 

Albums — Eclipse 189 

Howard’s 185-186 

Howard’s  Foto  Folio 184 

Photograph 229 

Scovill’s 187 

Scovill  Porte  Feuille 188 

American  Songster HI 

Artificial  Plants  and  Flowers 130 

Attachments  for  Portrait  Cameras 59-60 


Baby  Holders— Baldwin’s 100 

I White’s 109 

Backgrounds — Bargain 129 

Felt 129 

German  Vignette 129 

Plain 129 

Scenic 129 

Brushes — Camel  Hair 157 

Flat  Bristle 107 

Hard  Rubber  Set  and  Bound 157 

Sable  Pencils 103 

Burnishers — Accurate  Rotary 150-151 

Acme 146  to  148 

American  Rotary I43 

Eureka 150 

New  American  Rotary I49 

Quadruplex  Enameler I45 

Randall I44 


Calcined  Flour I59 

Cameras — Acme  Reversible  Back  View 39 

, Albion 35  to  38 

Blair’s  Champion  Reversible  Back  View 41 

“ Combination  View 42 

“ Cincinnati  Reversible  Back  View 47 

“ English  Compact  R.  B.  View 45-46 

“ Improved  Reversible  Back  View 40 

Bon  Ton  Ferrotype 04 

Boston  Reversible  Back  View 49 

Cincinnati  Gem 09 


f 

1 


new  york- 


Page- 

Cameras — Climax  Detective 24 

Climax  Enlarging,  Reducing  and  Copying 05 

Climax  Ferrotype 62 

Climax  Portrait 57-58 

Climax  Portrait  and  Gem 63 

Climax  Royal  Portrait 61 

Climax  Solid  Bed  Portrait 61 

Concealed 25 

Daylight  Enlarging 66 

Duplex  Novelette  View 51 

Fairy  View 54-55 

Flammang  Revolving  Back  View 33-34 

Front  Focus  Novelette  View 52 

Hawkeye  Detective  and  View 19 

Improved  5x7  Victoria  Portrait 62 

Kodak  Detective 20 

Landscape 39 

Lilliput  Detective 18 

Matchless  Cone  View  R.  B 31 

Novel  View 53 

New  York  Gem 62 

New  York  Imperial 59 

Novelette  View 50 

Novelette  Copying  and  View 51 

O.  I.  C.  Copying 65 

O.  I.  C.  Portrait 64 

R.  O.  Co.’s  Excelsior  R.  B.  View 49 

R.  O.  Co.’s  Ideal  View 48 

Satchel  Detective 22-23 

Scovill  Detective 21 

St.  Louis  Reversible  Back  View 32 

Tom  Thumb  Pocket 17 

Venus  Reversible  Back  View 31 

Camera  Outfits— American  Favorite 14 

Bicycle 26 

Brooklyn 16 

Centennial 27 

Climax ; 29 

Elite 15 

Victor 30 

1889  Instantaneous 28 

Camera  Stands— Acme 84 

Bonanza 79 

Bowdish 85 

Elite '..  82 

Excelsior 84 

Gem  City 77-78 

Knickerbocker 85 

Lever 83 

Magic 80-81 

Perfect 83 


11 


Pa?e. 

Card  and  Paper  Cutter 

Casters — Magic 

Chamois  Skins. 

Chemicals 

Clips— Adt’s 

Lockwood’s 

Spring  Clothes  Pins 

Collodions 

Collodion  Vial — Effective 

Colors — Acme  Transparent 166-167 

Bryant’s  Permanent  Mixed  Paints  for  repairing  backgrouu  ds.  170 

Chinese 

Egyptian  Chemical 

Miscellaneous 

Moist 166 

Coloring  for  the  Trade. ^^6 

Cooper’s  Enlarging  Lantern 67-68 

Cotton — Gun 215 

Fettering 1^6 

Cuffs — Artist’s 160 

Cut-Outs  or  Medallion  Masks 1^0 

Dark  Room  Lamps — Alladin 165 

I.  C.  Pocket  Ruby  Lantern 152 

Par  Excellence  Candle 154 

Petite  Lantern 153 

Student  Ruby  Lamp 152 

Superior  Ruby  Lamp 154 

Developers — Par  Excellence 216 

Universal  Compound  Hydrochinon 217 

Developing  Fork 140 

Developing  Rocker 182 

Diamonds 185 

Diamond  Paste 183 

Dippers,  Hard  Rubber 230 

Dry  Plates 218-219 

Dry  Plate  Safety  Box 171 

Easels — Anthony’s  Bromide 197 

Anthony’s  Universal 197 

Background 128 

Eastman’s  Enlargi  n g 198 

Studio 228 

Enlarging  for  the  Trade 224  to  226 

Evaporating  Dishes — Agate 135 

Porcelain 134 

Extensions — Blair’ s Patent 43-44 

Films — Carbutt’s  Culluloid 220 

Eastman’s  American 207-208 

Eastman’s  Flexible 221 

Film  Carriers 141  to  196 


RHQro^EO^{p/\wr  co.  new  roRK^ 


ITitK®- 

Flash  Lamps — Hibbard  Repeating 200 

Imperial 202 

Pneumatic  Flasher. 204 

Reeve’s 203 

Safety 201 

FlashPowders— Blitz  Pul ver 204 

Magnesium  Cartridges 205 

Pure  Magnesium 204 

Schultze’s  Best  Flash  Powder 204 

Violet  Lightning  Flash  Compound 204 

Focusing  Cloths 230 

Focusing  Glasses — Schultze’s  Compound 12 

Funnels — Glass  Bulb 136 

“ Fluted 136 

“ Plain 137 

Papier  Mache 138 

Polished  Rubber 137 

Funnel  Stand 137 

Gelatines 215 

Glass— B.  P.  C 169 

Convex 170 

Etched  for  Transparencies 191 

French  Crystal 169 

Ground 191 

Opal  for  Transparencies 220 

Orange  and  Ruby 170 

Glass  Baths 133 

Glass  Graduates 135 

Glass  Patterns 156 

Glass  Stirring  Rods 135 

Glass  Tubes  for  Silvering 134 

Gold  and  Silver  Saucers 165 

Grass  Mats — Oil  Thread 128 

Hard  Rubber  Plates 141 

Head  Rests — Centennial 105 

Rigid Ill 

Success 105 

White’s  Chair  Rest 

White’s  Posing  Supports 110 

Head  Screens— White’s 106  to  108 

Hercules  Glue 130 

Hydrometers 135 

Kits  for  Eastman’s  Enlarging  Easel 199 

For  Wet  and  Dry  Plates 73 

Lenses — Condensing 9 

Rectiscope  Rapid  Rectilinear 8-9 

Rectiscope  Wide  Angle 11-12 

Single  Achromatic 3 to  6 

Superior  Gem  Tubes 7 


IV 


Page. 

Lenses — Superior  Portrait 13 

T.  L.  S.  Rapid  Rectilinear 6-7 

T.  L.  S.  Wide  Angle 10 

. Looking  Glasses 228 

Lubricator — Entrekin’s  Magic 

Richardson’s  Glace 205 

Magnesium  Cartridges 205 

Mailing  Envelopes 163 

Manipulator — Adt’s 193 

Medallion  Masks  or  Cut  Outs  •. 159 

Mortars  and  Pestles 139 

Negative  Boxes 143 

Negative  Clasp  and  Drying  Rack 140 

Negative  Preservers 164  and  186 

Negative  Rack 141 

Negative  Washing  Boxes 101-192 

Oil  Stoves — Acme 180 

Acme  Portable  Rack  for  same • 181 

Queen 179 

Opaque — Gihon’s 166 

Outfits — Blue  Paper 223 

Bromide  Paper 223 

Developing 222 

Lantern  Slides 223 

Printing 222 

Papers— Albumen 209-210 

Anthony’s  Bromide 212 

Blotting 212 

Cepa  Skin 211 

demon’s  Salted 210 

Eastman’s  Bromide  Copying 208 

“ Negative 207 

“ Permanent  Bromide 206 

“ Transferrotype 208 

Endless  Roll 210 

English  Tissue 211 

Ferro  Prussiate 211 

Filtering 211 

Gummed 212 

Joseph 211 

Letmus 212 

Mask 212 

Needle 212 

Peerless  Aristotype 209 

Plain  Saxe 210 

Sensitized  Albumen 210 

Weymouth  Vignette 159 

Paper  Hanger — Wheelers 173 

Paper  Preservative — Perfect 194 

Paper  Preserving  Tubes — W.  and  G 194 

Paper  Stretcher  and  Dryer — Kuhn’s 173 


P/^oro-toc/fP/Af/^r.co.  /weW'YORK^ 


Pa?e. 

Tripods — Blair’s  Combination 87 

Daisy 88 

English  Folding 84 

Extension 86 

Hercules 81 

Triplex 88 

Varnishes 216 

Varnish  Pot  and  Filterer 195 

View  Fender — T.  L.  S ...  7 

Vignetters— Kuhn’s  Improved  Vignetting  Attachment 175 

New  Magic • 174 

Scott’s 161 

Seed’s  Transparent 160 

Weymouth  Papers. 159 

. Vitro  Metalique 154 

Wordow  Box  for  Enlarging 66 


T^E  CARRY  IN  STOCK  OR  CAN  FURNISH  YOU 
DIRECT  FROM  THE  FACTORY  ANY  SIZE, 
COLOR  OR  QUALITY  OF  MOUNT  YOU  MAY  RE- 
QUIRE. 

ALL  GOODS  IN  THIS  LINE  ARE  FROM  THE 


JUSTLY  CELEBRATED  FACTORY  OF 


fi.  f(\.  Qollips  Qo., 

PHIL-KDELRHIK,  PK. 

THE  QUANTITY  AND  VARIETY  OF  GOODS  WE 
CARRY  IN  STOCK  IS  AS  LARGE  AS  ANY  HOUSE  IN 


Q(_/i 

F CARD  STOCK  SENT  ON  APPLI- 

33304- 


